Building in Amman Electrical Specifications September

Rehabilitation of The American Centre of Oriental Research (ACOR) Building in Amman

Electrical Specifications

September / 2020 Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 1 of 13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Operation, maintenance and testing/commissioning of electrical systems.

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Division 14 Related Sections

2. Division 26 Electrical Works.

3. Division 27 Related Sections

4. Division 28 Related Sections

5. Division 33 Related Sections

6. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections

1.2 REFERENCES

A. All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes and standards except as provided otherwise herein: - International Electro-technical Commission – IEC - British Standards – BS - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers – IEEE - National Fire Protection Association – NFPA - Local codes and ordinances

B. All inspections and tests shall utilize the following references: 1. Project design specifications 2. Project design drawings 3. Manufacturer’s instruction manuals applicable to each particular apparatus.

2. 1 GENERAL

A. Access shall be afforded at all times to the Engineer to enable him to inspect the Electrical Equipments.

1. Upon completion of the Electrical Equipment installation or part of the installation, the carry out and be responsible for testing and commissioning, in stages if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of performing all of its functions in accordance with the Specification and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any Electrical Equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced and retested by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 2 of 13

2. All testing shall be carried out according to the requirements of the relevant standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in the Specification or otherwise agreed by the Engineer in writing.

3. Submit for Engineer's approval, no later than 6 weeks prior to the commencement of testing and commissioning, a schedule of all Electrical Equipment tests and commissioning procedures to be carried out to prove that the Electrical Equipment complies with the requirements of the Specification together with proposed programme for such testing and commissioning.

4. Tests shall not commence before the schedule of tests has been approved and such other tests as may be required by the Engineer shall be included within the schedule of tests.

5. Give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days' notice of the date by which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation. Unless otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date on such day or days as the Engineer shall in writing notify the Contractor.

6. The Contractor shall fully coordinate with the project third party Commissioning Agent and provide all needed cooperation to facilitate his work.

7. The tests shall as far as possible be carried out under normal working conditions to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall extend over such periods as he may direct.

8. Provide all skilled labor, supervision, consumables, apparatus and instruments required for commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time thereafter furnish to the Engineer a total of six certificates of all tests performed and accepted, signed by the Contractor, or an authorized person acting on his behalf, as prescribed in the appropriate regulations and specifications.

9. When any part of the Electrical Equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests shall be repeated, if required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, without delay, put in hand such modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in the Contract and any expense which the Owner may have incurred by reason of such further tests may be deducted from the Contract price.

10. Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for the performance of the Electrical Equipment after erection as a complete working system in all respects.

11. Each completed system within the installation shall be tested as a whole under normal site operating conditions to ensure that each component functions correctly in conjunction with the rest of the system.

B. Programme, oversee, co-ordinate and record all the testing and commissioning of the electrical systems in co-ordination with those elements undertaken by the mechanical services Contractor. The electrical Contactor shall allow for liaising and attendance and providing all necessary test and general data information at the correct times.

C. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in Section 25 50 00.

D. The systems shall undergo phases of testing and commissioning, in accordance with the following:-

1. Phase 1. Works testing and quality assurance of elements;

2. Phase 2. Site installation, wiring, checks, performance and operational tests for all elements;

3. Phase 3. Sub system group operational tests/performance tests; Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 3 of 13

4. Phase 4. Complete system operational and performance tests on dummy loads;

5. Phase 5. Complete system operational and performance tests on actual loads.

E. All the electrical systems, whether mentioned in this section or not, shall be subject to testing and commissioning.

F. All tests listed under the heading of “Field Quality Control” in various sections of Division-26 of these Specifications shall be conducted in the presence of and performed upto the full satisfaction of the Engineer. All the results/test reports shall be submitted in bound form for Engineer’s approval.

G. All Electrical Equipment and integral systems shall be commissioned in accordance with the relevant standards and regulations given in the Specification and to the recommendations of specialist suppliers (e.g. Switchboards, Standby Generators, Fire Detection and Alarm System, Public Address System, Cables, etc.), as well as to the Local Authorities/ Utilities acceptance; the Contractor is responsible for getting A Report of The State Acceptance Commission which shall be part of the close out submittals the Contractor shall provide for all electrical systems.

H. Full operational tests shall be carried out on all systems to demonstrate that they operate in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.

I. Perform cause and effect tests, final tests and submit to the Engineer for Approval.

J. Tests mentioned in this specifications are the minimum required tests, all other tests mentioned in related international standards are required.

2. 2 ELECTRICAL TESTING

A. Tests of the installation shall be carried out in the following sequence:

1. Ring-main continuity.

2. Protective conductor continuity, including main and supplementary equipotential bonding.

3. Earth electrode resistance.

4. Measurement of insulation resistance including site built assemblies and distribution cables.

5. Check of protection by electrical separation, barriers and enclosures.

6. Measurement of the insulation on non-conducting floors and walls.

7. Check of phase rotation.

8. Verification of polarity.

9. Measurement of earth fault loop impedance.

10. Test of operation of residual current devices.

11. All external distribution cables, both high and low voltage in accordance with the relevant standard(s).

12. Fault simulation on protective devices or control system of stand-by generator, transformers, 10 kV cubicles, power distribution boards, motor control centers, etc.

13. Load test on standby generator, sub-station, power distribution boards, panelboards, ATS, synchronizing panels,…. etc. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 4 of 13

2. 3 LOW CURRENT SYSTEMS TESTING

A. All low current systems such as Data networks, IP telephone, public address, fire detection and alarm, IP TV, A/V systems, Secuirty Systems,….etc. shall be tested as specified herein or recommended by the manufacturers.

B. Submit to the Engineer in writing the procedure to test these systems as a whole for the site.

C. At the completion of these special systems installation for each facility, these shall be tested individually for each facility then it should be tested with their main control panel, such as fire detection and alarm, telephone etc. so that to see the good performance of these systems as a whole.

2. 4 LV POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD / PANELBOARDS/ MCCs

A. Type Tests (Factory TESTS); 1. Temperature Rise Limits 2. Dielectric Properties 3. Short Circuit Withstanding. 4. Protection Circuit efficiency. 5. Clearance and creepage distance. 6. Mechanical Operation 7. Degree of Protection. 8. Insulation Checking first possibility. 9. Checking protection measures and electrical continuity of the protection circuits. 10. Rated continuous current. 11. Short circuit current. 12. Enclosure dielectric. 13. Test of apparatus i.e. circuit breaker and earthing switch 14. Open arc test 15. Bus Bar Insulation Testing.

B. Functional tests of: 1. Dielectric. 2. Mechanical operation. 3. Grounding. 4. Control wiring. 5. Electrical operation. 6. Energy Meter Testing and Calibration. 7. C.T. and P.T. Insulation Testing and Ratio Verification. 8. Cable’s Insulation / HI-Pot Testing. 9. Cable’s Termination Kit’s Installation & Jointing etc. 10. Earth Testing.

2. 5 UPS SYSTEM

A. All routine tests specified in IEC 146-4 shall be carried out, together with tests listed below, both at the factory testing and on site. The UPS Supplier shall allow for providing a 110% load bank to fully commission the system following completion. Full load and battery discharge tests are required on site.

1. Synchronisation (dual variable voltage and variable frequency supplies will be required for this purpose at the factory and on site).

2. Rated stored energy time.

3. Rated restored energy time. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 5 of 13

4. Battery ripple current.

5. Overload capacity.

6. Restart.

7. Audible noise.

8. Earth fault test.

9. Full load test.

10. Tests to prove alarm and control indication and auxiliary devices.

B. The paralleling switchboard shall be tested to the requirements of BS 5486, and if not tested at factory with the UPS modules, to be fully functional tested with full simulation of all digital and analogue inputs. This is to include all autobypass and synchronising control simulation.

C. The supplier shall allow for up to 2 persons to witness the testing at the manufacturer’s works including travel, accommodation and subsidence during a minimum 2 day period. The supplier shall also allow for his commissioning engineer, who is to carry out the on-site testing to observe and witness the full factory testing of the units.

2. 6 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM A. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as Work progresses.

B. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses. The Engineer shall be notified before the start of the required tests. All items found at variance with the drawings or this specification during testing or inspection by the Engineer, shall be corrected.

C. Test reports shall be delivered to the Engineer as completed.

D. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests shall be made available by the installing Contractor. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:

1. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment.

2. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance.

3. Intelligent device programmer/tester.

4. Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and supplies.

5. Laptop computer with programming software for any required programme revision.

6. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring air flow through air duct smoke detector sampling assemblies.

A. 7. Decibel meter.

E. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing Contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the Engineer.

F. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system components and installation will be prepared by the Contractor and submitted for review and approval to the Engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, and this specification. The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 6 of 13

G. A programme matrix shall be prepared by the installing Contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving "any", "or", "not", "count", "time", and "timer" statements; the complete output equation shall be referenced in the matrix.

H. A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and logging printers shall be prepared by the installing Contractor prior to the ATP.

I. In conducting the ATP, the Engineer shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items tested shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in the event of:

a. Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog or network signaling circuits. b. Open, shorted and grounded conventional zone circuits. c. Open, shorted and grounded speaker telephone circuits. d. Primary power or battery disconnected. e. Intelligent device removal. f. Incorrect device at address. g. Printer trouble, off line or out of paper.

2. System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated as follows:

a. All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed. b. Audibility and visibility at required levels.

3. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows:

a. Correct message display for each alarm input at the control panel, each remote alpha-numeric display and each CRT terminal. b. Correct annunciator light for each alarm input at each annunciator and colour graphic terminal as shown on the Drawings. c. Correct printer logging for all system activity.

4. System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows:

a. Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input. b. Trouble signals received for disconnect.

5. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows:

a. System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as specified. b. System primary power shall be restored for forty eight hours and system charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged battery bank. c. System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD display.

6. Fireman's HVAC override system functions shall be demonstrated as follows:

a. Operation of key lockout switch preventing unauthorised operation of controls. b. On/Off controls of each controlled element and test of interaction of other automatic and manual control functions while in the over-ride mode. c. Correct status display of monitored elements. d. Correct logging of activity to printer and historical memory as programmed.

J. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during the ATP procedure, at the discretion of the Engineer, the test shall be terminated. The installing Contractor shall retest Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 7 of 13

the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test documentation to the Engineer. The Engineer may elect to require the complete ATP to be preformed again if, in his opinion, modifications to the system warrant complete retesting.

K. Changes made to a systems configuration program required by the acceptance inspector or to comply with the systems operating parameters shall be validated to insure that in making the software programming change no other part of the systems operation was effected. The validation shall utilize systems software which meets the requirements of NFPA 72 section 7-1.6 "System Reacceptance Testing" as specified in the NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 1993 edition. Change validation methods other than that described will not be considered acceptable and shall allow the acceptance inspector to require the complete ATP to be performed again.

2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM EARTH

A. Prior to any installation , perform soli resistivity measurements, submit to the Engineer for his approval with full calculations and drawings for proposed earthing system.

B. Perform grounding resistance tests after installation of the individual Grounding systems in accordance with the Specifications. The Grounding resistance tests shall be carried out in accordance with Section 713-11 of the IEE Wiring Regulations 17th edition and readings obtained officially recorded by all witnessing parties.

A. C. Prior to connection of Grounding rods to the Grounding system, the Grounding resistance of individual Grounding rod shall be measured by using an approved type of Grounding resistance tester, resistance shall not exceed 10 Ohm per each rod.

B. D. After completion of all the connections of Grounding system, the Grounding resistance shall be measured from the Grounding test point in presence of the Engineer.

E. All the Grounding resistance test reports shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval.

F. System’s overall resistant shall not exceed 1 Ohms

2.8 LIGHTNING PROECTION SYSTEM

A. Prior to any installation , perform soli resistivity measurements, submit to the Engineer for his approval with full calculations and drawings for proposed system.

C. B. Prior to connection of Grounding rods to the Grounding system, the Grounding resistance of individual Grounding rod shall be measured by using an approved type of Grounding resistance tester.

C. Perform Optical and physical for all systems parts:

1- Air terminals (vertical & horizontal terminals) 2- Down conductors 3- Joints and bonds 4- Testing joints 5- Earth terminations 6- Earth electrodes

D. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with BS EN 62305: 2006 and British Standard Code of Practice No. C.P. 326-1965.

E. All test reports shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval.

F. System’s overall resistant shall not exceed 10 Ohms

2. 9 SAFETY TAGGING PROCEDURES Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 8 of 13

A. Develop and submit for Engineer’s approval prior to implementation, a safety tagging procedure for use when working on energized systems or to identify systems that have been turned over to operations.

B. Provide plastic tags of minimum dimensions 300 x 200 x 3 mm with appropriate internationally recognized pictorial symbols and statements in Arabic and English languages for use as safety tag. The tags shall be coloured red with white letters or coloured yellow with black letters as approved by the Engineer. The letters shall be at least 20 mm high or more as required. The safety tag shall be provided with fire resistant rope for suspension at suitable locations.

C. Type of safety tags shall include, but not limited to, the following:

1. Refer to the equipment instructions/manual for important information before proceeding.

2. This unit must be accessed only by qualified personnel.

3. Do not switch ON. Work is in progress on other end.

4. Danger – Hazardous AC (or DC) voltage.

5. Danger – AC mains voltage.

6. Danger – Hot surface. Do not touch without taking care.

7. Risk of injury due to high current.

B. 8. Avoid contacting conductors with un-insulated metal objects. Follow safety precautions. Make sure the power is disconnected. C. D. 9. Danger – Arcing/Sparking may happen. Risk of eye injury. Always wear safey glasses. E. F. 10. Make sure the equipment is grounded before switching ON power. G. H. D. The installation and removal of safety tagging shall be carried out with the permission of an authorized Client’s or Engineer’s representative. I. J. E. Approved type of pad locks shall be provided to lock out any circuit breaker, isolator, switch fuse or a piece of equipment to prevent accidental turn ON or turn OFF. The keys shall be in the custody of an authorized Owner’s representative.

2.10 BATTERIES

K. Check battery voltage and specific gravity of each cell in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

L. Charge the battery, discharge at rated load for 1/2 hour, and recheck battery voltage and specific gravity of each cell. Record all results and forward to the Engineer.

2.11 BATTERY CHARGERS

D. Energize the battery charger and operate until battery full charge is indicated.

E. Discharge the batteries to the fully discharged condition.

F. Recharge the batteries. Record the DC voltage and current once per hour for 8 hours.Test the batteries to ensure they have reached at least 95% of full charge.

G. Continue charge to ensure the charger changes from equalize rate to float rate. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 9 of 13

H. Demonstrate that the automatic timer controls the charging and correctly transfers from equalize to float charge after the selected period.

I. Simulate faults to demonstrate the alarm lights and audible alarms perform as designed.

J. At the end of the tests, with the batteries in fully charged condition, operate the charger on float for a minimum period of 24 hours to ensure a stable condition is reached and held.

2.12 INSULATION

A. Check the insulation resistance to ground and phase to phase of all parts of the electrical installation with a 500 volt Megger Test with all panels, switches, socket outlets and branch circuit wiring installed and connected, but without fluorescent fixtures connected. Complete insulation tests to the Engineer's approval before power is applied to any circuit.

2.13 LIGHTING

A. Verify the correct lamps, position, ballast and operation of all fixtures.

B. With all lighting in operation, measure the average illuminance on the floor or tread (by establishing the maximum and minimum levels) in the following locations:

a. Exits, public corridors, corridors leading to exits, electrical equipment rooms, elevator hoist ways.

b. Offices, storage, service rooms, parking, laundries, kitchens, stairways, W.C., …etc.

c. Every place of assembly.

d. Rooms and areas as directed by the Engineer.

C. With only the emergency lighting in operation, measure the average illumination at exits, public corridors, floor areas where the public may congregate and other rooms and areas as directed by the Engineer.

D. Take readings at night, with no outside light contribution.

E. Take readings with a cosine corrected portable digital illuminance meter, or with a video camcorder with suitable software for illuminance measurements. Measuring instruments shall be tested, calibrated and certified accurate to within 2%.

F. Submit technical, testing and calibration data as well as certification on the photometer.

G. Plot lighting results on a set of reproducible plans for review by the Engineer and submission to the authorities.

PART 3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS

3. 1 GENERAL

The Contractor is to provide completed Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Principals Authorized Person prior to Completion or the date nominated in the approved Commissioning and Handover Plan.

This is a condition precedent to payment for any Completion Amounts due under the Contract. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 10 of 13

3. 2 OBJECTIVES The objectives of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals are:

A. To be of sufficient detail to enable the Principal to take over any maintenance, operation or use of the works and to do so in a safe, effective and efficient manner .

B. To enable progressive and timely development and checking of the Manuals in advance of any completion milestones.

C. To be fully completed and finalized prior to the Principals occupation, use or acceptance of the works .

D. To be developed in standardized and fully electronic data format suitable for upload to the Principals Asset and Data Management Systems .

E. To enable complete financial reconciliation of the assets and works showing element and asset costs, life expectancy costs and the like.

1.3 CAPTURE OF ASSET, MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS DATA

A. Contractors must progressively capture and input all relevant data into the O&M system in a timely manner during the contract term and prior to any handover of the works.

B. Contractors are required to check and correct the data progressively. Where the works are to be completed and handed over to the Principal in stages or separable portions the O&M Manuals are to be completed to sufficient detail and content to enable the Principal to assume its responsibilities for the ongoing operation and maintenance of the completed works.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCESS STANDARD O&M HEADINGS

O&M Manuals are to follow the standard headings shown below to ensure consistency for all elements of the works:

A. Introduction & Scope: Overview and description of the systems, the approach taken and other relevant information to ensure the client has an understanding of the equipment and its intended purpose.

B. Assets: Detailed schedule of all financial assets data, maintainable assets data, items and locations all reconciled to the total projects value.

C. Maintenance: –

Detailed instructions and frequency to ensure proper function of the assets.

D. Operations Data:

Detailed instructions for safe and efficient operation of the assets, including general cleaning, proper use and function of the assets/systems and relevant suppliers documentation.

E. Spare Parts :

Listed items or components required to complete maintenance or operation tasks or for replacements.

F. Warranty and Certificates:

Descriptions of all warranties and (both contracted and procured through suppliers) for the assets and descriptions of any certificates issued as part of the works including uploaded copies of all Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 11 of 13

relevant documents.

G. Help and Contact:

Details of any relevant contractors, suppliers and the like who may be used by the owner to support the operation and maintenance of the assets.

H. Drawings and Reference:

Lists of all final as built drawings, specifications and other relevant documents forming the final contract scope and other relevant attachments - like product manuals, specifications and the like relevant to the proper operation and maintenance of the works.

3. 5 HANDOVER OF ASSET, MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS DATA

A. The Contractor is to advise the Principal and or the Authorized Person when the Operations and Maintenance data is complete and accurately reflects the works.

B. The Contractor is to complete the draft O&M Manuals 28 days in advance of Handover of the Works or parts thereof or in accord with the approved Commissioning and Handover Plan whichever is the earlier date.

C. Should the Principal and or the Authorized Person identify any errors or omissions in the submitted data then within the time period stated in the approved Commissioning and Handover Plan or the issued Defect Notice the Contractor is required to rectify any items and to pay all such costs that may be incurred to update the final data.

3. 6 DOCUMENT COMPLETION

A. The Contractor must integrate the collection of asset data documents, and their subsequent production and submission in accord with the timing set out in the approved Commissioning and Handover Plan (including Inspection and Test Plans and Staged works handover), with progressive development of documents in electronic form.

B. The number of electronic copies of O&M Manuals shall be as stated in the approved Commissioning and Handover Plan or in the absence of a stated number 1 copy for each defined recipient in the Contractors are to advise the Principal or where responsibility for verification of O&M Manuals is vested with the Contractor or another Party when Manuals are at draft stage and ready for review.Nominated personnel from the Principal, and or Responsible Party in accord with the approved Commissioning and Handover Plan shall access the on-line O&M Manuals and provide comments or directions for any corrections as needed.

C. The Contractor will update the O&M Manual data in accord with the directions issued and the stated timetable and notify the Principal or Responsible Party of satisfactory completion.

D. When notified by the Principal or Responsible Party of completion of all O&M Manuals the Contractor is to direct to close on-line access (to prevent further alteration to the approved data) and transfer all O&M Data to CD versions for Handover.

3. 7 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 12 of 13

A. The Contractor shall check and verify that all data and attached files and documents that form the completed O&M Manuals comply with the relevant Laws, Standards, Codes and Specifications applicable to the works to enable the proper operation and maintenance by the Principal and or its appointed agents of the completed works.

3. 8 WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor is to provide to the Principal work-as-executed drawings in electronic formats for Subcontract and Supplier packages showing the completed works as constructed for that stage or portion of the works. Formats are to be PDF and CAD or other format as approved by the Principal.

B. Ensure the content, accuracy and level of detail of work-as-executed drawings are equivalent to those in the detail design drawings used for construction and are sufficient to describe and to ensure the efficient operation of the assets created under the Contract. Where required to describe the Works, include digital photographs of specific aspects of the Works in work-as-executed drawings or operations and maintenance manuals.

C. Include in work-as-executed drawings a survey drawing indicating the position of the Works relative to a primary survey grid. Certify survey drawings using a Registered Surveyor where required by the Principal.

D. All work as executed and as-built documentation must be in accord with the Specification. Verify each drawing certifying accuracy, completeness, correctness and compliance with CAD conventions.

E. All work as executed and as-built documentation must be uploaded into the system. All Attached files to be adequately described in Heading and Description boxes per Contract Specification including Drawing title, number, short description of the works, location ie Building No etc (similar to drawing register). Where a Zip file is used all contained files and their titles are to be shown in the Description box with sufficient detail to allow easy assessment of each files contents.

3.9 HARD COPY FORMAT

A. Where any conflict occurs with any other part of the contract and or specifications in reference to provision of Hard Copy O&M Manuals the Principal in the interests of compliance with Green Building Policy will accept the same number of electronic copies of O&M Manuals in lieu of the number of Hard Copy Manuals nominated.

B. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done:

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 01 26 (R0) September 2020 ELECTRICAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Page 13 of 13

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR)

C. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract:

1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Method Statement. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions. 6. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 7. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number.

3.10 ELECTRONIC COPY FORMAT

A. The Contractor is to provide to the Principal the specified number of copies of the WebFM electronic O&M Manuals in CD or DVD disks containing all O&M Manual data, attached files and documents transferred from the on-line web site. Disk Media are to be packaged in a suitably bound Disk Case. Disks and Case are to be fully labeled with the following:

- Project Name (Front Case cover and Spine, All Disk Media) - Contractor Name and contact details (logo may be inserted) - Compiled date (date when O&M Manuals data transferred to Disk Media) - Contents List (include list of all trade manuals in order) - Installation instructions (inside front Case Cover)

B. All O&M Manuals are to be supplied in standalone MS Access database and PDF formats as single electronic systems with suitable hyperlinks to all associated files and documents for easy retrieval and use by the Principal.

C. The number of electronic copies of O&M Manuals shall be as stated in the approved Commission- ing and Handover Plan or in the absence of a stated number 1 copy for each defined recipient in the approved Commissioning and Handover Plan. A minimum of 2 CD Copies are to be supplied.

END OF SECTION 26 01 26

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 1 of 27

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All general provisions contained herein or within any other section of the Specifications shall be fully applicable to each and every other section. B. Works on all the Installation shall be carried out in a neat, efficient and workmanlike manner, assuring satisfactory/ proper operation, maintenance and repair. The work shall be in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, and shall fulfill their true intent and meaning. No deviations from these Specifications and Drawings shall be made without written approval of the Engineer. C. These Specifications and associated drawings form a composite set of documents, intended for the selection and installation of equipment having the general and specific characteristics as detailed. D. Unless otherwise specifically stated, the installation shall be left complete, tested and ready for operation in all respects and fully integrated and coordinated with all other construction. E. The Contractor is responsible for getting Local Utilities/ Service Providers and the Engineer on any system prior to system material ordering/ manufacturing or installing, approvals shall be in the format of acceptance letters, signed shop drawings to be submitted to the Engineer. In-case any electrical system after being ordered/ manufactured or installed, be rejected/ not accepted by the Local Utility/ service provider/ by the related service provider/ Authorities or the Engineer , the Contractor shall dismantle the system, replace with new approved one at his own cost without any compensations from the Engineer. The Contractor will also be responsible for all time delay result- ed from this.

F. The Comply with regulations and requirements of the local authorities.

G. The Contractor shall obtain relevant Ministry approvals on drawings and materials, and inspection by the authorities, in scheduled sequence to obtain connection of services to the building in accordance with the approved construction schedule.

H. The electrical systems/ device/ component is inclusive of all material, accessories, supports, fixings, suspensions, metal stands/ platforms, concrete foundations, ..etc needed for the proper installation and operation of the system even if not shown on the drawings or mentioned in the bill of quantities, whether the system is numerated or in lump sum.

I. the Contractor shall submit proof, that the materials, appliances, equipment or devices that he fur- nishes and installs under this contract, meet the requirements of Local Authority, BS and NFPA as regards to fire and casualty hazards. J. The electrical system is inclusive of all parts, devices, software, programming, licensing, calibration, adjustment, setting, necessary for the best functional operation of that system, whether mentioned in the drawings, specifications, boq or not .

K. Details, elevations and sections of electrical substation, generators’ rooms, electrical/ IT rooms / Risers shown on the electrical drawings are for guidance only, yet the contractor shall provide detailed dimensional layouts, sections, elevations work shop drawings for each of these rooms/ risers.

K. Sizes of cable trays/ cable Ladders shown on the drawings are the minimum required, the contractor shall provide all needed cable trays for cables wiring, whether shown/ mentioned or not in the

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 2 of 27

drawings/ bills of quantities, the cable trays/ ladders shall be of enough size to install all cables on maintaining clear distance between any two cables installed on equals twice of the largest cable’s diameter. Wherever additional lengths/ sizes needed cable trays/ ladders are not shown on the drawings or not covered in the bill of quantities or due to rerouting of any cables they (the cable trays/ Ladders) shall be considered to form part of the contract.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work under this division of the Specifications shall include furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and services to install the complete electrical system, putting into operation, tested and commissioned as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following principal systems and equipment:

1. Co-ordination of incoming utilities (electricity and telephone supplies). 2. Low Voltage Power Distribution System including LV distribution boards, LV cables, panel boards, etc. 3. Un-interruptible Power Supply System. 4. Electrical Installations serving all mechanical plants (HVAC & Plumbing) including all LV cabling, trays, disconnect switches and connections to equipment. Electrical Installations serving all special systems and equipment provided under other divisions of the specifications such as elevators, and other electric-operated equipment. 5. All kinds of electrical raceways, boxes and fittings. 6. All kinds of wiring devices, dimmers, disconnect switches, starters, electric meters, etc. 7. Interior, exterior, emergency, exit, street, flood, façade and other special lighting. 8. Lightning protection system. 9. Earthing/ Grounding and Bonding systems. 10. All low current / Extra Low Voltage and security systems as detailed in the Contract documents. 11. Any other works mentioned elsewhere in the project electrical specification sections.

1.3 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY Low Voltage Electrical Power Supply and Distribution System: Provide products suitable for the following electrical characteristics: 1. Voltage: 415 V 3 phase/240 V single-phase . 2. Frequency: 50 Hz ± 4%. 3. Neutral: Solid and earthed. 4. Earthing: TT system. 5. Fault Level: 65kA at 415 Volts at substation main low-tension panel. 6. Fault Duration: 1.0 second.

1.4 STANDARDS The complete Electrical services shall be designed in accordance with good practice, and following

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 3 of 27

standards: A. British Standards BS. B. The International Electro technical Commission (IEC). C. NFPA (for fire and Life safety systems). D. Any requirements stated within the Specifications. E. The IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition with all current additions and amendments. F. Local Electrical/ Telecom utilities/ service providers\ Municipality requirements. G. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA STANDARD 90.1-2010 H. Any special requirements of separate earthing for low current systems as per project specifications, drawings, relevant standards and manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.5 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS A. The earthing system shall in all respects comply with the following: B. The earthing conductor (the final conductor by which the connection to the selected means of earthing is made) shall be of copper construction and comply with the requirements of relevant standards. C. All extraneous conductive parts of any equipment or building shall be protected by equipotential bonding in accordance with relevant standards.

1.5 LOW CURRENT & SPECIAL SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS A. Assign a specialist supplier/designer for all low current and special systems. B. Specialist suppliers shall verify the design and submit shop drawings and materials based on the requirements of the construction documents and related international standards. C. The shop drawings and as-built drawings shall be stamped by the suppliers. D. The suppliers shall support their submittals with catalogues and satisfactory calculations. E. Bear the cost of any extra item found necessary to have a properly functional system.

1.6 CO-ORDINATION

A. The contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper co-ordination of all phases of the Work and timely delivery to the site of all equipment and materials for proper execution of the Work. B. Co-ordinate the Work with all or any other disciplines to ensure proper phasing and continuity of the Works. If it becomes necessary to remake any part of these Works or that of any other discipline or trade as a result of poor or badly timed co-ordination, then all costs associated with remaking those Works will be borne by the Contractor. C. Co-ordinate with all supply undertakings and Authorities and shall include for attendance along with all costs involved in re-directing existing services. D. Take into consideration all statutory and local requirements issued by the Electricity Supply Authority, Local Authority, Central Government, Broadcasting Authority, Telephone and Telecommunications Authori- ties along with any other requirements to be considered for the correct and legal operation of the Electrical and Telecommunication Installation or equipment connected to the Installation as part of this Contract. Pay all costs due to the requirements of any authority except for connection fees. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the co-ordination with all Electrical and Mechanical systems’ Suppliers and shall include in his cost all the electrical requirements (even if they were not mentioned in the BOQ or drawings) to have a fully functional system as specified and as recommended by the Manufac-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 4 of 27

turer or the codes. This is also applicable to all ancillary systems & equipment such as: Elevators, Kitchen Equipment, Audio-Visual, Low Current Systems and Security Systems.

1.7 CLIMATE CONDITIONS All electrical equipment shall be designed for operation in 45°C ambient temperature and relative humidity at 100% unless otherwise stated. Copies of test certificates to be produced and submitted to the Project Engineer for approval prior to ordering equipment. Altitude is around 8 m ASL. When equipment is installed in direct sunlight, it shall either be shielded from direct radiation or suitably rated for additional solar gains. Cables shall always be shielded from direct sunlight. All apparatus (except the generators) shall be rated for continuous service twenty four hours a day, seven days a week throughout its normal rated life, except for necessary routine maintenance. 1.8 ACCESSIBILITY A. All works within the project and particularly above suspended ceilings or inside vertical shafts shall be so installed as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but no change shall be made without written approval from the Engineer. Locations of access doors and panels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation work is commenced. 1.9 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All material and equipment, fixed or unfixed, shall be protected against corrosion, deterioration and ingress of foreign matter and moisture. B. All material and equipment shall be kept clear of the floor or ground by means of wooden bearers and shall be protected against the weather with durable waterproof wrapping and other appropriate means. C. The Contractor shall be liable for any loss due to delivery, storage or site security problems.

1.10 PREVENTION OF NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Provision shall be made to minimize noise and vibration. However, different manufacturer's equipment will have varying sound and vibration characteristics. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that equipment installed does not transmit unnecessary noise or vibration. B All equipment installed in plant rooms and outside areas shall not be audible in the occupied areas. C. Any vibration isolators, isolating bases, flexible connections, silencers, other acoustic treatment or anti-vibration precautions necessary shall be included in the rates for the equipment. D. In individual cases, the suspension shall ensure that the natural frequency of the vibratory system in the vertical direction is not more than 1/3 of the exciter frequency and never exceeds 25 Hz. E. Submit proof of the selected noise proofing measures to the Engineer before commencement of work. F. Submit to the Engineer for information the noise level generation by the plant selected so that structural soundproofing measures can be evaluated. This means either data on the acoustic capacity level in relation to frequency, or the sound pressure level measured at 1 meter from the plant at octave median frequencies from 63 Hz to 4000 Hz. Details of the spatial and operational conditions shall also be given. G. All costs of noise sound level measurements and any repeat measurements, necessary if acoustic requirements are not met, shall be allowed for by the Contractor. H. Coordinate and comply with the requirements of noise control as applicable and as given in

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 5 of 27

Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

1.11 GUARDS A. All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to adequately protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment. The guards shall be constructed in such a manner that the movement of drive belts and rotation of shafts may be readily observed without removal of the guard. B. All 'live' parts of electrical equipment shall be protected in such a way to adequately protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment from injury. C. Wherever possible, all protective guards shall be supplied by the Equipment Manufacturer. All guards shall be strongly attached to equipment and shall be designed to be easily removed for access, servicing, adjustment and maintenance. 1.12 SIGNS AND NOTICES A. All signs and notices shall be in Arabic and English with the Arabic version being above or to the right of the English version. B. A schedule of all signs and notices with proposed Arabic and English translations shall be approved by the Engineer prior to manufacture. 1.13 GOVERNING CONDITIONS A. The entire Electrical Installation shall in all respects comply with the requirements of the latest editions of the following Standards, regulations and requirements with any current additions and amendments: 1. Local Standards.

2. Local Electrical Power Utility.

3. Local Telephone Service Provider.

4. International Electro-technical Commission.

5. IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th edition with all current additions and amendments.

6. British Standards (BS).

7. International Organization of Standardization (ISO).

8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

9. Requirements or Standards stated elsewhere within this Specification.

10. LEED Requirements.

11. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 6 of 27

1.15 LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION A. Each item of the Electrical Installation including electrical switchgear, control gear, equipment, devices, etc. shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label clearly indicating its function giving at least the following information: 1. Manufacturer’s name. 2. Country of origin. 3. Type / model number or code. 4. Rated voltage, current and frequency (as applicable). 5. Short circuit breaking capacity with time. 6. Compliance mark of the international standard(s).

B. Prior to final testing, confirm that all labeling is intact over the whole site and that all cables have been fitted with circuit markers. The 11,000 volts cables shall be clearly labeled "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" every two meters of their exposed length. C. All conductors shall have their outer covering colored to suit the phase to which they are connected. D. An instruction notice giving details of first aid treatment for electric shock shall be positioned in an approved position in each switch room. Manufacturer's or Contractor's names or trademarks shall not be exhibited anywhere through the installation without the prior approval and permission of the Engineer with exception that the Contractor's name and address may be fixed in an approved position on the main incoming switchgear. E. All labels shall be in English and Arabic. 1.16 VERMIN PROOFING A. All items of electrical equipment shall be adequately vermin proofed. B. Where cables enter or leave the bottoms of switchboards, or pass through pipe ducts, they shall be sealed by the use of hard wood plugs treated with vermin repellent and surrounded by mastic sealant. C. All spare pipe ducts shall be similarly sealed by the use of solid hard wood plugs. D. Alternative methods of vermin sealing will be accepted, but the written comments of the Engi- neer must be obtained prior to installation. 1.17 FIRE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. The whole of the works shall be carried out with care and so arranged as to minimize the risk of fire and the extent of damage resulting from any outbreak of fire.

1.18 PENALTY FOR DAMAGE TO EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Study the location of all the existing utilities and any other facilities, and perform the Work so as not to damage them. In the event that any of such facilities are damaged by the Contractor, the same shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor at his cost and responsibility.

B. In the event that the Contractor damages the existing utilities or facilities listed below, the Contractor shall pay to the Client, in addition to the repair costs, an amount specified below:

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 7 of 27

1. Power Cable, Control Cable : An amount equal to one hundred percent And Instrument Cable (100%) of the actual repair costs. 2. Telephone Cable : An amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the actual repair costs. 3. Fresh Water Line : An amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the actual repair costs. 4. Sewer Line : An amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the actual repair costs.

1.19 SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

A. Unless otherwise mentioned elsewhere in electrical systems’ specifications, provide an un- priced list of spares and consumables to manufacturer’s recommendation for 2 years’ operation for every item of plant and system.

1.20. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

A. All equipment and systems installed under this Contract shall meet following specifications on electromagnetic compatibility:

1. Interference immunity according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-3. 2. Emitted interference according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-2.

B. The Contractor shall submit EMC Manufacturer assessment/ certificate for each and all electrical systems as a proof of their compliance with related international standards and regulations.

1.21 WARRANTY

A. Unless mentioned elsewhere under system’s related specifications, the Contractor shall warrant the overall system with all it components as material and workmanship for a period of Two years of practical completion certificate.

B. In-case of any conflict in warranty/ guaranty periods mentioned in different location under this and any other electrical specifications section or under the same specification section of any system, the longer warranty/ guaranty period shall be adopted.

1.22 AINTENANCE SERVICE A. Service and maintain the installations as specified in Division 1 and detailed in these specifications. B. Include periodic maintenance of systems as recommended by the manufacturer or supplier. C. Inspect systems for proper operation and safety once every two months or lesser period if recommended by manufacturer.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 8 of 27

D. Provide on-call maintenance service for rectification of faults observed in the systems with response time not more than 24 hours for non-critical faults and 6 hours for faults affecting the con- tinued use or safety of the building. 1.23 SUBMITTALS

In general the contractor shall as a minimum submit for each electrical system the followings in addition to all submittals requested elsewhere under electrical systems specification sections:

A. Company Profile.

B. Experience/ Commitments:

1. Similar work experience of installing each electrical system:

The Contractor shall illustrate the references of electrical systems projects to prove his capabilities and experiences in designing, supplying, installing, testing, commissioning, maintaining, and supporting the systems, and supporting the client in any requirements needed post-project handover. This should include case studies describing the following: a. Case Study Reference Number. b. Project Name. c. Client Name. d. Project Location. e. Project Value. f. Project Duration. g. Scope of Work. h. Customer Support. i. Challenges & Lessons Learnt.

Minimum of one case study shall be presented for each of the below, following the above format: a. Experience in similar development segment (i.e. retail, mixed-use, Hotel, residential, etc.). b. Experience in providing fully integrated solutions of the systems. c. Experience in enhancing the systems.

2. Current commitments/ obligations: The Contractor shall present all current commitments and obligations in the following format: a. Project Name. b. Client Name. c. Project Location.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 9 of 27

d. Project Duration and Target Start & End Dates. e. Scope of Work.

3. Confirmation to having fully equipped & staffed local administration office & Engineering service center.

4. Confirmation to having local service center.

5. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

C. Strategy for QA/QC:

1. QA/QC approach/procedure documents. The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of QA/QC policies, method statements, procedures, people, resources, and forms used to manage electrical system design &/or installation projects.

2. Testing procedures: The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of testing policies, method statements, procedures, program, people, resources, forms and sub-contractors used to manage each of the following testing procedures. a. Factory acceptance tests (FAT). b. Pre-installation tests. c. Site acceptance tests (SAT). d. User tests and user-defined customization. e. 3rd party tests to be provided by the Contractor for the Engineer approval.

3. Commissioning of works: The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of commissioning of works’ method statements, procedures, program, and forms.

4. Completion & acceptance certificate: The Contractor shall provide the certificate forms that would be issued for completion of works and acceptance of works. The forms should include a list of statements to any additional matters and/or concerns that have been raised as part of the works.

5. Examples of installation & record drawings: The Contractor shall provide an example of electrical system/s installation and record Drawings generated for a similar project.

6. O&M Manuals: The Contractor shall provide an example of O&M Manuals generated for a similar project.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 10 of 27

7. Software used to define optimal systems components sizes/ ratings/ positions.

8. QA-ISO 9001:2008 registration or equivalent.

9. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

D. Site Survey 1. Site visit declaration.

E. Functional Analysis

The analysis should comply with all the requirements set in the Contract and with local authorities.

F. System layouts and wiring drawings and diagrams including:

1. Layout drawings of entire system including containment layouts. 2. Sectional drawings of entire system. 3. Schematic diagram for entire system. 4. Detailed wiring diagrams for all systems’ components. 5. Power Distribution Drawing. 6. Layouts for systems control rooms and equipment rooms– distances from system’s devices to and across these rooms. 7. Layout for power supply from main supply room and distribution boards across system’s components. 8. Functionalities and snapshots of system’s Management software application. 9. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

G. Technical Details.

1. Detailed description of proposed solution. a. Type of system proposed. b. Non-Compatible Standard Encoding and Streaming. c. Number and Locations of system’s components. d. Types of system’s components and specifications. e. Outdoor/Indoor requirements. f. Spatial requirements for system’s components. g. Mounting type/ height/ requirement considering a decent aesthetic design suitable for the project.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 11 of 27

h. Technical data sheets of all equipments, software and materials.

H. Detailed list of Equipments & Software following the BOQ format below:

Unit of Con- Country Item Item Cate- Typ Ven- Descrip- Meas tractor’s Area Model # of Qty Ref # No. gory e dor tion ure- Com- Origin ment ments

I. Detailed list of Materials following the BOQ format below:

Unit of Contrac- Item Item Cate- Typ Ven- Descrip- Country Meas- tor’s Area Model # Qty Ref # No. gory e dor tion of Origin ure- Com- ment ments

1. All civil, MEP and support works, including and not limited to: a. Containment. b. Cabling. c. Scaffolding and access ladders. d. Labor. e. Power supply. f. Other tools & services.

2. Unless advised otherwise, contractor is self-supportive and should include for his offer his own materials, tool, services, office, and any requirement necessary to complete this project. 3. List of samples to be provided. 4. Coordination with other parties. a. Method statement. b. Scope of work matrix for all works listed in this Contract Deliverables Section. c. Communication protocol.

5. Outline risk assessment for all major aspects of the works.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 12 of 27

6. General method statement/risk assessment on approach to day to day responsibilities. 7. List of Spare parts to be provided for minimum 2 years (unless mentioned elsewhere under related system detailed specification section). 8. Item by Item commentary on technical requirements.

9. The Contractor shall comply with all specifications described in the Technical Specification sections herein. System specifications proposed should reflect each of the system components in question, functionality desired by the system component and the how the component integrates with the centralized system. The Contractor shall add 3 columns beside each item to state the following:

a. First column is ‘Contractor’s Compliance’:

b. Second column is ‘Reference’: - Contractor shall refer each compliant item to the related section of proposal.

- Component data sheet or reflected electrical/ceiling/wall plans layout drawing.

c. Third column is ‘Contractor’s Comments’: - Contractor shall note down any further description, comment, feedback, concern, etc. on each item.

Contractor shall note down any further description, comment, feedback, concern, etc on each item.

10. Vendor certificates. a. Company certification by vendor as authorized dealer. b. Personnel certificate by vendor as factory-trained. c. Product quality assurance certification by vendor.

11. Vendor list and selection criteria for all items, vendors should adhere to the following criteria (unless mentioned elsewhere under system’s related detailed specification section): a. company established at least 5 years ago.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 13 of 27

b. have references of at least 10 projects globally of similar scope & complexity. c. have a local support office. f. have a local warehouse for spare parts stocking.

12. Proposed subcontractors identified and scope of work for each.

13. Confirmation of guarantee periods for equipment and guarantee terms & conditions.

14. Confirmation of warranty periods for equipment and guarantee terms & conditions.

15. Maintenance & support offering – sufficient details.

16. Other supporting information that adds value to the .proposal.

J. List of Proposed Personnel with CVs & Responsibility Matrix. 1. Relevant experience for key team members. 2. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

K. Full detailed calculations (using software) for systems’ components sizing, such as voltage drop calculations, power supplies ratings, amplifiers ratings, short circuit calculations at medium voltage and low voltage installations (at each equipment connected to the power network), protective devices/ breakers discrimination settings, protective devices/ breakers cascading calculations, closed loop impedance, protective relays calibration and settings for the substations, load summing, lighting levels in all spaces for selected light fitting types, ..etc, and any other calculations requested by the engineer related to any electrical systems used in this project.

L. Schedule of Works: Contractor shall compile a schedule of works and include a project milestone as per Master Schedule of Works provided. It is up to the Contractor to create a schedule that best incorporates all works.

M. Shop drawings and catalog data submittals shall be made in accordance with relevant sections. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to indicate the scope and quality of the proposed system installation.

1. Block diagram showing system relationships of major components and quantities and interconnecting cable requirements.

2. Plans showing equipment locations, conduit, and conductor requirements.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 14 of 27

3. Control console and panel arrangements, equipment outlet devices, and special mounting details.

4. Wiring diagrams showing terminal identification for field-installed wiring.

5. Catalog literature with camera and monitor specifications.

6. Spare parts list.

7. Method Statement.

N. Handover & Close-Out Documentation. 1. As Built Drawings. 2. End User Manuals. 3. Maintenance Manual. 4. Operations Manual. 5. Plans as mentioned above. 6. S/W license, update and upgrade .procedures. 7. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

O. The Contractor shall furnish operating service manuals for the system. The manuals shall be bound in flexible binders and all data contained therein shall be printed or typewritten. Each manual shall include all instruction necessary for proper operation and receiving of the system, and a complete block diagram of the system, a complete circuit diagnosis of the system, and a wiring designation schedule for all systems’ components, and a replacement parts list.

P. The Contractor shall submit 6 set of Operation & Maintenance manuals complete with preventive maintenance schedules, procedures and troubleshooting procedures.

Q. The Contractor shall meet all project requirements, yet he is required to submit to the Engineer for his approval a proposal for an upto date technology system.

R. As-Built Drawings

1. Submit the number of sets of final fully detailed dimensional as-built drawings and schematic diagrams highlighting locations, sizes and connections of all components included in the system complete with labels.

1.24 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project Record Documents: Record actual locations/ installation heights of system components, pull boxes, and routing of its wiring.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 15 of 27

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for operating system and performing routine trouble shooting procedures.

1.25 MANUFACTURER & INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

Unless otherwise mentioned elsewhere under electricla systems related detailed specification the following shall be applied: A. System’s components shall be manufactured by firms that are regularly engaged in the production of the proposed electrical system, and its auxiliary equipment similar to that required for this project and that have been satisfactory service for at least 5 years.

B. The firm installing the proposed electrical system shall have had a minimum of 5 years documented prior successful installation experience with systems similar in scope to the system of this project.

C. The system shall be engineered, configured, commissioned and serviced by manufacturer's certified systems integrator employing certified personnel for design and installation of the system. Ma- terials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of system’s equipment and the products proposed shall be the latest versions commercially available at the time of the bid. D. The Manufacturer shall be ISO-9002 and ISO 9001 certified for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and Servicing. The systems integrator shall be an authorized partner to the manufacturer and the partnership shall be at least two year old. The manufacturers - system integrator combination shall have implemented at least three projects of similar complexity. Contractor Qualification: No Item Client’s Com- Contractor’s Reference Contractor’s . ments Compliance Comments (Bill of Materials/ (Y, N, N/F, Equipment and Da- N/A) ta Sheets) 1 Contractor’s installation staff shall consist of 100% Manufacturer certified personnel for each technology. 2 Contractor’s installation team must reside locally. 3 Contractor must submit profiles for all certified staff. Certifications shall be related to Security Systems design and installation. 4 Contractor shall have a project manager, who shall be the sole point of contact for the Engineer. The project manager shall provide regular project updates to the Engineer. 5 The Engineer w ill deal with a single master system integrator if successful the Contractor will act in this regard and will be responsible for all sub- systems even when using sub-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 16 of 27

No Item Client’s Com- Contractor’s Reference Contractor’s . ments Compliance Comments (Bill of Materials/ (Y, N, N/F, Equipment and Da- N/A) ta Sheets) contractors

6 Contractor should be capable of delivering a 2hr SLA for key components 7 Contractor should be maintain an appropriate sparing and hardware maintenance strategy for relevant components, and shall keep the En- gineer/ Engineer regularly informed of all updates through records 8 Contractor shall keep The Engineer regularly informed of appropriate personnel certification changes 9 Warrantee as stated under Warran- tee item in this specifications. 10 Contractor shall maintain a current inventory list of all relevant products supplied to the Engineer and shall provide updated records when required, including adds, moves and changes to the active network 11 Contractor must hold Manufacturer relationship certification to the highest level, and shall provide the Engi- neer with any changes in certification status. 12 All installers shall be certified by the manufacturer to carry out the installation and configuration of the system proposed. 13 Certification shall be done at manufacturer’s facility and shall be a dedicated training course on the subject. 14 Contractor shall present/submit their certifications from the manufacturer along with the offer. 15 Successful contractor shall have completed such jobs in the past and

if required shall demonstrate the same to the end user. 16 After successful completion, contractor shall assign one primary point of contact for the end user for any assistance. 17 The Contractor shall carry out regular maintenance of the system during

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 17 of 27

No Item Client’s Com- Contractor’s Reference Contractor’s . ments Compliance Comments (Bill of Materials/ (Y, N, N/F, Equipment and Da- N/A) ta Sheets) the warranty period. Any upgrades if available shall be provided free of cost to Engineer. 18 Certified contractor shall be capable of handling system audit and troubleshooting. 19 Certified contractor shall demonstrate to the end user at least one successful ongoing maintenance contract with any other firm. 20 At any point the Engineer shall have the authority to approach the references mentioned by the contractor. 21 All materials procured locally by the contractor shall be as per manufacturer recommended guidelines. 22 All materials shall be installed as per manufacturer guidelines.

G. Manufacturer Qualification:

No. Item Client’s Contractor’s Reference Contractor’s Comments Compliance Comments (Bill of Materials/ (Y, N, N/F, Equipment and Data N/A) Sheets) 1 Manufacturer must prove continuous innovation evident by patents and industry standardization of these patents. 2 Manufacturer shall have local service center and repair facility. 3 Manufacturer must provide a local hardware spares depot with 2 hour response capabilities. 4 Manufacturer must have a proven track record in re-investing company profits into further Research & Development efforts. This should be provided as a percentage figure.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 18 of 27

No. Item Client’s Contractor’s Reference Contractor’s Comments Compliance Comments (Bill of Materials/ (Y, N, N/F, Equipment and Data N/A) Sheets) 5 Manufacturer must have sales & maintenance/ technical representative office in Muscat. 6 Manufacturer must be capable of providing a follow the sun (24/7, 365 days) technical support center with English + Arabic IVR. 7 Manufacturer must hold a multi- tiered certification program for installation staff. 8 Manufacturer of the equipment shall have produced similar equipment for not less than 5 years. 9 Manufacturer shall have local training facility and only trained and certified installers recommended by manufacturer shall be used on the project. 10 Manufacturer shall carry out regular certifications and same shall be demonstrated to the end user at its local facility. 11 Manufacturer shall be able to provide end-to-end solution. 12 Manufacturer shall have a working site of similar size to demonstrate the capabilities of the system. 13 Manufacturer shall supply latest version of the software and hardware at the time of finalization of the order. 14 At no stage, the Engineer shall be liable to pay any upgrade fee for any software component. All upgrades for firmware and software for all systems shall be offered free of cost. 15 Manufacturer shall have 24hours support number. 16 It should be possible by the manufacturer to offer training at their own facility if requested by the En- gineer.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 19 of 27

1.26 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

In general unless otherwise mentioned elsewhere under electrical systems related detailed specifications section.

1.27 TRAINING A. In general unless otherwise mentioned elsewhere under system’s related detailed specifications section, the contractor shall provide the following training for each installed system: B. The Contractor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Three Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and software and hardware administration of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff. C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative, whose credentials are approved by the engineer, to explain programming and operation of systems and to train Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for maintaining, programming, operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing system. D. Training shall be carried out to an approved training manual Separate training shall be provided on the hardware and software. Each training shall have both class room session and hands on session. Contractor shall allow for 6 trainees each in both the trainings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3. 1 GENERAL

A. All Electrical Equipment and integral systems shall be commissioned in accordance with the relevant standards and regulations given in the Specification and to the recommendations of specialist Suppliers (e.g. Switchboards, Standby Generators, Fire Detection and Alarm System, Public Address System, Cables, security systems, low current systems, …etc), as well as to the Local Authorities/ Utilities acceptance; the Contractor is responsible for getting. A Report of The State Acceptance Commission which shall be part of the close out submittals the Contractor shall provide for all electrical systems.

B. Full operational tests shall be carried out on all systems to demonstrate that they operate in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.

3.2 CONCRETE AND FORMWORK A. All concrete and formwork required shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor, with

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 20 of 27

co-ordination and the necessary supervision by this Structural Engineer. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS, SLEEVES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers, inserts, sleeves and supports required to accommodate the equipment and materials of this Division. B. Do not use high velocity powder activated fastenings. Low velocity powder activated fastenings may be used with the written approval of the Engineer. C. Except for plywood backboards, do not use wood to fasten outlet boxes or electrical equipment, except where wood forms a part of the building structure at the point of installation. D. Metal supports, screws, bolts and hardware shall be galvanised, sheradised Class 1, or stainless steel. E. Apply cold galvanising compound on all newly cut ferrous metal surfaces immediately after cutting. F. Provide separate supports as required for electrical apparatus erected on or in any wall or partition. All such supporting work shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation. G. Do not weld to or drill building steel without the written approval of the Engineer. H. Electrical equipment mounted against the interior surface of exterior walls shall be mounted at least 25mm away from the wall surface. I. Electrical equipment mounted against interior walls in damp or wet locations or adjacent to liquid piping shall be mounted at least 13mm away from the surface. J. All supports, screws and hardware in unconditioned areas i.e. car park, pump room, etc. shall be suitably primed and painted with two coats of zinc enriched paint. 3.4 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, SHORING AND CONCRETE WORK

A. Excavate the last 150mm for underground ducts and conduits. B. Backfill the first 300mm above underground ducts and conduits. C. Refer to the Structural specification for other excavation, shoring and backfilling work to be carried out.

D. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate Divisions of this Specification. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform all cutting and patching required for the work of this Division. B. Prepare drawings showing all cutting and patching required for the installation of equipment and submit to the Engineer for approval. C. Co-ordinate all openings with the work of other Divisions. D. Return all surfaces to the condition encountered before the work. Acceptance of such work shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. E. Cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without specific written approval from the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to dismiss from site any worker who cuts or drills structural members without specific written approval from the Engineer. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall conform to the highest standards applicable. B. Install equipment in accordance with the general arrangement drawings. Unless actual di-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 21 of 27

mensions are indicated, take such dimensions from final reviewed shop drawings and at the site. C. No containment shall be installed within existing concrete floors or screed toppings to floor slabs. D. Line up exposed conduit, trunking and cable trays parallel or at right angles to building lines. Set, plumb and level equipment accurately. Install hanger rods plumb and without off- sets. Install rows of fixtures accurately in line and level. E. Flush-mount boxes, panels, cabinets and electrical devices in finished areas and provide suitable flush trims and doors or covers, unless specifically noted otherwise. F. All areas shall be considered finished unless indicated otherwise. G. The locations of switches, thermostats, outlets and control devices are shown diagrammatically only. Submit co-ordination drawings, which indicate in elevation the location of wiring devices. Mount switches, thermostats and other controls as close to door jambs and other openings as possible, maintaining a minimum of 100mm from trims of doors except where installed in door frames of metal partitions. Ensure that these locations meet with the approval of the Engineer. Check all doors swings and install switches on strike side of door. H. The location of any outlet may be changed without a change to the Contract Sum, providing the relocation does not exceed 1500mm for lighting, power sockets or telephone outlets and 3000mm for motor outlets, switches or other electrical power loads. I. Where the location of any item is shown on the architectural details or elevations, this location shall govern. No change to the Contract Sum shall be allowed for the relocation of any equipment improperly installed because of the failure to check all such details prior to the installation of the equipment. Notify the Engineer where details differ. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Store materials and equipment in a dry, clean place and cover with polyethylene covers as necessary. B. Remove daily from the premises all debris, rubbish and waste material resulting from the work of this Division. C. Clean all electrical equipment and materials before final acceptance. D. Replace damaged, lost or stolen materials and equipment at no cost to the Owner. E. Refinish equipment and building surfaces where damaged by the work of this Division. F. Return all scratched surfaces to the initial condition by using original paint. 3.8 SYSTEM CO-ORDINATION

A. The switchgear manufacturer shall carry out a complete co-ordination study from the primary fuses or breakers including the largest fuse or breaker in each distribution panel and to select breaker trip units and fuses with characteristics to provide adequate co-ordination between all parts of the system. B. Submit to the Engineer a complete set of manufacturer’s curves showing characteristics of tripping devices for all breakers, curves for all fuses and relays, and maximum let-through current for all ratings of fuses that have been selected. All curves shall be on standard size log-log paper. C. Prepare on standard size log-log paper, or computer print out, a complete set of curves showing time-current characteristics of all breakers and fuses from the service overcurrent protection down to the largest devices in the 600V distribution panels, for phase and ground fault conditions. Plot the damage curves for the power transformers and cables on the same sheets. Submit three (3) sets of curves to the Engineer for approval. D. Arrange for the manufacturer to carry out actual tests on the completed installation in the field to ensure that the required co-ordination has been provided.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 22 of 27

3.9 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

A. Provide in each main low voltage electrical room a single line or riser diagram of the complete electrical system for the project, indicating protective and switching devices identified by type, rating and catalogue number where applicable. B. Mount the diagram on the wall in a substantial metal frame with a glass cover accepted by Engineer. 3.10 OPERATION, CARE AND MAINTENANCE

A. Instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation, care and maintenance of the complete installation, at the times arranged with the Owner. B. Where required, arrange and pay for the services of the applicable manufacturers factory service engineer to supervise the initial start-up of any part of the installation, to check, adjust, balance and calibrate all components, including related wiring and controls, and to instruct the operating personnel. Provide these services for such period and for as many vis- its as may be necessary to put the applicable portion of the installation in complete working order, and to ensure that the operating personnel are fully conversant with all aspects of the operation, care and maintenance, all to the approval of the Engineer. 3.11 PROVISION FOR FUTURE EXPANSION

A. In each location where a space is indicated to be reserved for future equipment, leave such space clean and install the conduit, wiring and other work pertaining to this Division in such manner that the necessary connections can be made to the future buildings, areas or equipment without dismantling existing floors, walls or ceilings. Consult with the Engineer wherever necessary for this purpose. Mark the locations of conduit terminations as directed. 3.12 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever any item of electrical equipment requiring accessibility, maintenance or adjustments is concealed, ensure adequate access, or provide an access door and arrange for its installation by the Division in whose work it occurs. B. Access panels shall be by an approved manufacturer, with 12 U.S. ga. stainless steel panel, rust resistant, concealed hinges and positive locking and self-opening screwdriver operated lock. Frame shall be suitable for the wall in which it is being installed and shall have integral keys for plaster walls. Panels in tiled walls shall suit the tile pattern. C. Minimum size of panels shall be 300 x 450mm. Where equipment is quite large, the access panel shall be sized to suit. D. Submit for review by the Engineer, floor plans and shop drawings showing the size, type and exact location of all access doors. E. Each access panel shall be installed to provide complete access to equipment for maintenance and servicing. F. E. All access doors shall be shown on the record drawings. Notations, adjacent to each access door shown on the drawings, shall indicate frequency of maintenance required for item or items above or behind the door. 3.13 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The drawings for electrical work are diagrammatic performance drawings only, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement and approximate location of apparatus and fixtures, and the approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets. The drawings do not intend to show architectural, mechanical or structural details. B. Do not scale or measure drawings, but obtain information regarding accurate dimensions from dimensions shown on the architectural drawings or by site measurements. Follow the electrical drawings for laying out the work.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 23 of 27

C. Refer to the co-ordination drawings of other Divisions to become familiar with all conditions effecting the work, and verify suitable spaces exist in which the equipment is to be installed. D. The drawings do not intend to show existing systems and/or installations. Refer to the As Built drawings and carry out site inspections to become familiar with all conditions effecting the work, and verify suitable spaces exist in which the equipment is to be installed. 3.14 COMPLETION OF CONTRACT

A. All equipment must be cleaned and tested before final acceptance by the Engineer. B. From the date of issuance of the 'Completion Certificate' all equipment, materials and workmanship, other than lamps, must be unconditionally warranted for not less than one (1) year. C. Replace, at no cost to the Owner, all incandescent lamps burned out during a thirty (30) days period, and all burned-out fluorescent and HID lamps for a period of ninety (90) days after date of issuance of 'Completion Certificate' for the Contract for the building. D. Defects and deficiencies which originate or become evident during the warranty period, must be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. E. If, during the warranty period, transformers, ballasts or other noise and vibration producing equipment are considered by the Engineer to exceed acceptable standards, then these must be replaced without delay or additional cost to the Owner. All work relating to the r e- placement of defective items must be carried out after normal working hours and at a time which is acceptable to the Owner.

3.15 DEFINITIONS A. Wherever the words "install", "provide", or "supply and install", are used it shall be under- stood to mean "provide and install, inclusive of all labour, materials, installation, commissioning, testing and connections” for the item to which it refers. 3.16 FIRE RATING A. Fire Alarm and emergency lighting system wiring shall be using fire resistant cables using PVC conduits embedded in slab/wall. All surface mounted installation shall be using GI conduits. B. Wiring for the power and control of following equipment shall be using fire resistant cables complying with BS 6387 Category CWZ: non armoured cables using PVC conduits embedded in the slab/wall or GI conduits for surface mounted installation, armoured cables on cable tray: 1. Circuits for life safety and Mechanical system devices required to operate in case of fire 2. Interface wiring to mechanical system such as FCU, AHU, etc. which require to be switched on or off in case of fire. 3. Branch and control circuits for smoke control and dampers. 3.17 MOUNTING HEIGHTS E. A. Unless otherwise stated on the Drawings, the following shall be mounting heights of equipment above finished floor level subject to full coordination with architectural details, and other disciplines/equipment. Any discrepancy found between these heights and other details/disciplines shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer for clarification and final decision. Panel board 1800 mm (Top of panel above FFL) Isolating switch 1350 mm Light switch 1350 mm (100 mm from door frame, horizontally) Dimmer switch 1350 mm

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 24 of 27

Push button station 1350 mm Wall mounted telephone/intercom 1350 mm Access Control Card Reader 1350 mm Fire alarm manual call point 1350 mm Fire alarm sounder 2400 mm Fire alarm panel 1800 mm (Top of panel above FFL) Power outlet 300 mm Data/Telephone outlet 300 mm TV outlet 300 mm Wall mounted speaker 2100 mm

F. B. Where accessories with varying mounting heights (e.g. light switch and socket outlet) are shown in approximately the same location, their center lines shall be aligned vertically. C. Where wall mounted accessories are shown adjacent to each other they shall be mounted with their wall plates separated by 50 mm. 3.18 PLYWOOD A. Supply and install all marine grade plywood backboards required for the work of this Divi- sion. Plywood shall be highest quality fir, 20mm thick unless otherwise specified. Prime and paint backboards on both sides with fire retardant paint, white for general electrical, light blue for telephone/data services and orange for security services. 3.19 FIRE SEALS A. Where cables, bus bars, cable tray, or conduits pass through non-fire rated floors, walls or roof, provide internal and external sealing thereto. B. For non-fire rated locations, sealant shall be silicone. C. For fire rated locations, the fire stop shall meet the requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction and be to UL and BS standards with regard to the type of assembly and fire separation. D. The Contractor shall fire seal all holes associated with the electrical equipment i.e. Cable risers, bus-bar risers, trunking / cable tray through walls etc. 3.20 WARNING SIGNS A. Provide warning signs as specified to meet requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction and Engineer. 3.21 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT A. Lubricant shall be non-corrosive and approved for the type of cable used. B. Lubricants shall be soap or wax based, depending upon application. Use soap based for short runs (not greater than 20m) and for semiconducting insulated wires, and wax based for long runs (20m or further).

3.22 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE A. The whole of the electrical installation work shall be so designed that there is an absolute minimum of interference with telecommunications, and the reception of broadcasting to BS 800 and any other relevant BS. 3.23 SEGREGATION OF SERVICES

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 25 of 27

A. The armour of all cables, cable trays, trunking, ducts etc., shall be prevented from coming into contact with non-electrical services by minimum spacing of 150mm. Where this is impracticable they shall be bonded to the exposed metal of the other services subject to the requirements contained in the IEE Regulation 3.24 BUILDER’S WORK A. To reduce the necessity for cutting away and the like, certain holes and chases will be provided in the structure by the Contractor to the Consultant’s instructions. The Contractor shall plan his work so that full advantage is taken of these provision’s but it is the Contrac- tor’s sole responsibility to ensure that all holes and chases are in the required position and that any additional ducts, holes and chases necessary for the execution of his work in the in-situ concrete walls, floor slabs, columns and beams are executed in the early stage of construction of the building.

3.25 MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND SUPERVISION

A. It is a requirement of the specification that the finished appearance of the plant in public areas is of a high architectural standard and all panels, covers, trim panels, finishes and the like shall be included to provide this required appearance to the satisfaction of the Consult- ant. B. The whole of the equipment supplied shall be of the best modern design and of high class durable finish and suitable for installation in a modern building which will be subjected to excessively heavy usage. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components of each system are mutually compatible and integrated to form fully efficient systems complying with the Dra w- ings and specifications. D. All materials shall be, where applicable, in accordance with the IEE Regulations, British Standards Specifications, Factories Act and Insurance Company requirements, where such exists, unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Consultant in writing. E. All articles and materials specified to conform to British Standards shall be clearly and indelibly marked and stamped with the British Standards number specified and other details required by the regulations, except where marking is impracticable when the relevant ad- vice/delivery notes shall include the British Standard number with which they are to comply. F. All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Consultant, particular attention shall be paid to a neat orderly well arranged installation, carried out in a methodical competent manner. G. The Contractor shall produce dimensional layout showing the exact location and elevation for the various outlets and shall be responsible to submit drawings/proposed material in a format to Consultant’s instruction. H. The Contractor will be required to maintain a competent supervising Engineer for the Work on site throughout the whole of the time for the completion of the Contract. The Consultant shall give prior approval to the appointment of this supervising Engineer and shall have the authority to withdraw this approval at any time. I. No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work which is normally carried out by a skilled tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and proficient in the trade con- cerned. The Consultant shall have the option to require a tradesman to demonstrate his proficiency to the satisfaction of the Consultant. 3.26 SAMPLES

A. If required, the Contractor shall provide a sample properly labelled of all lighting fittings, switches, fittings and other like accessories described in this specification or as specified by the Consultant. B. Such samples shall be submitted to the Consultant for his approval at his offices or else-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 26 of 27

where as directed, with all parts left loose, so that they may be taken apart for internal inspection by hand without the necessity of using spanners, screw drivers or wrenches. 3.27 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

A. All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weatherproof cover until ready for incorporation in the works. All electrical apparatus shall be examined and cleaned before installation. All open conduit ends shall be fitted with plastic caps or suitable protective covering to prevent the ingress of foreign matter. All drums with cables shall be protected from direct sunlight. 3.28 CONTRACTORS DESIGN RESPONSIBILTY

A. The Contractor shall check the design and accept full functional responsibility for all electrical services to meet the requirements of the Consultant generally in accordance with this specification. 3.29 AUTHORITIES APPROVAL

A. The contractor shall be responsible for liaising with the MEDC and any other authorities after obtaining the Consultant’s approval, in order to:

1. Approve the detailed Design and Working Drawings, before ordering any equipment, and commencing with the installation. 2. Approve any excavation prior to installation; 3. Acquire main supply connection. 4. Approve the Fire Alarm, Telephone Systems, etc. B. Arrange for inspection of all works by the Authorities having jurisdiction over the works. This is to occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays at the termination of the project. C. On completion of the work present to the Consultant, for the Owner, final unconditional approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities. D. Before commencing any work on site, submit the required number of copies to the relevant Authorities (after coordination with present building Contractor) for checking and approval. Follow the progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authori- ties. Comply with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant immediately of any such change for proper processing of these requirements. The Contractor, working on a regular basis with the Authorities is expected to know which changes are lik e- ly at the time he bids the job, and no extra cost will be allowed for such changes. E. The Contractor will be responsible for the design supply, installation, connection and testing of the main earthing network for the main low voltage distribution board(s) and the substation in coordination with MEDC. F. The Contractor will also be responsible for connecting this earthing network to the MEDC earthing system, if required 3.30 INSPECTION AND TEST AT MANUFACTURER’S WORK

A. The Consultant shall have at all reasonable times access to the Contractor’s premises to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the plant and equipment during its manufacture there, and if part of the plant and equipment is being manufactured on other premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the Consultant permission to inspect as if the plant and equipment was manufactured on the Contractor’s own premises. Such inspection, examination or testing, if made, shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation under the Contract. B. All work, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as necessary at the

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 00 (R0) September 2020 COMMON ELECTRICAL WORKS RESULTS, GENERAL Page 27 of 27

Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

C. Where the plant and equipment is a composite unit of several individual places manufactured in different places, it shall be assembled and tested as one complete working unit. All equipment will be tested at the maker’s works to the relevant BS where applicable.

D. The aforementioned works test carried out before delivery to the Site shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of completing satisfactory site tests after erection as specified. E. The contractor shall give the Consultant reasonable notice, at least seven clear days in writing of the date on and place at which any plant or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and the Consultant shall thereupon at his discretion notify the Con- tractor of his intention either to release such part of the plant and equipment upon receipt of the works tests certificates or of his intention to inspect such part of the plant and equipment and shall then, on giving twenty four hours notice in writing to the Contractor, attend at the place so named within seven days of the date by which the Contractor has stated in his notice the said plant and equipment will be ready for testing. The Contractor shall forward to the Consultant six duly certified copies of the test readings. F. Whether at the premises of the Contractor or of any of his subcontractors, the Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded, to carry out efficiently such tests of the plant and equipment, in accordance with the contract and shall give facilities to the Consultant to accomplish such testing. G. Works tests shall also be carried out such that due consideration is given to the Site conditions under which the equipment is required to function. The test certifications shall give all details of such tests. H. As and when any plant and equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this clause the Consultant shall issue to the Contractor a notification to that effect. I. The Contractor shall not pack for delivery or transport to site any part of the plant or equipment until he has obtained from the Consultant his written approval to the release of such part for delivery after any tests required by the Consultant in terms of this clause have been completed to his satisfaction.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 03 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Section includes electrical connections to equipment.

B. Related Sections and Documents.

1. Divisions 22 & 23 Mechanical Works

2. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Control System

3. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning

4. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Works Results, General.

5. Section 26 05 19 LV Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

6. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

7. Section 26 05 29 Equipment Connections and Supports.

8. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.

9. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices And Disconnecting Switches.

10. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. BS 7655 Specification for PVC Insulated Cables (non-armoured). A. B. BS 6121 Mechanical Cable Glands (Specifications for).

C. BS 6500 Specification for Insulated Flexible Cords and Cables.

D. BS 6746 Specification for PVC Insulation and Sheath of Electric Cables.

E. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition) with all current additions and amendments.

F. Local Codes and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating which shall include, but not limited to, the following:

 Name of the manufacturer.  Country of origin.  Name and address of agents stating whether any manufacturing or fabrication.  Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period.  Technical performance of the equipment selected.  Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance.  Delivery time from the date of orders.  Copies of test reports or certificates.  Control schematics and wiring diagrams. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 03 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS Page 2 of 4

B. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engi- neer.

C. Method statement.

D. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.

E. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections.

1.4 COORDINATION A. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. B. Determine connection locations and requirements. C. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. D. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.

1. 5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of Equipment wiring connections of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

PART 1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

B. Store Pack all wiring accessories for protection during transportation.

C. Store wiring connections in an appropriate protection against corrosion and damage.

D. Do not install wiring connections and accessories until it can be protected from damage during construction.

1.7 SPARE PARTS

A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional devices of all types and ratings, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than two units of each type and rating. B. Incase three or less numbers of any device of certain rating / size are installed, a minimum of one for each three numbers additional devices of same rating/ size shall be provided as spare.

1.8 TRAINING

A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 03 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS Page 3 of 4

B. The systems installations shall be guarantee against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

1.10 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

A. The Contractor shall provide the power cabling, terminations and containment from mechanical control panels to all mechanical items of equipment, Low voltage cabling. The contractor shall refer to the BMS/ IBMS schematics and mechanical services layout drawings to determine the extent of conduit required for both power and BMS/ IBMS cabling. BMS/IBMS cabling shall be included under BMS/IBMS specification requirements in the mechanical specifications division. B. The contractor shall ensure that no wiring commences on site without fully approved mechanical, BMS/ IBMS, electrical equipment, .. .etc schematics and layout drawings.

C. The Contractor shall include final connection wiring and terminations between interface units installed by the Contractor (eg fire alarm interface units) and the piece of equipment served by that interface unit (eg fire damper).The contractor shall allow for I/O units for each item of equipment and control panel.

D. The Contractor shall include final connection wiring and terminations between interface units installed by the Contractor (eg fire alarm interface units) and the piece of equipment served by that interface unit (eg sprinkler flow switch).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE TYPES

A. Cables shall be utilized as detailed in Section 26 05 19.

2.2 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND WIRING (SUPPORT SYSTEMS)

B. Support all cables and wiring throughout their length as detailed in sections 26 05 19, 26 05 33 and 26 05 29.

2.3 WIRING

A. Wiring cables shall be utilized as detailed in section 26 05 19, 26 27 26, 21 05 13 and 26 24 19.

2.4 CONNECTIONS PART 2 A. Each equipment connection shall be provided with complete assembly of material, including but not necessary limited to, pressure connectors, terminals, lugs, electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of wires and cables.

PART 3 B. Heavy gauge PVC and G.I metal conduits and fittings of the required types, grades, sizes and thickness, for each type of electrical equipment connection shall be provided. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with wiring and raceway requirements. Provide products complying with section 26 27 26 and in accordance with the following listing of conduit and fittings.

 Heavy gauge PVC conduit and fittings (for indoor except plant rooms).  PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings (for outdoor, wet areas and plant rooms).  Rigid steel metal conduit and fittings.  PVC coated electrical metallic tubing and fittings.  Flexible metal conduit and fittings (for indoor except plant rooms and wet areas).  Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings (for outdoor, wet areas and plant rooms). PART 4 C. Electrical connectors, lugs and terminals for the wires and cables shall be provided as recommended by the connector and terminal manufacturer for intended applications. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 03 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS Page 4 of 4

PART 5 D. Equipment connection accessories such as electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, solder, electrical soldering flux, wire nuts, cable ties, etc. shall be provided as recommended by accessories manufacturers for the intended applications and as approved by the Engineer.

E. For remote monitoring/controls of the electrical connections to various equipment, comply with the requirements of divisions 22 and 23.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All clauses as detailed in section 26 05 19, 26 27 26 and 26 24 19. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Make electrical connections. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid tight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. B. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations.

END OF SECTION 26 05 03

Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 1 of 10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Multicore and single core LV Cables and Wires including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Single core/building wires. 2. Multi-core flexible cables. 3. CU/XLPE/PVC non armoured. 4. CU/XLPE/SWA/PVC Non- armoured. a. Heat/fire resistant cables. 5. Splices and terminations. 6. Cable markers, supports and ties.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General.

3. Section 25 05 29 Equipment Connections and Supports.

4. Section 26 05 33 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems

5. Section 26 05 36 Cable Trays And Ladders For Electrical Systems.

6. Section 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems.

7. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections

1.2 REFERENCES

B. BS British Standard

C. IEC 228 Conductors for Insulated Cables.

D.IEC 502 Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated Cables for Rated Voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV.

F. BS 6121 Mechanical Cable Glands (Specifications for).

G. BS 6500 Specification for Insulated Flexible Cords and Cables.

H. BS 7655 Specification for Insulation and Sheathing materials for Cables- PVC sheathing compounds.

I. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition: 2008).

J. Local Codes, Regulations and Standards

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples of each type of cable proposed. B. For all types and sizes of LV Cables and Wires, submit the following Manufacturer’s details: 1. Dimensions. Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 2 of 10

2. Weight. 3. Construction. 4. Current rating. 5. Manner of installation. 6. Maximum conductor operating temperature. 7. Volt drop/amp/meter. 8. Impedance: Separate resistance and reactance values of single and multicore cables. 9. Resistance of armouring in ohms/1000 m length of cable. 10. Characteristic curves for short circuit rating. 11. Minimum bending radius. C. Submit factory/shop test results showing test voltages, duration of tests and other details for each routine test, in accordance with the requirements of IEC and BS standards. Manufacturer shall submit the results of type tests, if required by the Engineer. D. Method statement for installation, connection, testing and commissioning if proposed conductors and cables.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cables and wires shall generally be Manufacturer’s standard construction and materials. All LV cables, wires and accessories furnished under these Specifications shall conform to the applicable standards of Local Standards, IEE, IEC and BS.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of LV cables and wires of the types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required. B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. End of cables shall be sealed to prevent ingress of moisture. B. Where cables are transported on drums, these shall have adequate circumferences for the cables. Drums shall not be transported on their sides. Each cable drum shall be provided with appropriate weatherproof metallic label indicating project name, order no., type, size and length of the cable delivered. The reels for small building wires shall be provided with appropriate tags indicating at least the type, size and length of wire delivered. C. After winding on drums, cables shall be protected by being completely enclosed. D. Care shall be taken during transit to avoid damage to cable and drums. Before acceptance on site, cable drums and cables shall be inspected for: 1. Damage. 2. Compliance with Specifications. 3. Quantity. E. Store all LV cables, wires and accessories in factory installed coverings in a clean, dry indoor space which provides protection against the weather and direct exposure to the sun light. Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 3 of 10

F. As far as possible, each distribution cable shall be supplied in one continuous length without any joint. Where the required run length of any individual cable exceeds the standard/maximum length of a cable drum, as manufactured in the factory, the cables shall be jointed with prior approval of the Engineer using an approved cable joint. G. Cables shall be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage to the cable, to other services and to building fabric. Recommendations or instructions available from the cable Manu- facturers concerning the installation of cables shall be taken into account. Any damage shall be reported immediately to the Engineer. H. Cable drums shall be unloaded carefully by means of either a crane or ramp and impact with the ground shall be avoided. They shall be supported on axles and axle stands while the cable is being pulled; twisting and abrasion of the cable serving or oversheath shall be avoided.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor or the manufacturer for the period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the engineer except where any specific warranty from a supplier or manufacturer extends for a longer time.

1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 24 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the Installer. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of defective cables and cleaning as required for proper operation. B. Optional Maintenance Service: 3 years after the original 2 years maintenance period.

1.12 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Termination kits: Equal to 2.5% percent of each type of termination kits, cable glands, lugs, ferrules, etc. installed but no fewer than two each.

1.13 TRAINING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE CORE /BUILDING WIRES

A. The conductors of all single core wires shall be of high conductivity, plain, circular, stranded, annealed copper conductors as per IEC 228. B. The insulation of single core wires shall be heat resistive PVC to BS 7655, Type TI 1 rated at 70 oC for continuous operation. C. The building wires shall be rated 450/750V. D. Wires shall be colored in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition (BS 7671).

2.2 MULTI-CORE FLEXIBLE CABLES

A. Multi-core flexible cables shall be used for the connections of pendant lighting fittings, final equipment connections, portable equipment or any other purpose as shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 4 of 10

B. The flexible cables shall be of circular construction, rated 300/500 V. C. The flexible cables shall be of high conductivity, circular, stranded, annealed copper conductors, insulated with heat resistive PVC type TI 3 to BS 6755, rated at 90 oC for continuous operation. D. Manufacturer shall guarantee that the insulation and overall sheath of the cable will not emit any toxic fumes in the event of a fire. F. The cores of multi-core flexible cables shall be coloured in accordance with Section 514 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition: 2008 (BS 7671).

2.3 CU/XLPE & CU/XLPE/SWA CABLES

A. Low voltage distribution cables shall be copper conductors, 600/1000V grade, cross-linked polyethylene ( XLPE ) insulated (whether SWA armoured or not as shown on drawings) complying with BS 6724 with low smoke classification and complied with the requirements of fire test BS4066 part 3. B. Provide LV distribution cables single-core or multi-core SWA armoured / unarmoured as shown on drawings. C. Cable conductors shall be of high conductivity plain, circular or sector shaped, stranded copper as per IEC 228 and insulated with cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) rated at 90 oC for continuous operation. D. The assembly of multi-core armoured cables shall be filled with non-hygroscopic material, compatible with the insulation. E. Where shown on the Drawings, armoured single-core LV cables shall have non-magnetic armour wire. Single-core cables armoured with steel wire or tape shall not be used for a.c. circuits to prevent eddy (induced) currents. Such conductors shall neither run individually in a ferrous enclosure or pipe nor shall be surrounded by any ferrous material. F. Armoured multi-core LV cables shall be sheathed overall. H. Manufacturer shall warranty that the insulation and overall sheath of the cable will not emit any toxic fumes in the event of a fire. I. Steel wire armouring of the multi-core armoured cables shall be securely bonded to earth at each termination by means of an adequately sized metallic bond which shall be as short and straight as it is practicable. J. Cable cores shall be coloured in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition (BS 7671). K. Joints shall not be allowed in any cable, unless a prior written approval of the Engineer is obtained.

2.4 HEAT/FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

A. For situations, where single or multi-core cables are expected to be in touch with surfaces whose normal working temperature is more than 85 oC (such as light fixtures’ ballast or reflector), or for any other application when specified, special heat resistant cables shall be used. B. The special PVC insulation of heat resistant cables shall be rated at minimum 150 oC or 10 oC more than the expected surface temperature of the body where cable can touch. Higher of the two values shall be considered for cable insulation temperature rating. C. Wiring of illuminated exit signs and other emergency lighting fixtures and devices required to work continuously in the event of a fire shall be carried out with special fire resistant cables rated at 900 oC minimum. D. Manufacturer shall warranty that the special insulation of the heat/fire resistant cables will not emit any toxic fumes in the event of a fire. E. Fire Resistant Copper Cables

Fire resistant cables shall be third party approved by LPCB complying to the following: 1. BS 7629: Part 1: 1997 – 300/500 V fire resistant electrical cables having low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire – Multicore cables. 2. Standard fire resistant cables as described in clause 26.2d of BS 5839-1:2002 – Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings. Code of practice for system design, installation, commissioning and maintenance, 3. Class PH30 when tested in accordance with BS EN 50200: 2000 – Method of test for resistance to fire of unprotected small cables for use in emergency circuits. Fire resistant cables construction shall include: 1. Conductors: Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 5 of 10

Plain annealed copper to BS 6360 solid (class 1) for 1.5 and 2.5 mm2. 2. Insulation: High performance silicon rubber EL2 to BS 7655: section 1.1 3. Earth Conductor: Tinned annealed copper to BS 6360 4. Electrostatic Screen: Aluminum/polyester tape 125% coverage 5. Sheath: Thermoplastic zero halogen, flame retardant, abrasion resistant type LTS3 to BS 7655: SECTION 6:1 Installation shall be able to withstand fire for the same duration as cables. Type of installation shall be consistent throughout the installation.

Fire resistant cables shall be installed in continuous runs without intermediate joints.

Fire resistant cables shall be used where prolonged operation during fire is required such as interconnections between detectors, alarm sounders & buzzers, control & indicating equipment & power supplies associated with fire alarm/ firefighting/ smoke management systems. As well as for emergency escape route lighting installation and as shown on the drawings. Cables shall resist fire for at least 0.5 hour. All joints shall be made in circular conduit boxes complying with B.S.4568, Part 2 or in rectangular adaptable boxes may only be used (after Engineer’s approval) for surface installations. Straight through joints shall not be permitted without the written permission of Engineer.

Unless otherwise specified, all conduits, conduit boxes & adaptable boxes shall be galvanized.

2.5 LOW CURRENT CABLES

A. Provide cables for all low current systems according to the requirements given in the relevant section of each system contained elsewhere in these Specifications. All such cables shall comply with the applicable international standards.

2.6 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Cable splicing or jointing shall not be allowed in any circumstances, except where the required run length of any individual cable exceeds the maximum/standard length as Manufactured in the factory. Obtain Engineer’s written approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the cable. B. Splices and terminations for all LV. cables rated 600/1000 V grade shall be furnished in kit form and shall conform to the recommendations of the cable manufacturer. All material shall be furnished in factory sealed packages and shall not be opened until required for use. C. Splices for all LV cables shall be pre-molded or heat shrink type and rated for continuous duty at the rating of the services to which they are connected. They shall be suitable for direct buried underground installation or mounted on cable trays as per the requirements on site. D. Terminations shall be insulated using the materials specified and the procedures recommended by the Manufacturer of the kit being used. E. Splices for the earth shall be made exothermally or as per the recommendations of the LV cable splice Manufacturer.

2.7 CABLE MARKERS, SUPPORTS AND TIES

A. Cable markers and identifications discs for all LV cables shall be provided in accordance with the requirements given in Section 26 05 43. B. Cleats, saddles and clips used for fixing cables shall be black nylon for up to 20 mm dia. cables and glass reinforced nylon for cables above 20 mm dia. All saddles and clips shall be secured using brass round screws for cables up to 20 mm dia. and 10 mm hexagon headed zinc plated bolts and studs above 20 mm dia. C. All LV cables shall be tied on cable trays/ladders by non-releasing type nylon ties or approved clamps. D. Clamps for single core cables shall be of non-ferrous material.

Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 6 of 10

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the cables are to be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the En- gineer.

3.2 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING INSTALLATION

A. The sub-circuit and final circuit wiring for lighting, small power and equipment power installations shall take the following forms: 1. Single core stranded PVC insulated wires in trunking or conduits for internal wiring. 2. Multi-core XLPE/LSZH insulated unarmored cables in cable trays, ladders or conduits for internal wiring. 3. Multi-core XLPE/SWA insulated armored cables in conduits, cable trays, ladders duct banks or direct buried for external wiring. B. The types of lighting and small/equipment power installations and accessories are detailed elsewhere in the Specifications and on the Drawings. C. No conductor smaller than 2.5 mm2 shall be used. Minimum size of direct buried cables whether used for external lighting or any other purpose shall be 4.0 mm2. D. Each lighting circuit shall be wired using the "loop-in" continuous wiring system and as shown on the Drawings. E. Small power installations shall be wired using the radial system or ring for special applications as described on the Drawings. F. Equipment power installations shall generally be wired on a single circuit basis (1-phase or 3- phase), as shown on the Drawings and will serve fixed items of equipment. G. Each lighting and small/equipment power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor throughout to each light/switch point, power socket outlet or fixed equipment. H. Where a lighting or small/equipment power circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any other circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductor shall be de-rated for grouping in accordance with table 4B1 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition. This will normally result in the need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the Panelboard Schedules or on the Drawings. I. Not more than 1 final sub-circuits shall be run in any conduit. J. Normal and emergency circuit wiring/cables for lighting, small/equipment power or any other purpose shall be run in separate conduits or in separate compartments of trunking or on separate cable trays/ladders in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition.

3.3 FLEXIBLE CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Flexible cables shall not be concealed directly in any part of the installation except in conduits or sleeves. B. Where flexible cables are subject to heat they shall be constructed containing a minimum of three cores. C. All flexible cables are to be of circular construction containing a minimum of three cores. D. Where portable appliances exceed 200 watt rating, the flexible cable conductor size shall be 1.5 mm2. E. Flexible cables exceeding 1.5 m in length shall not be allowed, hard wiring shall be taken to within 1.5 m of all equipment or apparatus to be supplied.

3.4 INTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Where cables enclosed in conduits and run vertically in excess of 5 m, the cables shall be clamped to relieve strain on the cables, using suitable approved clamps. B. Where multiple circuit wiring follows a common route then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits with prior approval of the Engineer. C. Where cables and wires run in trunking, each circuit or group of circuits shall be clipped together using nylon straps or other suitable straps or clips. Vertical runs of trunking exceeding 5 m shall be supplied with pin racks to relieve the strain on cables. Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 7 of 10

D. All cable runs shall be continuous, no joints will be permitted except where the required run length of an individual cable exceeds the standard/maximum length of a cable drum as manufactured in the factory. Obtain approval of the Engineer for each joint, prior to ordering the cables. E. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent tension during bending of LV cables. The permanent radius of cables bend at any location after installation shall not be smaller than the cable Manufac- turer’s recommendations. F. Where cables are supported on cable tray, they shall be fixed to the cable tray using suitable approved straps or clips. Ties shall be spaced at not greater than 600 mm intervals along each cable, and within 100 mm of each bend or set. G. Where cables are laid on cable trays or ladder in mechanical or electrical rooms or prone to be damaged elsewhere on the project, they shall be mechanically protected by a cover to a height not less than 2 m from the finished floor level. H. When installing cables, care shall be taken to ensure that electrolytic action does not take place between dis-similar metals used for cable trays, ladders, supports, clamps, etc. I. Each cable gland shall be from the same Manufacturer as the cable on which it is used and shall be stamped describing the size and number of conductors. PVC shrouds shall be used to protect every gland. J. Power and lighting cables can be installed on a single cable tray or cable ladder. However normal and emergency power cables shall be installed either on separate cable trays/ladders or separated by mechanical separators if combined on a single cable tray/ladder. K. TV, Communications and other low current cables shall be installed on separate cable trunking with fire alarm cables separated by mechanical separators from other cables.

3.5 EXTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION

A. No work shall commence until the Contractor has investigated the site satisfactorily, and ascertained that the area is free from drains or other underground services. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the routes for external cable with appropriate installation details on shop drawings prior to commencement of any excavation on site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, excavations within 600 mm of existing services shall be by hand dig- ging. All services uncovered, whether expected or not, shall be reported immediately to the Engi- neer; they shall be supported by slings or other suitable means and protected. Any damage to services, however minor, shall be reported immediately to the Engineer; no repairs or replacement shall be done unless the Engineer gives his approval. C. When cable trenches are opened, all cables shall be laid as quickly as possible. The Engineer’s approval shall be obtained before a trench is backfill, generally backfilling shall be commenced within 24 hours of cable laying and the work completed speedily. D. Keep excavations shall free of water and protected against damage or collapse. The safety of persons and the protection of structures, buildings, roads and services from damage shall be ensured. E. Before cables are laid, grade bottom of the trench evenly, clean out loose stones and cover for the full width of the trench with a 150 mm layer of sand. Where the level of the trench bottom varies the slope shall not be greater than 1 in 12. F. Pull cables over cable rollers adequately spaced to prevent the cable being dragged over ground or other surfaces. For cables pulled into thrust boring or cables ducts and for all cables exceeding 10 m length, use cable stockings for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the cable cores as well as the sheath and excessive strain shall be avoided. G. After cables have been laid, a further layer of sand shall be added over the full width of the trench and tamped to provide finally not less than 150 mm cover over the cables. H. Backfill trenches in layers and compact layer before the next layer. The first two layers shall be 100 mm deep and compacted by hand; then mechanical compacting may be used. Cable warning tapes only shall be provided over the external lighting cables, but warning tapes and cable protective tiles shall be used over LV power and MV cables. I. Warning tapes shall be of polythene not less than 150 mm wide and at least 0.25 mm thick. They shall be yellow in color and bear the continuously repeated legend "-CAUTION ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW" - or similar in English and Arabic, in black letters not less than 30 mm high. J. Provide cable protective tiles in accordance with the applicable regulations and standards. Cable protective tiles shall be placed directly on the compacted sand cover over the cables. K. Where cables laid in trenches and cross other cables; a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the crossing cables shall be maintained. Cables shall not be laid one above the other except where shown on the Drawings. L. If more than one cable is to be drawn in a duct, all such cables shall be bunched together and pulled in one operation, wherever possible. Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 8 of 10

M. Where cables run under roadways, install in PVC ducts encased in concrete. The ducts shall extend for a minimum distance of 1 m on each side of roadway and shall be sealed at each end. N. Ducts shall be sized to allow installation of cable without excessive tension loads. 20% spare ducts shall be provided with a minimum of one spare duct at each location. O. When installed in cable ducts, all multi-core cables shall be installed singly and continuous between the manholes. Splicing of cables between the manholes shall not be allowed in any case. P. For cables pulled into thrust borings or cable ducts exceeding 10 m length, use cable stockings for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the cable cores as well as on the sheath. The pulling tension of the cable shall not exceed the maximum tension recommended by the cable Manufacturer. Q. Utilize both manual and power type pulling mechanisms on site as required with the rated capacity (in kilograms or pounds) clearly marked on the mechanism. A dynamometer shall be used to show the tension on the cable during all pulls and the indicator shall be constantly watched. If any excessive strain develops, the pulling operation shall be stopped at once and the difficulty determined and corrected. The dynamometer shall have a maximum tension indicator to show the maximum tension developed during a pull. The cable play-out reel shall be equipped with a suitable brake and shall be constantly manned during all pulls.

R. Under no circumstances shall cable be pulled using equipment not monitored by a dynamometer. The use of motor vehicles in pulling cable is prohibited. Any cable so pulled shall be removed and replaced.

S. To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in raceway runs, the pulling tension in the cable in kilograms as it leaves the bend shall not exceed 500 times the radius of the bend in meters.

T. Support cables at all times without excessive sag. Cables shall be located in such a way as to minimize interference with other cables to be installed. U. Provide adequate length of cables in manholes to avoid distorting pressures on the cables at conduit bushings. Cable protection such as a layer of light rubber belting, friction tape or similar material shall be provided where required before permanently fixing the cables in place. V. Install and support cables in such a way that there shall be no undue mechanical strain on the cable terminations. The requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition, chapter 52 shall be fulfilled for the erection of LV cables, as applicable. W. Terminate cables using only the correct size and type of gland with earth tag and PVC shroud, as supplied or recommended by the cable Manufacturer. All glands shall be dustproof and the glands for outdoor usage shall be fully weather and waterproof. X. Bend cable armoring to earth at each termination by means of a green/yellow Cu/PVC earth conductor, sized in accordance with Section 543 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition, connecting the cable gland earth tag to the local earth terminal. The apparatus gland plate shall be cleaned to bare metal around the cable gland earth tag bolted connection to ensure a sound electrical connection. Y. Where cables pass through walls or floors, protect by PVC or mild steel sealed sleeves cast into the building fabric. If the walls or floors are fire divisions, then the sleeves shall be fire stopped after installation of the cable(s) to the same rating as the walls or floors through which they pass. Z. Before any tradesman is allowed to terminate an armored cable in the permanent works, he shall make a demonstration termination in the presence of the Engineer and obtain the approval of the Engineer. AA. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It shall be workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump up to a temperature of 149 oC or less. It shall not be hardened materially when exposed to air. BB. Install cable markers and identification discs in accordance with the requirements given in Section 26 05 53 and locate them so that they are readily visible when cable is permanently fixed in position.

3.6 SPLICING AND TERMINATIONS

A. Cable splicing or jointing is not allowed, except where the required run length of any individual cable exceeds the maximum/standard length as manufactured in the factory. The Contractor shall obtain Engineer’s written approval for any splice or joint, prior to ordering the cable. Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 9 of 10

B. The Engineer shall be informed whenever cables are to be spliced or terminated. C. The Engineer shall be given evidence that the joint or termination Manufacturer has stated that materials to be employed are suitable for the type of cable to be jointed or terminated. D. Supply and install all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for the proper jointing, terminating and connecting, ready for service, of all cables included in the works. E. Employ for this work, staff who are fully qualified and competent for the types of joints and terminations to be made. F. Take all necessary precautions to prevent damage and ingress of moisture and impurities; cables ends shall be made free from moisture before jointing commences. Where circumstances prevent completion of the jointing or termination, the cable ends shall be sealed properly. G. All jointing and terminations, once commenced, shall proceed continuously until it is completed and sealed in the shortest possible time, without interruption. No terminations shall be made under wet or dirty conditions. H. Terminate all cables in brass compression glands complying with BS 6121 and of a design appropriate to the type and size of cable(s) being terminated. Glands for armoured cables shall be provided with a properly designed clamping device for the armour or screen. All cable glands shall be provided with a dust and waterproof outer sheath seal. I. Provide compression glands with earthing tags and close-fitting PVC shrouds. J. Except where it is impracticable to do so, the cable cores shall be taken through the terminating box directly to the terminals of the equipment, without crosses, and shall be made off with an approved type of hydraulically crimped socket. K. The cores of all cables shall be correctly 'phased out' before the final jointing, terminations or connections are made. Continuity of spare cores shall be maintained at joints. At terminations, any spare cores shall be connected to spare terminals. L. At all cable terminations the armoring or metallic sheath of the cables, if any, shall be solidly bonded to the equipment earth terminal or bar by means of properly designed brass or copper clamps and a copper conductor of section not less than that required by the IEE Wiring Regulations, subject to a minimum section of 2.5 mm². M. Core identification at terminations shall be done by colored or numbered plastic stretch or shrink ferrules. N. Utilize appropriate crimping tools for splicing and termination of all cables with guides to position the connectors or lugs in the tool correctly. The connectors, lugs and associated dies for the compression tool shall be of correct type and size. The crimping tool shall be designed with steps to prevent over crimping and shall be of a type which have provision to prevent the tool from opening until the crimp action is completed. O. Tools for manipulation and termination of cables shall be of a design approved by the cable Manu- facturer. Corrugation of the metal sheath or damage to outer coverings will not be accepted. A wood block or wooden faced tool shall be used to finally dress the cable into position. P. Repairs to a cable sheath, regardless of the extent of the damage, will not be accepted; straight through joints only are permitted. Q. Splices shall not be made to utilize short lengths of cable. When cables being installed into a duct system with manholes, the splices shall only be provided within manholes and no splice shall be allowed outside the manholes.

R. Jointing and terminations shall be made in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. S. The sleeves used for jointing and terminations shall be shrink type, applied cold or by the use of heat. They shall provide a sufficient thickness of insulation to suit the particular application. T. The insulation tapes used for jointing and terminations shall have temperature rating and insulating property not less than the cable insulation. They shall be fully compatible with the type and size of cables and comply with the applicable standards and regulations.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with Section 26 01 26. B. All LV cables and wires shall be tested when splicing and terminations are fully prepared and completed, except for final connections of cables/wires tails onto equipment. C. Test each conductor for phasing, continuity and insulation resistance (meggar). D. After completion of the installation of L.V. cables and wires, carry out insulation resistance test for 1 minute at 500 V or 1000 V, according to the rated voltage of the cables/wires under test. The test voltage shall be applied between the conductors and between each conductor and earth/neutral and shall comply with the requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th edition and other applicable standards. Rehabilitation (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 19 (R0) September 2020 LV ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 10 of 10

3.8 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.9 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply fire stopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078400 "Fire Stopping."

END OF SECTION 26 05 19 Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1. 1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of electrical systems and installations (Low voltage), grounding and bonding of all electrically operated equipment, grounding and bonding of all metal raceways (metal conduits, cable trays, trunking, cable ladders), bonding and grounding of all piping/ ducting networks and metal structures/ installations.

B. Related Sections And Documents

1. Division 14.

2. Division 26.

3. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections

1.2 REFERENCES

A. BS 7430: 1998 - Code of practice for earthing

B. BS EN 13601:2002 - Copper and copper alloys. Copper rod, bar and wire for general electrical purposes

C. British Standard Code of Practice CP1013 - Grounding.

D. BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition with all current additions and amendments.

E. Requirements of Local Authorities and electrical/ telecom service providers.

F. Local Codes and Regulations

1.3 SUBMITTALS

a. A. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating which shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Name of the manufacturer. 2. Country of origin. 3. Name and address of agents stating whether any manufacturing or fabrication. 4. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period. 5. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 6. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. 7. Delivery time from the date of orders. 8. Copies of test reports or certificates. 9. Control schematics and wiring diagrams. B. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engineer. C. Method statement for installation, testing and commissioning of the Grounding and Boning systems. D. Full calculation for the system from the system supplier.

E. Detailed dimensional workshop drawings for all earthing and Grounding systems with all Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS Page 2 of 6

sections, details and routings.

F. Detailed dimensional workshop drawings for earthing systems of main medium voltage panels/ switchgears, transformers, generators, main low voltage distribution system, main low current system signed and stamped from the related power utility/ service providers.

G. Soil resistivity tests reports.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Grounding equipment, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall conform to the requirements of BS, IEC and Local Standards Organization.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. System shall comply with BS. B. Building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain system components through one source from a single Manufac- turer.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All products shall be carefully packed to avoid damage during transportation.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

D. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Complete grounding of equipment and bonding to building grounding system trough bonding to building’s reinforcing steel.

B. Prior to any material ordering, installation the Contractor shall coordinate with Local power utility/ service provider and get their approval on the system drawings by getting all systems drawings signed and stamped by them.

1.10 SPARE PARTS

A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional consumable materials, minimum two of each type/ size used. B. Incase three or less numbers of any material of certain type/ size are installed, a minimum of one for each three numbers additional devices of same rating/ size shall be provided as spare. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS Page 3 of 6

1.11 TRAINING

A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out periodic testing and maintenance for the system, without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All the materials required for Grounding system shall be furnished new and undamaged in accordance with the requirement stated in this section. B. Conduct soil electrical resistively tests at four locations (minimum) advised by the Engi- neer. The Grounding calculations based on the test results shall be submitted for Engineers approval, to demonstrate that the proposed design of Grounding system complies with the specifications and standards.

C. For communication room, separate Grounding pits shall be installed as per Local Telephone Supplier requirements, which will be isolated from the main Grounding loop.

2.2 EARTH ELECTRODES, BARS, TAPES AND CONNECTIONS

A. Earth Electrodes: 17.2mm diameter x 1.2m long rods (3 x 1.2m min.), pure electrolytic copper uniformly molecular bonded to a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm on to a high tensile steel core; threaded both ends for coupling together. B. Earth Electrodes for Transformer and HT Room & Generators, 17.2mm diameter and 6 metre long. C. Couplers: Manufactured from copper with internal threads. D. Earth Bars at substation: BS EN 13601:2002; high conductivity copper bar, 50 x 6mm; uniformly tinned to provide good conductivity at joints. E. Earth Bar at Substation and Chiller area: BS EN 13601:2002; high conductivity copper bar, 50 x 6 mm; uniformly tinned to provide good conductivity at joints. F. Earth Tape: BS EN 13601:2002; high conductivity annealed copper tape, 25 x 3mm. G. Earth connections: Yellow or yellow/green PVC insulated stranded copper conductors with tinned lugs at both ends to connect exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment to earth ring. Size according to international and local codes and standards . H. Accessories (including clamps, connectors, reinforcement bonds, disconnecting links etc.): Manufac- turer’s standard products; bronze and gunmetal. I. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. J. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. K. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. L. Backfill Material: Shall be Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the area and conditions under which the Grounding systems are to be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until the conditions are satisfactory in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS Page 4 of 6

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The installation shall be carried out in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition. The position of all conductors, joints and terminals shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencing the work.

B. All electrical equipment shall be connected to the Grounding with copper Grounding conductor. The term "electrical equipment" shall include all metal enclosures containing electrical connections or bare conductors. Individual devices such as solenoids, pressure switches, and limit switches shall be exempt from this requirement unless the device requires Grounding for proper operation. Large equipment such as power distribution board or motor control centers shall be furnished with a Grounding bus, which shall be connected at two points to the Grounding. All Ground- ing connection surfaces shall be cleaned immediately prior to connection. Provide all Grounding material required but not furnished with the equipment. C. All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of all the installations shall be effectively grounded. The steel conduit systems, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic lighting fixtures, cable trays, all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical systems and any other equipment or system components shall be grounded and the connection shall be extended to the nearest panel board Grounding or grounding bar in sub-station. D. All connections and joints for the grounding system including bonding connections shall be made using "Exothermic" process which produces a fused joint. E. All metal work such as but not limit cable tray and cable ladder shall be grounded.

3.3 APPLICATIONS A. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor of 25 x 3 mm B. Bury at least 600 mm below grade. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternat- ing bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 25 mm, minimum, from wall 150 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items : 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power- distribution units. C. Water Heater Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. D. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS Page 5 of 6

equipment location. 1. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 50 mm below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least 3 metre from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 300 mm deep, with cover. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 18 m apart F. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, indicated item, extending around the perimeter of building area or item indicated. 1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than 25 x 3 mm for ground ring and for taps to building steel. 2. Bury ground ring not less than 600 mm from building foundation. G. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. H. Perform works to meet all requirements of international and local code and standard. I. Earth pit: Provide earth pit with cover at each rod location. Earth pit cover to be flush with finish grade J. Bonding: Provide equipotential bonding in accordance with IEE Regulations for metallic structures such as aluminium cladding, spire, pipework or associated metal work, access floor panels, electrical raceways, pool lights and equipment, kitchen equipment, etc., by connecting them to the nearest ring earth. All supports and metal floor panels forming all access type floors shall be bonded to the earthing system using a minimum of 10 mm sq. insulated earthing conductors. Continuity of all such floors with the earthing system shall be tested and demonstrated. K. Provide test link at each earth electrode location.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

b. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS Page 6 of 6

ground resistance. c. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power Panel boards: 2ohm(s).

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify supervising engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. Corrective measures if any required shall be carried out by the contractor and shall form part of contract.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 29 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Types of Electrical Equipment Connections including, but not limited to, the following: a. Connections for AHU’s, and associated equipment. b. Connections for Motor control centers (MCC). c. Connections for Socket outlets, isolators and other wiring devices. d. Connections for Motors and motor starters (if not specified elsewhere). e. Connections for Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning (HVAC) equipment. f. Connections for Lighting fixtures and switches. g. Connections for Converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, UPS and similar equipment. h. Connections for Master and secondary units of all low current systems including communication, signal, etc. i. Connections for All equipment mentioned in other divisions of this Contract, which requires electrical power connections. j. Connection for Grounding and bonding of all equipment. 2. Types of Supports for electrical and other installations including, but not limited to, the following:- a. Equipment supports. b. Conduits and raceways supports. c. Anchors and fasteners. d. Steel Welding. B. RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning 2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 3. Section 26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections 4. Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 5. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 6. Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 26 05 36 Cable Trays and Ladders for Electrical Systems 8. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 9. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices and Disconnecting Switches. 10. Section 26 28 23 Enclosed Circuit Breakers 11. Section 26 29 16 Enclosed Starters and Contactors. 12. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections

1.2 REFERENCES

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 29 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS Page 2 of 6

A. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations, (IEE 17th Wiring Regulations) with all current additions and amendments. B. IEC C. Local Codes and Regulations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS Fire stopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating which shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Name of the manufacturer. 2. Country of origin. 3. Name and address of agents stating whether any manufacturing or fabrication. 4. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period. 5. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 6. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. 7. Delivery time from the date of orders. 8. Copies of test reports or certificates. 9. Control schematics and wiring diagrams. B. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engi- neer. C. Method Statement of the installations, testing and commissioning of proposed system components.

1.5 QUALIFICATION

2.01.1.1.1 Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the complete range of all supporting devices and ancillary electrical connection materials including connectors, terminals, electrical insulating tape, electrical flux, cable ties, anchors, fasteners, equipment supports, etc., whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years. 2.01.1.1.2 Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. A. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 29 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS Page 3 of 6

1.7 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional devices of all types and ratings, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than two units of each type and rating. B. Incase three or less numbers of any device of certain rating/ size are installed, a minimum of one for each three numbers additional devices of same rating/ size shall be provided as spare.

1.8 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.9 WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Each equipment connection shall be provided with complete assembly of materials, including but not necessary limited to, pressure connectors, terminals, lugs, electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of wires and cables. B. Heavy gauge PVC and metal conduits and fittings of the required types, grades, sizes and thickness, for each type of electrical equipment connection shall be provided. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with wiring and raceway requirements. Pro- vide products complying with section 26 27 26 and in accordance with the following listing of conduit, tubing and fittings. 1. Heavy gauge PVC conduit and fittings (for indoor except plant rooms). 2. PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings (for outdoor, wet areas and plant rooms). 3. Rigid steel metal conduit and fittings. 4. PVC coated electrical metallic tubing and fittings. 5. Flexible metal conduit and fittings (for indoor except plant rooms and wet areas). 6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings (for outdoor, wet areas and plant rooms).

C. Electrical connectors, lugs and terminals for the wires and cables shall be provided as recommended by the connector and terminal manufacturer for intended applications. D. Equipment connection accessories such as electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, solder, electrical soldering flux, wire nuts, cable ties, etc. shall be provided as recommended by accessories manufacturers for the intended applications and as approved by the Engineer. E. For remote monitoring/controls of the electrical connections to various equipment, comply with the requirements of Section 25 50 00.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 29 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS Page 4 of 6

2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. All equipment supports including conduit and equipment supports, anchors and fasteners, etc. shall have adequate corrosion resistance against harsh and corrosive atmosphere. B. All types of anchors, fasteners and supports shall be able to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Weight of wires and cables in conduit shall be considered when selecting products. C. Anchors and fasteners for various applications shall be used as detailed below: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use pre-cast insert system, expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. Gypsum Board Partitions: 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wooden Elements: Use wood screws.

D. Any bolt utilized for equipment in the factory assembling or for site installation shall conform to BS, bolt, nuts and washers. All bolts shall be galvanized where any connection component is aluminum or galvanized steel.

2.3 STEEL WELDING A. Except as specified otherwise, all welding and related material for welding shall be in conformity of IEC/BS standards and to the approval of the Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION A. Install equipment connections in accordance with manufacturers’ written instructions, recognized industry practices and the requirements of the applicable articles of BS to ensure that installations fulfill the intended applications. B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. C. Co-ordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with installation of other works. D. Splices insulated by wound tape shall not be permitted. Protective grounding conductors shall be free of splices. E. Prepare cables and wires by proper cutting/stripping of the armor covering, jacket and insulation to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection testing and maintenance. G. Tighten wire-binding connector screws firmly. H. Provide PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings for wet areas, highly-corrosive atmosphere and outdoor installation. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for all motor connections and other electrical equipment connections when subject to one or more of the following: 1. Exterior location. 2. Wet areas with moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate (showers, baths, toilet, etc.). Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 29 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS Page 5 of 6

3. Corrosive atmosphere. 4. Water spray. 5. Dripping oil, grease or water. I. Provide heat shrinkable terminations for all LV cables having the size of 50 mm2 and above. J. Refer to the requirements of Section 26 05 53, for electrical power supply connections of equipment and conductor terminations. Use appropriate wire markers and identification with respect to types, colors, letters and sizes, as approved by the Engineer. Affix markers to each point of termination as close as possible to the point of connection. K. Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting, a bushing or grommet shall be provided to protect the wire from abrasion unless the design of the box or fitting is such as to afford equivalent protection.

3.2 CONNECTIONS TO FIXED APPLIANCES A. Final connections to various types of fixed domestic and industrial appliances shall be carried out by using either an armored copper cable or a flexible metallic conduit with heat resistant wires or sheathed cables. B. Final connections made using flexible conduit shall comprise liquid tight flexible metal conduit covered with continuous PVC jacket and shall comply with the requirements given in Section 26 27 26. C. Sufficient length of the flexible conduit shall be allowed for any vibration and movement of the fixed appliances. A separate circuit protective conductor wire must be run inside the conduit. D. A double pole or three pole isolator as required, adjacent to each fixed appliance shall be provided suitable for the power rating. E. If final connection to the fixed appliances requires use of MICC cables, these shall comply with relevant standards and manufacturer’s recommendations. MICC cable shall be formed into two loops before entering the fixed appliance, to allow for any vibration or movement.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. All equipment supports including conduit and equipment supports, anchors and fasteners, etc. shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, recognized industry practices and the requirements of the applicable articles of BS to ensure that the installation fulfill the intended applications. B. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment and conduits. C. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. D. Do not use power actuated anchors. E. Do not drill or cut the structural members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Install surface mounted cabinets and panel boards with minimum of four anchors. H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand the cabinets and panel boards at least 25 mm off the wall. I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panel boards recessed in hollow partitions.

3.4 STEEL WELDING A. The welders and welding procedures shall be qualified by an independent testing laboratory and subject to the Engineer’s approval. Accurate records of the welders and procedure qualifications shall be submitted by the Contractor. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 29 (R0) September 2020 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS Page 6 of 6

B. All welded joints exposed in exterior locations or subject to submergence in any location shall be provided with continuous welds along all the contact edges. Components to be welded shall be accurately positioned and shall be rigidly secured during welding. C. All welds shall be properly identified on the detailed shop drawings and shall be subject to review by the Owner.

END OF SECTION 26 05 29

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL 1. SUMMARY A. Section Includes Electrical Raceways, accessories and Boxes / Fittings including, but not limited to, the following: 1. PVC Conduits. 2. Rigid Steel Conduits. 3. Flexible Conduits. 4. Surface/Floor Cable Trunking. 5. Interior outlet boxes. 6. Weatherproof outlet boxes. 7. Junction/pull boxes and cabinets. 8. Conduit bodies. 9. Fittings. B. Related Sections And Documents: 1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning 2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Works Results, General. 3. Section 26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections. 4. Section 26 05 19 LV Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 5. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 6. Section 26 05 29 Equipment Connections and Supports. 7. Section 26 05 36 Cable Trays and Ladders for Electrical Systems 8. Section 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 9. Section 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems. 10. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices and Disconnecting Switches. 11. Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 12. Section 26 52 00 Emergency and Exit Lighting 13. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections

1.2 REFERENCES A. The IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition with all current additions and amendments. B. BS 4568 Rigid Steel Conduits, Zinc Coated. C. BS 6099-2.2 / IEC 614-2-2 U.P.V.C. Rigid Conduits. D. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

C.SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for the following:

1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 2 of 11

3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. 5. Nonmetallic tubing. 6. Raceway fittings. 7. Conduit bodies. 8. Surface raceway. 9. Wire way. 10. Pull and junction boxes. 11. Handholds. B. Method Statement and Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

2. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Requirements of Division 01. B. Project Record Documents:

1. Record actual routing of conduits. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

3. COORDINATION Requirements of Division 01. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

B. QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceways of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

C. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Raceways shall generally be manufacturer’s standard construction and materials.

D. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Requirements of Division 01. B. Product Requirements for storage and handling. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 3 of 11

E. TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

F. WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years for from the date of practical completion Certificate. B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC CONDUITS A. All PVC s and fittings shall be uPVC heavy gauge, rigid, direct buried or encased buried type as applicable, complying with BS 6099-2.2 / IEC 614-2-2 heavy gauge in all respects, and may be used where ambient temperatures do not exceed 75 oC. B. All PVC conduits, fitting and accessories shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. C. No conduit shall be less than 20 mm diameter. D. Fittings and accessories for PVC conduits shall include, but not be limited to, the adapters, junction/pull boxes, bushings, couplings, elbows, nipples, plugs, seals, etc. E. Conduit boxes shall be of the circular pattern with appropriate spout entries and 50.8 mm accessory fixing centres. F. All connections and terminations of the PVC conduits and fittings shall be by means of the manufacturer's standard adaptor. G. All boxes shall have brass thread inserts for the fixing of accessories or covers. H. All tees shall be made using conduit tee boxes. Tangential entry boxes shall be used where appropriate. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large uPVC adaptable boxes for junctions. I. All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and from the same manufacturer as that of the conduit which they are being used to secure. J. All wall mounted accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final leveling of accessories.

2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUITS (RSC) A. All Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC) and accessories shall be heavy gauge welded steel complying with BS 4568, not less than 20 mm diameter. B. RSC and fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized, complying with BS 4568, and providing heavy protection both inside and outside. The steel shall be galvanized after cutting and threading. C. All conduits and fittings shall be threaded, free from rust or other defects and shall have same hot dipped galvanized finish throughout the installation. D. Fittings and accessories for RSC shall include, but not be limited to, adapters, junction/pull boxes, bushings, connectors, couplings, elbows, expansion joints, gaskets, hubs, locknuts, nipples, plugs, seals, breathers, etc. E. Fittings and accessories for RSC shall be of malleable iron or a mixture of grey iron and cast steel. F. All bushes shall be hexagonal headed, heavy duty, long threaded brass bushes complete with ser- rated tempered shake proof washers. All bends shall be cold set. All tees shall be made using circular tee conduit boxes. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 4 of 11

G. All saddles for surface mounted installation of RSC shall be of the spacer bar type and of the same finish as that of the conduit which they are being used to secure. H. A tapped earth connection facility shall be provided in every box. I. All accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final levelling of accessory. J. PVC coated RSC and fittings shall be used for cables extending to outside of building and where above grade extensions of PVC Conduits required a transition from PVC to RSC.

2.3 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS A. Flexible conduits shall be liquid-tight, constructed from galvanized steel core and continuous liquid- tight PVC jacket in accordance with BS 731 Part 1, not less than 20 mm diameter. B. Flexible conduit shall only to be used for final connection to items of fixed equipment subject to vibration or movement. C. All flexible conduits shall have a liquid-tight PVC jacket capable of withstanding 90 oC cable operating temperatures. D. All fittings and accessories for liquid-tight flexible steel conduits shall be nylon jacketed.

E. Nylon jacketed brass adaptors shall be provided for connection at either end of the flexible conduit and should be of the compression type.

2.4 SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING A. Surface cable trunking shall be used with prior approval of the Engineer, wherever possible to replace multiple conduit runs. B. Metal surface cable trunking shall comply with BS 4678 Part 1:Class 3 and shall be manufactured from galvanized steel sheets. C. Only purpose made bends, tees, risers, end stops, fittings, connectors, covers and accessories by the same manufacturer as the trunking shall be used and finished in hot dipped galvanized steel. Site fabrication shall not be permitted. D. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint of the metal surface trunking. E. Covers for surface type cable trunking, suspended for fixed on surface of wall or under raised floor, shall be of the overlapping type and secured to the trunking by an approved type of fastening arrangement such as clips, etc. F. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, all trunking shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating as approved by the Engineer. G. Surface Cable trunking shall be single or multi-compartment as required. Where multi- compartment is used, vertical dividers shall be provided between the compartments which shall be welded to the trunking prior to galvanizing. H. Heavy Duty UPVC trunking with clip on lid (all insulated) shall be used, if shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere, to replace multiple conduit runs. All PVC cable trunking and accessories shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. Only standard accessories fabricated by the manufacturer shall be used and no site fabrication shall be allowed.

2.5 CABLE TRAYS A. All cable trays shall be of heavy duty perforated type with return flange. B. All cable trays shall be manufactured from hot-dip galvanized steel, with a standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350 g/m2 and Z2 bending grade. C. All accessories and fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, cross units and angles shall be of the same specification as that of the cable tray finish and shall be standard products from the same manufacturer as the cable tray. Site fabrication shall not be permitted. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 5 of 11

D. Cable trays and accessories shall be of a thickness of not less than: 1. 1.5 mm up to 300 mm width. 2. 2.0 mm above 300 mm width. E. All fixing brackets, nuts and bolts shall be finished by hot dip galvanizing. F. Tinned copper earth continuity straps shall be provided at every joint of the cable tray. G. Where cable tray crosses building expansion joints, the tray shall be installed suitably to provide expansion / contraction with the building expansion. H. Where cable tray carries 11 kV cable, a tray lid shall be installed. I. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, all cable trays shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating, as approved by the Engineer. J. In outdoor location all cable trays shall include sun shade.

2.6 CABLE LADDERS A. All cable ladders shall be heavy duty gauge (>2 mm), manufactured from hot-dip galvanized steel with a standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350 g/m2 and Z2 bending grade. B. All accessories and fittings such as couplers, bends, tees, elbows, etc. shall be by the same manufacturer as the ladder. C. Ladder system supports shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's structural information to ensure that undue stress or bending shall not occur. D. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint of cable ladders. E. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmosphere, the ladders shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating, as approved by the Engineer.

2. 7 INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES A. All interior outlet boxes shall be constructed in compliance with BS 4662 type UA1. B. Outlet boxes shall be with 1.1mm thickness and 7x7 cm or 7x14 cm size and 3.5cm depth with adjustable lug. C. Provide galvanized flat, rolled sheet steel interior outlets and switches wiring boxes of types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each respective location and installation. Construct threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. D. Brass earthing terminal with screw shall be provided inside the box for grounding connection of all metallic outlet boxes with appropriate earth mark. D. Accessories for interior outlet boxes such as mounted brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, grounding connection, cable clamps, metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, etc. shall be compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring situations. E. Exposed or surface mounted boxes, when used with rigid steel conduits, shall have threaded hubs. These boxes shall be cast from feraloy or malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized. 2.8 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES A. All weatherproof outlet boxes shall comply with BS. B. Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes of types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each location and installation as shown on the Drawings. C. Weatherproof outlet boxes shall be provided with threaded conduit ends, terminal with screw for ground connection, cast metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps, suitable configures for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion resistant fasteners. D. All weatherproof outlet boxes shall be provided with corrosion free epoxy powder coat, to provide corrosion resistance with appropriate gasket. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 6 of 11

E. For outdoor applications and areas with corrosive atmosphere, boxes for use with PVC coated steel conduits shall be galvanized cast boxes with a PVC factory applied coating of 40 mm minimum thickness. Boxes shall have hubs with extruded sleeves extending the hubs.

2.9 JUNCTION/PULL BOXES AND CABINETS A. All junction and pull boxes shall be constructed in compliance with BS. B. Provide galvanized, code gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes with screws on cover, of types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each respective location and installation. C. Junction/pull boxes and cabinets shall be provided with welded seams and appropriate cast covers, equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, washers and terminal with screw for ground connection. D. Junction/pull boxes and cabinets/enclosures shall be provided with hinged covers, where required. E. Cabinets shall be provided with a reinforced steel back plate for mounting interior components, rigidity and accurate alignment.

2.10 FLOOR BOXES A. All floor outlet boxes shall be metallic or PVC material and constructed in compliance with BS. B. Provide corrosion resistant, galvanized, sheet steel floor or PVC material outlet boxes of the types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each respective location and installation. C. The depth of floor outlet boxes shall be sufficient enough to accommodate conduit entries from sides and all kind of wiring devices with plugs from the top. D. The floor outlet boxes shall be waterproof when fully closed. Appropriate rubber protection shall be available for cable outlets from the floor base. E. The cover of the floor outlet boxes shall be able to be closed completely after installation of plugs and connecting devices inside the box. The cover shall be suitable for flush floor installation with provision of fixing carpet, vinyl sheet, etc. above the cover to match with the finish of the floor. F. Floor boxes shall have a panel opening and overall module depth shall be suitable for the required compartments. The box must be provided with total Device Wiring Chamber. A. The box lid shall be a hinged style and constructed of polycarbonate material, available in standard colors of black, brown and gray. The lid shall provide a minimum of three removable cable guards for egress of power and communication workstation cables. The cable guards shall hold workstation cables in place with the lid either in the open or closed position. B. The trim flange shall be constructed of polycarbonate material. The hinged lid and trim flange shall be available for either carpet or tile floor applications. I. The wiring chamber shall provide an upper and a lower compartment. The top compartment shall be divided into four separate compartments to accommodate a combination of both power and communication wiring as indicated on drawings. These compartments shall be separated by use of integral; die cast aluminum built in dividers. The bottom compartment shall be available for either all power or all communication wiring. J. The box shall be secured to the raised floor by the use of two locking tabs. The locking tabs shall be integral to the box and adjusted by use of their locking screws.

2.11 CONDUIT BODIES A. All conduit bodies such as capped elbows and service entrance elbows shall be constructed in compliance with BS. B. Conduit bodies and covers shall be constructed from the same material and shall have the same finish or protective coating as that of associated conduits. C. Provide galvanized conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes to suit respective locations and installation, with thread corrosion-resistant screws for fixing. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 7 of 11

D. The conduit bodies shall be appropriately threaded for the conduits and equipped with corrosion resistant screws for fixing the inspection cover. E. Weatherproof conduit bodies and covers shall be provided with corrosion free epoxy powder coat, to provide resistance again corrosion. Covers shall be gasketted.

2.12 FITTINGS A. Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, covers of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation. B. Covers of junction/pull boxes, cabinets/enclosures, etc. shall be of the same thickness and material as that of the box and shall be reinforced where required due to large size. Screws for covers shall be stainless steel or high quality brass.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAYS

3.1.1 INSPECTION A. All Electrical Raceways including conduits and fittings shall be free from objectionable lines, stria- tions, bubbles, welds, and other manufacturing defects that would impair the service of the raceways. The bore of the conduits shall be circular in cross-section with smooth interior surfaces free from rough and flaky areas. The electrical raceways and fittings shall be free from all substances that injuriously effect any wire or cable covering. B. All the Electrical Raceways including conduit runs are shown diagrammatically on the Drawings to outline the general routing only. Any interference with pipes, HVAC ducts, structural members or other equipment shall be inspected and coordinated well before commencement of the installation of raceways. Deviations shall be made in accordance with the approval of the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Contract.

3.1.2 PVC CONDUITS INSTALLATION A. PVC conduits shall be used only where cast into slabs, built or chased into walls etc. Where conduits are surface run in ceiling voids, shaft spaces, plant rooms etc. galvanized RSC shall be used. Adaptation between PVC and metal conduits shall be through metal boxes. B. PVC conduits shall not be installed in locations exposed to direct sun light. C. Where conduit boxes are not to be fitted with accessories, they shall be fitted with cover plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used. D. PVC conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilizing the following appropriate components as supplied by the conduit manufacturer: PART 2 Purpose made adaptors and accessories. 1 Permanent adhesive - Solvent cement to produce a rigid watertight joint when used with standard couplers and accessories. 2 Flexible adhesive - A non-hardening adhesive to be used where expansion facilities are required in long conduit runs, in conjunction with expansion coupler. Not to be used at building movement joints.

E. PVC conduits up to 25 mm diameter may be bent cold with the use of the appropriate bending spring obtained from the conduit manufacturer. For larger size conduits, it is necessary to use heat or appropriate manufacturer's standard readymade bends. F. Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and contraction of the conduits under normal working temperature variations, as follows: 1. Conduit shall be free to slide within saddles. 2. Allowance for expansion in cast in-situ installation is normally only required to effect structural Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 8 of 11

movement at building expansion joints. G. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of 1.5 m in accessible situations. Where working temperatures are high, this spacing shall be reduced accordingly. H. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large PVC adaptable boxes for junctions, which shall be readily accessible at all times. I. Care shall be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where excessive temperatures are likely to occur, special heat resistant boxes shall be used, i.e. of a pattern specifically designed to improve weight loading characteristics at high temperatures. J. Spacing (fill) factors shall be applied to all conduit in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 18th Edition (BS7671).

K. Do not install PVC conduits closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services. L. "Draw-in" boxes shall be installed in all conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length at a maximum 12 m spacing and shall be readily accessible at all times. M. Inspection elbows, bends or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation. N. Use extension rings where boxes are found to be not flush with the finished surface. Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt, dust or debris from entering the conduit system. O. All bends shall be made so that the PVC conduits shall not be damaged, and the internal diameter of the conduits shall not be effectively reduced. P. Not more than four 90 degree bends nor a total of 360 degree bends shall be made in one conduit run between outlets, fittings or outlet bodies including any bends located immediately at the start or end. Q. Install concealed conduits such that only two crossings at a given point are allowed within the slab to prevent any damage or cracking of slab. R. No conduit shall be allowed to run in the floor screed of toilets, kitchen, bathroom or any other wet area. S. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It shall be workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump upto a temperature of 149 oC or less. It shall not be hardened materially when exposed to air.

3.1.3 METAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Metal conduits either Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC) shall be installed in exposed locations as required. RCS shall be installed exposed on surface at all such locations where conduits are liable to be damaged mechanically. B. Threads for RSCs shall be of sufficient length to allow conduits to butt together within couplers. A minimum engagement of five (5) full threads shall be made at all fittings and accessories. C. Remove oil and grease from all threads of RSCs. D. Support all metal conduits at intervals of 1.5 m in isolated positions or 1 m in accessible situations. E. Do not install metal conduit closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services. F. All conduit boxes not to be fitted with accessories shall have metal cover plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used. G. 'Draw in' boxes shall be provided in conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length. 'Draw in' boxes shall be at a maximum 12 m spacing and readily accessible at all times. Adaptable junction boxes shall also be accessible at all times for inspection and maintenance. H. Exercise care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt and debris from entering the conduit system. I. Use extension rings where boxes are found not to be flush with the finished surface. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 9 of 11

J. Protect conduits and conduit accessories from rust and mechanical damage. Exposed conduit threads and damaged or rusty portion of metal conduits shall be painted, using an oxide undercoat and aluminum paint, after being cleaned to bare metal. K. Conduits installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete. L. Under no circumstances, shall any metal conduit be used as a circuit protective conductor (CPC). Every final sub-circuit shall incorporate its own separate Cu/PVC CPC. M. Spacing (fill) factors shall be applied to all conduits in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition (BS7671). N. Field bends shall be made with a hand bender for 1-1/2” (38mm) and smaller diameter metal conduits only. Larger size conduits shall be bent with a machine bender or be factory supplied. Heat- ing of metal conduits to facilitate bending is not permitted. O. All bends shall be made so that metal conduits shall not be damaged, and the internal diameter of the conduit shall not be effectively reduced. The inner edge radius of all field bends shall not be less than the minimum allowable radius as BS. P. Not more than four 90 degree bends nor a total of 360 degree bends shall be made in one conduit run between outlets, fittings or outlet bodies including any bends located immediately at the start or end. Q. Conduits and elbow used for cables extending to outside of building shall be PVC coated rigid steel extending one meter from building foundation. A concrete encased PVC adapter shall be used in case cable extending will run in PVC ducts. Bells shall be provided on PVC horizontal stub outs. R. PVC conduits shall not be extended above grade. Where extensions of PVC conduits above grade are required, a PVC coated rigid steel transition bend having PVC/steel coupling on one end and threaded male or female adaptor on the other end. The PVC coated rigid steel transition bend or conduit shall extend minimum 150 mm above grade. A concrete envelope 100 mm high shall be formed around such risers to minimize corrosion at point of emergence. The top of the envelope shall be sloped for drainage. S. Verify exact stub up location and termination requirement for items and equipment being served, for all necessary power and control wiring. T. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It shall be workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump up to a temperature of 149 oC or less. It shall not be hardened materially when exposed to air. U. Where conduits turn out of, or penetrate, a slab, they shall be not less than 65 mm on centers. V. Location and sizing of conduit sleeves passing through floors and walls that are not shown on the Drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel unless indicated otherwise, extended 150 mm above floor and capped when not in use. Space between conduits and sleeves shall be filled with ductseal to a minimum of 50 mm deep at top and bottom of conduit sleeve. W. All metal conduits entering any gasketed boxes or gasketed equipment enclosure shall be provided and terminated with gasketed hubs with bonding screws. Whereas the metal conduits entering non-gasketed sheet-metal boxes or enclosures shall be provided and terminated with general purpose hubs. X. Provide supports to alleviate stress on cables where they enter a conduit or other enclosure from the tray.

3.1.4 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS INSTALLATION A. All flexible conduits and fittings used shall be liquid-tight. B. Flexible conduits shall only be used in short lengths, of less than 1000 mm, in cases where a final connection is required to be made to a fixed item of equipment which is subject to vibration or thermal expansion. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 10 of 11

C. Flexible conduits shall be 1.25 x L in length, L being the direct distance between connection unit and fixed appliance, up to maximum length of 1 m. D. Purpose made glands shall be used on the ends of all lengths of flexible conduits. E. A separate Cu/PVC circuit protective conductor shall be included in all lengths of flexible conduits. F. Flexible conduits shall be installed so as not to incur undue mechanical strain, damage or excessive temperatures. 3.1.5 SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION A. Cable trunking shall be fixed securely to the building structure at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m. B. Where vertical runs of trunking exceed 3 m in length, pin racks shall be fitted. C. Spacing (fill) factors shall be applied to all cable trunking in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition (BS7671). D. For metal trunking installations, earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints. E. Metal trunking cut during installation shall have the cut ends painted with an oxide undercoat and an aluminium top coat. F. Where metal trunking is installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, the complete trunking installation shall be painted with a chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete. G. Expansion joints with gaps shall be incorporated in all cable trunking runs in excess of 6 m in length. External couplings shall have elongated slots and fixing holes shall be drilled oversize to give freedom of linear movement. Internal couplings shall be securely fixed at one end by use of thixotrophic adhesive leaving the other end free for linear movement. H. Bare copper or aluminium cables shall not be run in metal trunking.

3.1.6 CABLE TRAYS/LADDERS INSTALLATION A. Where practical, cable trays/ladders shall be run horizontally and flat or vertically and shall be supported at distances not exceeding 1.5 m to the building structure using mild steel brackets. These brackets shall be secured to the building structure using expanded bolts and washers or built into the building structures during construction. B. Where cable tray/ladder is suspended, 2 drop rods shall be used at each suspension point to an angle iron or channel support to which the cable ladder is bolted. The spacing of suspension points shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's structural information such that undue stress of defection does not occur. C. Where cable tray/ladder is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide undercoat and an aluminum top coat. Where the finish is PVC, a top coat of liquid PVC solution shall be applied after the completion of the cable ladder installation. D. Cable trays/ladders run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than 75 mm to the wall. E. All cables shall be secured to the cable tray with clamps at distances in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition (BS7671). F. Do not run bare copper or aluminum cables run on cable tray/ladder. G. Ensure earth continuity by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across each cable tray/ladder joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints.

3.2 BOXES

3.2.1 PREPARATION A. Determine exact locations of outlets on site after co-ordination with layouts for architectural, furniture and other equipment. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 33 (R0) September 2020 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST Page 11 of 11

B. The locations of junction/pull boxes and other fittings and accessories are generally not shown on the Drawings, but Contractor shall provide these in compliance with applicable requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations, ease of maintenance, manufacturer’s written instructions and recognized industry practices.

3.2.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fitting with wire/cable and raceway installation work. C. Provide knockout closures in all types of electrical boxes to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. D. Install all types of boxes and conduit bodies at accessible locations to ensure easy installation and maintenance of electrical wiring. E. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface. F. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrate or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. G. Provide electrical and earth connections for all types of installed electrical boxes. H. Fastenings for all types of exposed/surface mounted electrical boxes shall not penetrate more than 30 mm into reinforced concrete beams or more than 20 mm into reinforced concrete joists and shall not contact main reinforcing steel. I. Boxes and supports shall be fastened with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel work. J. In open overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support. Support cast metal boxes having threadless connectors and sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or with bar hangers. K. Where conduit supported outlet boxes are installed and conduit suspended from the structure with hangers, attach hangers to raceways on opposite sides of the box and shall be supported with an approved type fastener not more than 1 m measured each side from the box. L. Boxes installed outdoor on concrete or masonry walls, for vaportight fixtures, shall be weatherproof type. M. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture or where shown on the Drawings. N. Interior or weatherproof outlet boxes shall be provided for each light fixture, receptacle, equipment connection and other conduit termination points. O. In suspended ceilings where outlet boxes support fixtures in which the ceiling suspension system does not have sufficient strength to prevent visible deflection of the ceiling surfaces, the boxes shall be supported by structural members, secured to building structure. P. Outlet box covers shall not be used to support fixtures. Q. Requirement of pull boxes shall be determined based on maximum allowable conduit runs, as described in Section 26 27 26. R. Where pull boxes (existing and new), are connected to conduits running underground in the site, they shall be provided with suitable provisions for drain.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 05 34(R0) September 2020 Floor Boxes For Electrical System Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes floor boxes; floor boxes service fittings

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit catalog data for floor boxes service fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR BOXES

A. Material: Cast metal or polycarbonate with metal cover

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Boxes and fittings are indicated on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Adjust box location up to 10 feet to accommodate intended purpose.

B. Floor Box Requirements: Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.

C. Set floor boxes level. Most of the existing floors within the terminals are not level. Align all new floor boxes totally flush with the adjacent floor finish on all sides.

D. In order to avoid severing any existing structural reinforcement, use ground penetrating radar to survey the existing concrete slab before cutting or drilling any new floor penetrations.

E. When aligning floor boxes note that most of the existing floor within the terminals are not level.

Align all new floor boxes totally flush with the adjacent floor finish on all sides.

END OF SECTION 26 05 34

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building 26 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS FOR ELEC SYS Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Cable trays. 2. Cable Ladders B. Related Sections And Documents

1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning 2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Works Results, General 3. Section 26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections 4. Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 5. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 05 29 Equipment Connections and Support 7. Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 8. Section 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 9. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 10. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

B. REFERENCES A. BS EN ISO 1416 B. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

C. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes. B. Product Data: Submit fittings and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions & limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, & installation of Product.

D. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Requirements of Division 01. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.

E. QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

F. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Requirements of Division 01. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building 26 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS FOR ELEC SYS Page 2 of 5

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

C. QUALITY ASSURANCE Cable Trays shall comply with the applicable standards of Local Standards Organization & BS. Building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single Manufacturer.

D. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING All Cable Trays shall be delivered in factory pack wrapping and boxes and stored in a clean, dry space within the racks.

E. SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional consumable material of all types and sizes used, per Supplier’s recommendations.

B. TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

C. WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2. 1 CABLE TRAYS A. All cable trays shall be of heavy duty perforated type with return flange not less than 50 mm. B. All cable trays shall be hot-dip galvanized steel after manufacture according to BS EN ISO 1416, with a standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350 g/m2 and Z2 bending grade. C. Provided all manufacturer's standard accessories and fittings such as clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, grounding straps and angles shall be of the same specification as that of the cable tray finish and shall be standard products from the same manufacturer as the cable tray. Site fabrication shall not be permitted.

D. Cable trays and accessories shall be of a thickness of not less than: 1. 1.5 mm up to 300 mm width. 2. 2.0 mm above 300 mm width. E. All fixing brackets, nuts and bolts shall be finished by hot dip galvanizing. F. Tinned copper earth continuity straps shall be provided at every joint of the cable tray. G. Where cable tray crosses building expansion joints, the tray shall be installed suitably to provide expansion / contraction with the building expansion. H. Where cable tray carries 11 kV cable, a tray lid shall be installed. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building 26 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS FOR ELEC SYS Page 3 of 5

I. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, all cable trays shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating, as approved by the Engineer. J. Outdoor cable trays installations shall be provided with flanged covers of the same material.

2.2 CABLE LADDERS A. All cable ladders shall be heavy duty gauge (>2 mm), manufactured from hot-dip galvanized steel after manufacture according to BS EN ISO 1416 with a standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350 g/m2 and Z2 bending grade. B. All accessories and fittings such as couplers, bends, tees, elbows, etc. shall be by the same manufacturer as the ladder. C. Ladder system supports shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's structural information to ensure that undue stress or bending shall not occur. D. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint of cable ladders. E. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmosphere, the ladders shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating, as approved by the Engineer.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS A. Engraved Nameplates: black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR 1SUPPORT? USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CABLE TRAY / CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION

A. Install as a complete system, including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice- plate support systems, barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and crosses. B. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays / cable ladders. C. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray / cable ladder and to equipment. Support cable tray / cable ladder independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray / cable ladder on equipment enclosure. D. Install expansion connectors where cable tray / cable ladder crosses building expansion joint. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. E. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings. F. Make cable tray / cable ladder connections using standard fittings. G. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Section 07 84 00 "Fire Stopping." H. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray / cable ladder penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. I. Workspace: Install cable trays / cable ladders with enough space to permit access for installing cables. J. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V. K. After installation of cable trays / cable ladders is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays / cable ladders. L. L. The cable tray for 11 kV cables shown on the layout is tentative. Any changes if required during co-ordination, shall be carried out without any implications and hence shall form part of contractor scope. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building 26 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS FOR ELEC SYS Page 4 of 5

3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when cable tray / cable ladder installation has been completed and inspected. B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device. C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 300 mm. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs. D. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable tray / cable ladder. E. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground cable trays / cable ladders according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable trays / cable ladder.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. After installing cable trays / cable ladders and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey: 1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable tray / cable ladder, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 2. Verify that communication or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers. 3. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that could damage cables. 4. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation. 5. Visually inspect each cable tray / cable ladder joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and re-torque in suspect areas. 6. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware.

7. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray / cable ladder grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray / cable ladder. B. Report results in writing.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed cable tray / cable ladders.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes shall be lead lined as recommended by cable tray / cable ladder manufacturer.

2. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from falling Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building 26 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS FOR ELEC SYS Page 5 of 5

objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray / cable ladder can be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.

END OF SECTION 26 05 36

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 44 (R0) September 2020 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS ANDCABLING Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. B. Related Sections and Documents:

1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning 2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Works Results, General. 3. Section 26 05 19 LV Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 4. Section 26 05 33 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 36 Cable Trays and Ladders for Electrical Systems 6. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 27 05 33 Conduits and Backbones for Communications Systems. 8. Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communication Systems 9. Section 28 05 33 Conduits and Backbones for Electronic Safety and Security. 10. Section 28 05 36 Cable Trays for Electronic Safety and Security Systems 11. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. The IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition with all current additions and amendments. B. BS 4568 Rigid Steel Conduits. C. BS 6099-2.2 / IEC 614-2-2 U.P.V.C. Rigid Conduits D. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Name and address of agents stating whether any manufacturing or fabrication is carried out in Oman. B. Product data for each sleeve, material under the Contractor’s submittal. C. Shop drawings showing types, sizes, routing of all sleeves, locations and sizes of penetrations, locations and types of seals. D. Method Statement and Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 44 (R0) September 2020 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS ANDCABLING Page 2 of 5

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Requirements of Division 01. B. As built drawings. C. Project Record Documents: PART 1 1. Record actual routings, types and sizes of sleeves. 2. Record actual locations and types of seals.

1.5 COORDINATION A. Requirements of Division 01. B. Coordinate installation of sleeves with cable routes as shown on drawings as well as with MEP equipment installations and with structural elements. C. Coordinate penetrations for sleeves and raceways with cable routes, other MEP equipment installations and get structural Engineer Approval before executing.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of sleeves and sleeves seals of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sleeves and Sleeves Seals shall generally be manufacturer’s standard construction and materials.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Requirements of Division 01. B. Product Requirements for storage and handling. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.9 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional material of all types and sizes used, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than two units of each type and rating. B. Incase three or less numbers of any material of certain type/ size are installed, a minimum of one for each three numbers additional devices of same rating/ size shall be provided as spare.

1.10 WARRANTY A. The sleeves and sleeves seals shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years for from the date of practical completion Certificate. B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 44 (R0) September 2020 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS ANDCABLING Page 3 of 5

from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: BS 4568, not less than 20 mm diameter zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.61mm minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: BS 6099-2.2 / IEC 614-2-2 heavy gauge. D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 1270mm and with no side larger than 406.4mm, thickness shall be 1.32 mm. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 1270mm or more and one or more sides larger than 406.4mm, thickness shall be 3.5mm.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors. B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydrau- lic-cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 44 (R0) September 2020 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS ANDCABLING Page 4 of 5

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Sealant shall have VOC content of g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Seal materials shall be complying with Local Health Authorities requirements. B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with International/ Local Standards/ Codes and Manufacturer installation requirements. B. Comply with installation requirements of Sections 26 05 33, 26 05 36. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 6.35mm annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 50.8mm above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot- type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 2.54mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 2.54mm annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve- seal system.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 44 (R0) September 2020 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS ANDCABLING Page 5 of 5

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.4 CLEANING A. Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean interior of sleeves and raceways to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION 26 05 44 Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Electrical identification to identify all electrical items for easy operation and maintenance including, but not limited to the following: 2. Nameplates and labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Color coding of raceways. 5. Circuit identification charts. 6. Cable identification tags. 7. Cable warning tapes. 8. Cable markers. 9. Equipment warning/danger signs.

B. Related Sections and Documents 1. Section 09 90 00 Paintings and Coatings. 2. Section 14 21 23 Electric Traction Elevators. 3. Division 26 All Specification Sections 4. Division 27 All Specification Sections. 5. Division 28 All Specification Sections. 6. Division 33 Related Sections. 7. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. IEC 364 Electrical Installations B. BS 7671 Electrical Wiring Regulation (IEE 17th) with all current additions and amendments. C. IEC 391 Marking of Insulated Conductors D. IEC 445 Equipment Terminals (Identification of Equipment Terminals and Terminations of Cer- tain Designated Conductors). E. IEC 446 Identification of Bare Conductors by Colors or Numerals. F. Local Codes and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating which shall include, but not limited to, the following: Name of the manufacturer. Country of origin. Name and address of agents stating whether any manufacturing or fabrication. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period. Technical performance of the equipment selected. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. Delivery time from the date of orders. Copies of test reports or certificates. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 5

Control schematics and wiring diagrams. B. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engineer. C. Method Statement and Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product Testing Agency and include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of the product.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Requirements of Division 01. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of items the types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All items of Electrical Identification shall comply with the requirements of BS and Local Standards.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Requirements of Division 01. B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements of Division 01. B. Install labels, nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

1.9 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional labels and name plates of all types and sizes, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than two units of each type and size.

1.10 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers.

1.11 WARRANTY A. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates and labels shall be engraved on a three-layer 2 traffolyte plate having minimum thickness of 2 mm, securely screwed to the housing and have black letters on white background in English. B. The name plates and labels shall be required for each electrical distribution board, control panels, equipment enclosures, substation equipment, disconnect switches and equipment cabinets. C. Lettering shall be block capitals standing : 1. 6 mm high for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 10 mm high for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

Labels using embossed adhesive tape with 6mm white letters on black background or transparent adhesive tape with 6 mm black letters, as selected by the Engineer, shall be used for identification of individual wall switches, receptacles, low current outlets, speakers, control device stations, junction/pull boxes, electrical boxes and fittings, etc.

2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Wire markers shall be split sleeve or tubing type. B. The wire markers shall be required for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlets, junction boxes and each load connection. C. All power and lighting circuits, branch or feeder circuits and control circuits shall require wire markers.

2.3 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS A Individual circuit identification charts shall be provided for all panelboards, distribution boards, control panels, etc. giving following information as a minimum. Circuit numbers Phase Load names with location. Connected load. Outgoing terminal numbers. Sizes and types of protective devices. Sizes and types of incoming and outgoing cables. Contacts location references of relays and other control devices (if any). Charts shall be typed on A4 size sheets. They shall be enclosed in a clear plastic envelope and shall be securely fixed to the inside cover of the unit. Additional copies of the charts shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2.4 CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS A. All cables which exit from manholes, vaults, handholes, and transformer or switch enclosures shall be properly tagged or labeled. Tags shall be permanent, non-corrodible and clearly readable. Tags should include the information listed below for the various circuit categories: Feeder Name Voltage Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 5

Phase (for single conductor cables)

B. Cable identification tags for wire and cable circuits shall be of an opaque nylon material arranged to include a marker plate, non-releasing nylon ties, and cable fastening tail. One side shall be roughened to hold black nylon permanent ink. Identification shall be permanent and waterproof. The holding device shall be designed to allow the fastening tail to pass around the cable through the holding device, and prevent removal of the tail without cutting it loose from the marker. Cable identification shall be inscribed in Arabic and English.

2.5 CABLE WARNING TAPES A. For buried LV and MV cables use warning tapes according to the standard practice of Electricity Supply Authority and applicable international standards. B. Cable warning tapes shall be of polythene, not less than 150 mm wide and at least 0.25 mm thick. They shall be yellow in color for LV and MV cables and bear the continuously repeated legend – “CAUTION ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW” or similar in English and Arabic, in black letters not less than 30 mm high. C. For buried low current/communication cables or duct banks, use warning tapes as per the standard practice of Local Telecom Supplier and applicable international standards.

2.6 CABLE MARKERS A. Buried cables shall be permanently identified by concrete markers. The markers shall be 600 mm square x 100 mm thick with impressed character; they shall be made of grade 20 concrete, with 10 mm aggregate. The impressed characters shall be in English and Arabic and worded "HV CABLE" or "LV CABLE" as appropriate together with circuit details as required for proper identification. In addition, the word “JOINT” shall be added to above words, where applicable.

B. Except where cables are buried, located in switchrooms, in ducts and spaces designated solely for electrical services, or have orange oversheaths; they shall be identified by adhesive bands colored orange, complying with standards and codes of practice mentioned elsewhere in the Specifications. The bands shall be not less than 100 mm long, located at least once within each separate compartment through which cables pass and at intervals not exceeding 12 m. C. Except where cables are buried or enclosed in conduit, trunking or ducting; they shall be permanently identified by discs. The discs shall be of laminated plastic materials with black character on white; character shall be not less than 3 mm high. The inscription shall indicate the nominal voltage, the designation of the load, the number and cross sectional area of cores and the rated voltage of the cable. D. Cables identification discs shall be attached to the cables with ties. Disc shall be located within 500 mm of terminations and joints, at least once within each separate compartment through which the cable passes, and at intervals not exceeding 24 m, they shall coincide with the colour bands.

2.7 EQUIPMENT WARNING/DANGER SIGNS A. For external use, pressure sensitive danger signs shall be used. Dimensions shall be as approved by the Engineer. The signs shall be heavy duty vinyl with a self-adhesive backing which can be applied to curved or irregular surfaces. Danger signs shall be weather-resistant and shall not discolor or deteriorate with age. B. Danger signs shall be inscribed with the equipment voltage level along with an internationally recognized danger sign. C. Warning/Danger signs made of red plastic (vinyl) with white letters at least 25 mm high reading "DANGER High Voltage" shall be fixed to the entrance doors of all MV switchgear and transformer rooms. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 5

D. Warning/Danger signs made of red plastic (vinyl) with white letters at least 15 mm high reading "DANGER 400V"or “DANGER 230V” as appropriate, shall be fixed to the lids, covers or doors of any equipment which contains terminals or conductors connected to more than one phase of a low voltage supply. E. All signs shall be in English and Arabic.

2.8 LANGUAGE A. The English language shall be used for all labeling and charts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. De-grease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

10. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install warning and descriptive labels as follows: 1. Metallic surfaces using stainless steel or chromium plated bolts and/or self tapping screws. 2. Timber surfaces using minimum 6 mm countersunk brass screws. 3. All insulated enclosures using an approved plastic welding adhesive. B. The danger sign and identification number shall be affixed to the front or access doors of all transformers and switches. For equipment with two doors the danger sign shall be mounted on the left door with the identification number mounted on the right door. Both the danger sign and the identification number shall be centered 300 mm below the top edge of the doors and on the vertical centerline of each door. C. On equipment with only one access door, the danger sign and the identification number shall be centered on the vertical centerline of the door, with the horizontal centre line of the danger sign 300 mm below the top edge of the door and the horizontal centre line of the identification number 250 mm below the danger sign centerline. D. Locate cable markers at every point where cable(s) enter a building, sub-station, distribution/feeder pillar; at each joint, change of direction, road/pathway crossing, etc. Cable markers shall also be provided along the straight runs (route) of the cable(s) at the interval not exceeding 30 m.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.0 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Lighting contactors. 2. Switches. 3. Switch plates. 4. Occupancy sensors. 5. Motion Detectors. 6. Photocells. 7. Photocell control unit. 8. Intelligent network lighting control system. 9. Central Lighting Control/ Dimming System

B. Related Sections 1. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls. 2. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 3. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Works Results, General. 4. Section 26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections. 5. Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 6. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 7. Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 8. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 9. Section 26 24 16 Panel boards. 10. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices and Disconnecting Switches. 11. Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 12. Section 27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling 13. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) 1. C62.41-1991–Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) 1. D4674-2a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Ex- posed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window- Filtered Daylight. C. International Electro technical Commission 1. IEC 801-2 Electrostatic Discharge Testing Standard 2. IEC 60669-2-1 switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations –electronic switches Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 2 of 11

D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 19001:2000–Quality Management Systems E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1.WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. 489 (2002) - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker En- closures 2. 508 (1999)- Standard for Industrial Control Equipment 3. 924 (2003)- Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 4. 1472 (1996)-Solid-State Dimming Controls G. Conformité Européenne (CE): 1. Low Voltage Directive. 2. EMC Directive. 3. RRTTE Directive (for RF communication devices). H. B.S3676 Part 1: 1989 & EN 60669-1 I. BS EN 60529:1992 J. B.S. 587 K. IEC L. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Manual lighting switching control using local manual switches and dimmer switches. B. Distributed switching control using self-contained individually mounted lighting relays. C. Network lighting control based on distributed lighting controllers, interconnected via data bus with management system (if mentioned in the drawings). D. Lighting control/ dimming system (if mentioned in the drawings) includes computer-based software that provides control, configuration, monitoring, alerting and reports System includes: 1. Lighting Management Panel 2. Light management computer 3. Light management computer software 4. Energy savings display software 5. Factory assembled dimming and switching panels and power interfaces and power modules as noted on drawings 6. Low voltage wall stations and control interfaces and sensors as noted on drawings 7. Digital Solid-state fluorescent dimming ballasts 8. Digital (addressable fixture lighting control) 9. Roller Shades (window treatments) 10. Open Loop Solar Adaptive Shade Algorithm 11. Permanently installed occupancy/vacancy sensors and power packs 12. Receptacles in accordance with Division 26 Wiring Devices E. The lighting system has been designed to comply with section 9.4 & 9.5 of ASHRAE 90.1 2004.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Division 01. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioned drawings of lighting control system components and Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 3 of 11

accessories. C. One Line Diagram: Indicating system configuration indicating panels, number and type of switches or devices. D. Include typical wiring diagrams for each component. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for each system component. F. Method Statement of system components installation, connection, testing, operation and commissioning. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data, which shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Name of the manufacturer. 2. Country of origin. 3. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period. 4. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 5. Delivery time from the date of orders. 6. Copies of test reports or certificates. I. Provide samples of proposed wiring devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engineer. J. Specification Conformance Document: Indicate whether the submitted equipment: 1. Meets specification exactly as stated. 2. Meets specification via an alternate means and indicate the specific methodology used. K. Product Data: Catalog cut sheets with performance specifications demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. L. Sequence of Operation to describe how each area operates and how any building wide functionality is described. M. Company Profile N. Experience/Commitments 1. Similar work experience of design and build of Light Control Systems The Contractor/ Subcon- tractor shall illustrate the references of LCS projects to prove his capabilities and experiences in designing, supplying, installing, testing, commissioning, maintaining, and supporting the systems, and supporting the client in any requirements needed post-project handover This should include case studies describing the following: a. Case Study Reference Number b. Project Name c. Client Name d. Project Location e. Project Value f. Project Duration g. Scope of Work h. Customer Support i. Challenges & Lessons Learnt j. Energy Model and ROI/IRR Report 2. A. minimum of one case study shall be presented for each of the below, following the above format: a. Experience in similar development segment (i e retail, mixed-use, residential, etc ) b. Experience in providing fully integrated solutions of LCS Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 4 of 11

c. Experience in enhancing LCS d. Experience in creating Energy Modeling with ROI/IRR Reports 3. Current commitments/obligations The Contractor/ Subcontractor shall present all current commitments and obligations in the following format: a. Project Name b. Client Name c. Project Location d. Project Duration, and Target Start & End Dates e. Scope of Work 4. Confirmation to having fully equipped & staffed local administration office & engineering service center 5. Confirmation to having local service center O. QA/QC approach/procedure documents 1. The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of QA/QC policies, method statements, procedures, people, resources, and forms used to manage LCS design &/or installation projects P. Testing procedures 1. The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of testing policies, method statements, procedures, program, people, resources, forms and sub-Contractors used to manage each of the following testing procedures: a. Factory acceptance tests (FAT) b. Pre-installation tests c. Site acceptance tests (SAT) d. User tests and user-defined customization Q. Commissioning of works 1. The Contractor shall provide a detailed description of commissioning of works’ method statements, procedures, program, and forms R. Completion & acceptance certificate. The Contractor shall provide the certificate forms that would be issued for completion of works and acceptance of works The forms should include a list of statements to any additional matters and/or concerns that have been raised as part of the works S. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal

1.5 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Division 01. T. Project Record Documents: Record the following information: 1. Actual locations of components and record circuiting and switching arrangements. 2. Wiring diagrams reflecting field installed conditions with identified and numbered, system components and devices. U. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit replacement parts numbers. 2. Submit manufacturer’s published installation instructions and operating instructions. 3. Recommended renewal parts list. V. Sustainable Design Closeout Documentation W. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide Enhanced Start-up documentation that details Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 5 of 11

the start-up procedure being performed including a process to follow, details on tests performed and an area that documents any test results. Maintenance Material Submittals. 1. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to end user. 2. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of 10 years from date of manufacture. X. Training Visit 1. Contractor to provide 8 days additional on-site system training to site personnel Y. On-site Walkthrough 1. Contractor to provide a factory certified Field Service Engineer to demonstrate system functionality to the Owner

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of Lighting Control Devices of types required, lighting management systems and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least Five years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of Lighting Control Devices of types required, lighting management systems and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Lighting Control Devices shall comply with the applicable Local Standards, and listed international standards. C. Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of Lighting Control Devices to the building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. G. Client Expectations: 1. The Contractor shall provide a method statement for each of the system performance criteria to illustrate how these requirements will be met for each of the equipment’s/ materials being proposed.

2. System Performance Criteria:

Method State- Contractor’s No. Criteria Description ment Comments 1. Time Tested The system integrator is expected to provide a complete solution that has been installed in communal, residential, commercial and retail developments. The devices to be proposed should also have a track record with good customer feedback. 2. Availability The solution shall be designed and installed to operate with high availability 3. Reliability The solution shall be designed and installed to operate with a high reliabil- Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 6 of 11

Method State- Contractor’s No. Criteria Description ment Comments ity. 4. Safety The solution shall be designed and installed in such a way to allow the safe installation, operation and maintenance of the system. 5. Electrical Compat- The solution shall be fully compatible ibility with the electrical distribution system at the development. 6. Interoperability The ability to easily integrate with many partnered and non-partnered vendors. Proprietary and standardized non-proprietary systems are acceptable provided that a means of easily integrating the various systems is available. BACnet, Lonworks, EIB/KNX, DALI, Ethernet and RS232 are some examples of acceptable means of integration. The demonstration of strong dealer network will be evaluated. 7. Flexibility Being able to replace 3rd party devices (non-core components) to different models and brands. 8. Upgradeability The ability to access the system remotely for frequent firmware upgrades by system operators, with a limited time delay. 9. Scalability/ Ex- The system architecture should allow pandability for one centralized control point that is expandable up to 1 million zones. The lighting control system should achieve

this without the need of a 3rd party integration system. The system also must have the ability to add new features and easily integrate them. 10. Response Time Instant response to actions and events, triggered manually by the

press of a switch, or automatically by pre-defined alerts. 11. Synchronization Provide an instant response time for the two-way communication among the devices. 12. Redundancy At least one other redundant line of communication should be designed in case of line break, ensuring that the

remaining system components are backed up and run normally when one component fails. 13. Robustness The stability of the communication architecture measured by instant re-

sponse time, accuracy on synchronization, and redundant failure points. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 7 of 11

Method State- Contractor’s No. Criteria Description ment Comments 14. User-Friendliness The usability (ease-of-use) of all interfaces, and consistency across the different interface types and not limited to the below functionalities: - System settings - Configuration changes - Individual zone control (scheduling, etc) 15. Variety of Inter- The ability to add or replace user interfaces faces and provide a consistent, easy-

to-use design across all types, such as PCs, PDAs, and internet browsers. 16. Remote Access The access hierarchy for the different user groups, and the usability and ca-

pability of managing, adding and modifying many functions/events remotely. 17. Maintainability The ability to run diagnostics remotely and support and fix the application without the need for physical access. System Integrator should also prove that spare parts will be available throughout 0-20 years upon system installation. 18. Sustainability The use of environment friendly devices and the ability to provide an added value in terms of higher energy saving models without incurring a significant cost implication. A report of return of investment on the lighting control system must be presented during bidding. 19. Layer of Protec- It is expected that the system provided tion has a secured layer to prevent unauthorized access to the system. 20. Warranty Great benefits to client such as next

business day replacement, etc. 21. Innovation Innovative solutions of any form.

22. Latency

23. Resiliency

24. Value for Money

25. Reporting Feed- LCS should at least have the ability to back monitor: - Occupancy statistics for all motion sensors (presentable per area) - Lamp running hours & energy use (using dimming or switch- Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 8 of 11

Method State- Contractor’s No. Criteria Description ment Comments ing loads). - Daylight autonomy (how many hours can system run on daylight only, on which side of fa- çade, etc.) - Result of occupancy ratio against total energy consumption per zone (reporting tool for FM to investigate and opti- mize)

1.8 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock of minimum two numbers of each type/ rating of each circuit breaker, contactor, fuse installed.

1.9 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Three Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and software and hardware administration of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s 8-year limited parts warranty for the replacement of defective Digital- Network Lighting Components from the date of system commissioning. B. Provide 2-year Support and Maintenance Plan that covers100% parts and labor from the date of the system commissioning. 1. Support and Maintenance plan shall include all elements indicated in 1 9 Service & Support. C. Lighting control computer is covered by a 2-year parts and labor warranty. D. Provide manufacturer’s warranty covering 5 years with factory startup on ballasts and ballast modules from date of purchase. E. For ballasts, see Division 26 – Section 26 51 00.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REMOTE CONTROL LIGHTING RELAYS A. Product Description: Heavy duty, single-coil momentary contact mechanically held remote control relays. B. Contacts: Rated for lighting applications with LED lights. C. Line Voltage Connections: Clamp type screw terminals.

2.2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Lighting contactors shall be provided in interior and exterior lighting panel boards or elsewhere as shown on the Drawings, Schedules or required for the satisfactory operation of the lighting system. 2 B.The lighting contactors shall be magnetic type complying with B.S. 587. The rating and number of Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 9 of 11 main poles/contacts of the lighting contactors shall be suitable for the intended application. The contactor shall be electrically and mechanically held type with coil operating voltage matching with the control voltage. 3 C.All accessories of the lighting contactors such as push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights, auxiliary contacts, etc. shall comply with B.S. 587 and the actual requirements for the satisfactory operation of the lighting system where these will be utilized. 4 D. Accessories: 1. Pushbutton: ON/OFF function, with unguarded recessed shrouded shielded covered lockable configuration. 2. Selector Switch: ON/OFF ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC function, with rotary action. 4. Indicating Light: Red Green lens, transformer resistor type, with incandescent led neon lamp. 5. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open normally closed field convertible in addition to seal-in contact. 6. Control Power Transformers: Furnish fused primary and secondary, and bond un fused leg of secondary to enclosure.

2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSOR A. Compatible with modular relay panels. Capable of being wired directly to Class 2 2P wiring without auxiliary components or devices. B. Separate sensitivity and time delay adjustments with LED indication of sensed movement. User adjustable time-delay: 30 seconds to 12 minutes. C. Furnish with manual override. D. Operation: Silent. E. Room Sensors: Single Direction Two-way Pattern As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 PASSIVE INFRARED WIRED MOTION SENSOR A. Presence/motion lighting control detector shall be ceiling mounted and designed to reduce the amount of time lighting is left on unnecessarily, for example if an area is unoccupied or if there is sufficient natural light. B. The detector shall use passive infrared detection (PIR) to monitors the detection zone for occupancy; if a person is detected then the sensor will turn the lighting on. When the area is vacated, the lighting will turn off after a preset time delay. C. The detector shall have a built in adjustable photocell which keeps the lighting switched off if there is sufficient natural light. Using motion detectors shall reduce energy consumption in the building.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Lighting contactors shall be provided in interior and exterior lighting panel boards or elsewhere as shown on the Drawings, Schedules or required for the satisfactory operation of the lighting system. 5 B.The lighting contactors shall be magnetic type complying with B.S. 587. The rating and number of main poles/contacts of the lighting contactors shall be suitable for the intended application. The contactor shall be electrically and mechanically held type with coil operating voltage matching with the control voltage. 6 C.All accessories of the lighting contactors such as push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights, auxiliary contacts, etc. shall comply with B.S. 587 and the actual requirements for the satisfactory operation of the lighting system where these will be utilized. 7 D. Accessories: 3. Pushbutton: ON/OFF function, 4. Selector Switch: ON/OFF ON/OFF/AUTOMATIC function, with rotary action. 7. Indicating Light: Red Green lens, transformer resistor type, with incandescent led neon lamp. 8. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open normally closed field convertible in addition to seal-in Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 10 of 11

contact. 9. Control Power Transformers: Furnish fused primary and secondary, and bond un fused leg of secondary to enclosure.

2.6 PHOTOCELLS A. General: Consist of sensor mounted as indicated on Drawings with separate control-calibration module. Sensor connected to control-calibration module via single shielded conductor with maximum distance of (150 m). Control unit powered by 24 VAC.

B. Control-Calibration Module: Furnish with the following: 1. Capable of being switched between 4 measurement ranges. 2. Separate trip points for high and low response settings. 3. Momentary contact device to override photocell relays. 4. Three minute time delay between switching outputs to avoid nuisance tripping.

C. Sensor Devices: Each sensor employs photo diode technology to allow linear response to daylight within illuminance range.

2.7 LIGHITNG SWITCHES A. Refer to SECTION 26 27 26.

PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed utilizing manufacturer's catalogue cut sheets and installation instructions and in accordance with these specifications. B. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup and other services necessary for the proper installation of the products/system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. System setup shall include defining each dimmer's load type, assigning each load to a zone and setting the control functions. C. Mount switches, occupancy sensors, and photocells as indicated on Drawings. D. Install wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 19. E. Use only properly color coded, stranded wire. Install wire sizes as indicated on Drawings. In- stall wire in conduit in accordance with Section 26 05 33. F. Label each low voltage wire clearly indicating connecting relay panel. Refer to Section 26 05 53. G. Label each low voltage wire with relay number at each switch or sensor.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer’s field services. B. Furnish services for minimum of one day days for check, test, and start-up. Perform the following services: 1. Check installation of panel boards. 2. Test operation of remote controlled devices. 3. Repair or replace defective components.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 09 23 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 11 of 11

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: B. Requirements for starting and adjusting. C. Test each system component after installation to verify proper operation. D. Test relays, contactors, and switches after installation to confirm proper operation. E. Confirm correct loads are recorded on directory card in each panel.

END OF SECTION 26 09 23

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 1 of 8

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Factory assembled main or sub-main LV Power Distribution Boards and accessories. B. Related Sections

1. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls. 2. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 3. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 4. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 7. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices and Disconnecting Switches. 8. Section 26 28 23 Enclosed Circuit Breakers. 9. Section 26 28 26 Enclosed Transfer switches. 10. Section 26 35 33 Power Factor Correction Equipment 11. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES The installation shall comply with the following standards, including all amendment. A. IEC 61439: Low voltage switchgears and control gears (Part-1&2) assemblies (EN 60439-1 & 61439-1)

B. IEC 60529: Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

C. IEC 60269: (Part Specification for Cartridge Fuses for voltage up to 1 to 4), BS 88 and including 1000V a.c. and 1500V d.c.

D. IEC 60255: Measuring Relays & Protection equipment, Elec. Relays

E. BS 1361: Specification for Cartridge Fuses for A.C circuit in Domestic and similar Premises.

F. IEC 60898: Circuit breakers for over current protection for household and similar installation.

G. IEC 61008 (Part-1 & 2) : Residual Current Operated Circuit breakers without integral over current protection (RCCB).

H. IEC 61009 (Part-1 & 2): Residual current operated circuit breakers with integral over current protection (RCBO).

I. IEC 60947-1: LV Switchgear & Control Gear- General rules.

J. BS 7626: Current transformers.

K. IEC 60947-1: Low voltage switchgear and control gear- general rule

L. IEC 60947-2: Low voltage switchgear and Control Gear

M. IEC 60947-5: (1 Control Circuit Devices and Switching Elements to 9 parts)

N. IEC 60947-3: Switches, Disconnect or Switch & Fuse Combination Un Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 2 of 8

O. IEC 60947-4: (1 Contactors and motor starters to 3 parts)

P. IEC 60947- 6 (1 to 2 parts): Multiple function equipment -Transfer Switching, Control & protective switching devices

Q. IEC 60947- 7 (1 to 3 parts): Ancillary Equipment’s – terminal Blocks for Copper conductors & safety requirements for Fuse TB

R. BS 5472: Spec for low voltage switchgear and control gear for Industrial Use Terminal Making & Distinctive Number. General Rules.

S. BS 159: Busbars and busbar connections

T. BS 5685 / IEC 60051: Electric Meters

U. Public Authority for Electricity and Water Requirements

V. Notes mentioned on the Tender drawings

W. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalogs and data including schematic drawings, dimensioned layout of equipment and accessories, technical specifications, installation instruction and general recommendations. Include data substantiating that the proposed units comply with the project requirements. B. Submit dimensioned outline drawings of each distribution board/switchboard showing all leading dimensions and the estimated weight of the equipment. C. Submit fully detailed dimensional drawings for metering panels and main low voltage panels approved, signed and stamped from local power company / electrical power service provider. D. The contractor shall provide these approved drawings before any panel being manufactured, otherwise if any panel rejected by the local power company / Engineer the contractor shall re-supply/ install new approved one at his own cost. E. Submit fully detailed dimensional drawings for all electrical rooms/ substations with sections and elevations, connections details, cable/ trays/ busways’ routes and suspension details, natural/ mechanical ventilation, ..etc. and any details requested by the Engineer. F. Submit manufacturer's fabrication, builders work and installation drawings showing all significant details of each main and sub-main LV Power Distribution Boards/switchboard including the following: 1. All components. 2. Fuse, circuit-breaker and switch ratings. 3. Current and voltage transformer ratios, class, terminal markings and output. 4. Instruments, including scale details. 5. Relay types and characteristics. 6. Indicating lamps, including color. 7. Position of switches, and details of function. 8. All internal connections, with terminal markings. 9. Arrangement of terminal blocks. 10. Wire numbers. 11. Size, type and color of secondary wiring. 12. Principal physical dimensions, including clearances required for removing covers, opening doors, operating handles, withdrawing equipment, etc.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 3 of 8

13. Position of all panel face equipment. 14. Identification of all equipment, and appropriate label inscriptions. 15. Foundation details, including weights and fixing points. 16. Cable entry details including gland and gland plate provisions. G. Submit list of tools, test equipment, spare parts and ancillary equipment.

H. Submit the factory test reports verifying that the LV Power Distribution Boards have successfully passed all routine tests. Type tests results shall be submitted, when required by the Engineer. I. Method Statement of installation, connection, adjustments, calibration, setting, testing, operation and commissioning for each proposed panel and all devices enclosed within.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, configurations, and ratings of switchboards and their components on single line diagrams and plan layouts. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the main or sub-main distribution boards of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The distribution boards shall comply with the requirements of BS, IEC and Local Standards.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provision of Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.

B. Deliver in 1 .2m maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.

C. Accept switchboards on site. Inspect for damage.

D. Store in a clear, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic.

E. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure and finish.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to service conditions specified in Section 26 05 00 during and after installation of switchboards.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 4 of 8

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on approved shop drawings.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 01 92 00 – Closeout Procedures.

B. Provide two of each key and any special tools required for operating or removing the breakers.

1.11 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 92 00 – Closeout Procedures.

B. Provide 5 % of each size and type of fuse installed but no less than five of each.

C. Provide 5 % of lamps of each LT panel, switchboard, distribution board, lighting control panels but no less than five of each.

1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Contract: Obtain an undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and his authorized local representative to provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial completion of the work, covering routine service and emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply of necessary standard spare parts.

B. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 24 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.

1.13 WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor or the manufacturer for the period of Two years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the engineer except where any specific warranty from a supplier or manufacturer extends for a longer time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials used in the manufacture and installation of the LV power distribution boards shall be of high quality and of proven suitability for the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in service. D. All LV distribution boards shall be of the same brand and of similar brand as that of panel boards

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 5 of 8

E. All circuit breakers shall be of the same brand.

2.2 LV POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS A. LV power distribution boards/switchboards shall be designed and constructed to withstand for one second without damage, thermal and mechanical stresses which might arise under short circuit conditions up to the prospective busbar short circuit current. Power distribution boards shall be in compliance with IEC 439-1. B. Main LV panels shall withstand short circuit current 65KA . D. Main LV panel ambient temperature 50˚ C with maximum temperature rise upto 60˚ C inside the panel. E. Panel casing shall be fabricated using a minimum of 2mm. thick corrosion resistant galvanized steel sheets or corrosion resistant steel sheets coated with the alloy of aluminum, zinc and silicone Boards shall also be air tight, fully interlocked and factory fabricated with degree of protection min. IP32. F. Switchboards shall be self-contained, free-standing, floor mounting, flush-fronted, multi-cubicle Class 3 or multi-box type as called for on the Drawings and shall be constructed in sections where necessary to facilitate transport and erection. G. The overall height of each switchboard shall not exceed two meters unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. H. Each switchboard shall be designed for front access and top or bottom entry as shown on the Drawings. Cable terminations and space for terminations shall be suitable for the sizes of cable. All switchboards shall be capable of extension at both ends and busbar chambers shall be fitted with removable end covers. J. Each switchboard shall be supplied with removable undrilled steel plates for cable glands and conduit entry. Where single core cables are used the gland plates shall be non-conducting. All conduits, trunking and cables as shown on the Drawings, shall be accurately located and drilled, cut and threaded on site. K. LV switchboards shall be enclosed with lockable doors. All "live" metal shall be insulated and the operator shall not be able to accidentally come into contact with "live" connections or busbars when energized. All cable terminations shall be fully shrouded L. All equipment mounted in switchboards shall be fully accessible for maintenance. Switchboard compartments shall be fitted with hinged doors, neoprene or foam rubber gasketed, and doors shall be provided with lever type locking handles having integral cylinder locks. All locks shall be operable with a common key, the number of keys supplied being two per lock up to a maximum of 10 per switchboard. M. Molded case circuit breakers in switchboards shall comply with IEC 947-2. Switches, fuse- switches, switch disconnectors and disconnectors shall comply with Section 26 27 26 and BS and IEC requirements. N. Motor starters installed within the Power Distribution Boards shall comply with the requirements given in Section 26 29 16. O. Busbars shall be four-pole, air insulated of uniform cross-section throughout their length, with a continuous current rating not less than that shown on the Drawings and shall be arranged horizontally and vertically through each switchboard. Current ratings shall take account of reduction in section caused by drilling for connections and supports. P. Busbars and the connections from them to the various items of switchgear shall be manufactured from hard drawn high conductivity copper. Q. Busbars shall be supported on non-hygroscopic, non-tracking insulators of sufficient strength to withstand, without damage, the forces set up, either by thermal effects during normal operation or by electromagnetic effects under short circuit fault conditions. R. Access to busbars and busbar connections shall be possible only after the removal of covers secured by bolts or studs. Such covers shall be identified S. The cross-sectional area of the neutral busbar shall equal that of a phase bar. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 6 of 8

T. Metering current transformers shall be installed on the incoming side. U. The equipment for each outgoing circuit shall be housed in a separate compartment so that it can be maintained without risk of contact with live connections on another circuit. V. Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the related item of switchgear, and a fuse unit fitted with a separate protective device shall be fixed within the compartment to protect the control circuit. Where control circuits pass through auxiliary contacts the protective device shall also be the means of isolation for the terminals of these contacts. W. Where the external cables to or from the switchboard are shown on the Drawings as being PVC or XLPE insulated twin and multi-core cables, armoured or unarmoured, the appropriate units of the switchboard shall be supplied with suitable glands of the correct sizes. X. All internal connections and small wiring shall be carried out using PVC insulated cables complying with BS requirements and all terminals shall be marked in accordance with BS standards. Y. All small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, using purpose-made plastic cable ties, or shall be enclosed in purpose-made plastic small wiring trunking. Wiring cleated to metal surfaces shall be spaced off the metal or otherwise insulated from it. Metallic “buckle clips' shall not be used for internal wiring. Wiring to swing doors or other moveable items shall be flexible cables neatly bunched and constrained by a flexible harness. Z. Small wiring to which external connections have to be made shall be terminated on approved type terminal boards which shall be easily accessible and conveniently arranged to facilitate the connection of incoming and outgoing multi-core cables. Each terminal unit shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no more than one wire shall be connected to any one terminal unless the terminal is specifically designed to take more than one. AA. A bonding conductor shall connect the earth bar to each gland and/or armour clamp where cables terminate at the switchgear. All equipment which is not specifically earthed separately shall be bonded to the main earth bar. BB. Each switchboard shall be equipped with the instruments, meters as shown on the Drawings. CC. Each incoming and outgoing circuit on the switchboard shall be clearly identified on the front panel by means of an engraved label bearing, in black letters on a white background. The labels shall be of plastic engraving laminate with lettering not less than 5 mm high and shall be secured to the panel front with instrument headed machine screws. Where rear access is available labels shall also be fixed to the rear panels. DD. Warning labels shall be fitted in all places where the removal of covers or access panels may expose live equipment operating at a pressure exceeding 250 V between phases or to earth. Warn- ing labels shall be of plastic engraving laminate with red lettering on a white background, and shall bear the inscription “DANGER - LIVE PARTS OVER 250 V” in letters not less than 10 mm high. EE. All equipment and apparatus, both inside and outside the switchboard, including instruments, meters, and relays, which is not clearly identified by integral labeling, shall be adequately labeled in the manner described above for front-of-panel circuit labels. FF. All fuse-switches, switch-fuses, miniature and molded case circuit-breakers, disconnectors, switch- disconnectors and distribution boards forming part of low voltage switchboards shall comply with the requirements set out in Sections 26 27 26 and 26 28 23. GG. No switch, breaker or fuse gear in switchboards will be accepted unless it has type test certification to the requirements of the relevant standard from an independent testing authority. HH. A high voltage pressure test shall be carried out with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted but having all control circuits disconnected. The panels shall withstand for one minute a voltage of 2 kV across the following points: 1. Phase to phase. 2. Phase to neutral. 3. Phase to earth. 4. Neutral to earth.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 7 of 8

II. Works tests on busbars in accordance with the requirements for routine tests shall be included. JJ. Approval of tests and test certificates that may be given shall not relieve the Sub-contractor of the obligation to supply the complete equipment in accordance with the requirements of the Specifica- tion, Schedules and Drawings. KK. MDBs shall be of 600V/1000V insulation grade and shall be designed, fabricated and assembled in compliance with form 2 of BS EN 60439-1:1994 and shall be suitable for the operation of 400/230V, 50HZ supply systems

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. The room for main LV power distribution board/switchboard shall be complete with all accessories necessary to form a complete installation including, but not limited to, the following operating and safety accessories: 1. 1 pair of insulating gloves. 2. 1 rubber mat 10 mm thick x 1000 mm wide and extending the full length of the equipment. 3. 1 notice and safety instruction chart including first aid chart for electric shock. 4. 1 set of spare control circuit fuses. 5. Any other equipment necessary to comply with the standards and maintenance/safety requirements.

2.4 Sub-Main Distribution Boards (SMDBs) Sub-main distribution boards (SMDBs) shall be installed in floor areas as shown on Drawings. They shall be floor or wall mounted cubicle type containing incoming & outgoing fixed type M.C.C.B's. Enclosure to min IP32. The boards shall be capable of withstanding without damage a fault level as shown on Drawing at 400volts. All M.C.C.B.'s shall be fixed type in all boards and shall be provided and installed as part of this Contract. SMDB shall be manufactured by a specialist manufacturer as detailed in the Schedule for cable entry from above and below. SMDBs shall be of 600V/1000V insulation grade and shall be designed, fabricated and assembled in compliance with form 2 of BS EN 60439-1:1994 and shall be suitable for the operation of 400/230V, 50HZ supply systems. Panel casing shall be fabricated using a minimum of 2mm. thick corrosion resistant galvanized steel sheets or corrosion resistant steel sheets coated with the alloy of aluminum, zinc and silicone Boards shall also be air tight, fully interlocked and factory fabricated with degree of protection min. IP32. SMDBs shall contain a suitable earth bar to which all items of equipment and cable glands are bonded. The minimum size of this earth bar shall be as per IEE Regulations. Similarly neutral bar shall be provided of the same cross section as live bars. SMDBs shall be constructed to conform with the specified requirements of the local codes, relevant British Standard and Codes of Practice. The drawings of proposed arrangements shall be forward- ed to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of manufacture. The contractor shall be responsible for checking access, builder work, to ensure that the panel is constructed and installed as required by the Local Requirement Regulations, Relevant British Standards and Code of Practice. The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of all outgoing & incoming MCCB’s in SMDBs shall be the same as that for SMDB busbar short circuit current rating as indicated on drawings. All bus bars section in the Panel shall be designed to withstand the max. fault level capacity as indicated on Drawings. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 13 (R0) September 2020 LV POWER SWITCH BOARDS Page 8 of 8

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall examine the rooms, areas and conditions under which the main or sub-main LV power distribution boards/switchboards are to be installed, and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. B. Agree with the manufacturer of the switchboards, the suitability of the Civil Works for foundations which must be compatible with equipment and all sizes and details must be checked and con- firmed before concrete is poured, or revised with the approval of the Engineer where necessary. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to supply all materials and to construct in the correct location, level and true grade, the concrete base, and to connect all incoming and outgoing cables.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation of LV power distribution boards/switchboards shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and shall comply fully with the requirements of BS, IEC, Local Standards/ Regulations and recognized industry practices. B. Install the switchboards on to bases using appropriate lifting equipment to ensure that no damage occurs. When correctly located, the unit shall be anchored in position and tested before and after connecting the incoming and outgoing cables. C. Supply all material for construction of base in correct location, level and time grade and for connection of all incoming and outgoing cables. D. Check ratings of all circuit protection devices and fill out the circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 26 01 26. B. Prior to energization of main and sub-main LV power distribution boards/switchboards, following tests shall be carried out: 1. Testing of all accessible bolted connections to manufacturer’s torque specifications. 2. Testing of insulation resistance. 3. Testing of electrical continuity / short circuits of the circuits. 4. Current injection testing of all circuit breakers and protective devices. 5. Ratio tests of all current transformers.

C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize the LV power distribution boards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with the requirements. Check whether all outgoings are connected as per load schedules. Record changes in the schedule for final as-built, if acceptable to the Engi- neer. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust circuit breakers, protective relays and other control devices to provide adequate over current protection and selective tripping with downstream devices in accordance with short circuit and protection coordination study and after proper coordination with protection settings of Electricity Supply Authority.

END OF SECTION 26 24 13

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 16 (R0) September 2020 PANELBOARDS Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Lighting and Power Panel boards including cabinet cut out boxes and enclosures. B. Related Sections 1. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls. 2. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 3. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 4. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 7. Section 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 8. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices and Disconnecting Switches. 9. Section 26 28 23 Enclosed Circuit Breakers. 10. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control gear. B. BS EN 60439-3 LV Enclosures. C. BS 5486:1989 LV Switchgear. D. BS EN 60947 Molded Case Circuit Breakers. E. IEC 898 Miniature Circuit Breakers. F. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 16 (R0) September 2020 PANELBOARDS Page 2 of 4

B. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engineer.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of panelboards and enclosures of the types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local manufacturers and agents/suppliers. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. C. Comply with the requirements of BS, IEC and Local Standards.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle Panelboards and enclosures carefully to prevent breakage, denting or scoring the finish. Store panelboards and enclosures at indoor location and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above ground and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping and protect from direct sun.

1.6 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, manufacturer/ supplier recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials specified herein shall be of high quality and of proven suitability for the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in service. B. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in Section 25 50 00. C. All panelboards , shall be of the same brand and of similar brand as that of LV Switchboards. D. All circuit breakers shall be of the same brand.

2.2 PANELBOARD CONSTRUCTION A. Lighting, power, branch circuit and distribution panelboards shall conform to BS EN 60529 , IEC 529 and BS EN 60439-3 requirements. The technical requirements showing bus size, size and number of branch circuit breakers, branch circuit loads and wiring as provided for each panel board in the Contract Documents shall be followed for guidance and panelboards shall be upgraded for actual site requirements before fabrication. B. Panel boards, cabinet boxes and enclosures shall be suitable for recessed or surface mounting as required on site. C. Interior components shall be mounted on back plate of reinforced steel for rigid support and accurate alignment. D. Provide enclosure earthing in accordance with requirements given in Section 26 05 26. E. Bus bars shall be hard drawn high conductivity copper, with silver plated contact surface. F. Finish shall be baked gray enamel with rust inhibitor. G. Provide circuit breakers in accordance with Section 26 28 23. Provide two adjacent single pole breakers to opposing polarities in such a manner that two pole breakers can be installed in any location. The same shall be provided for three adjacent single pole breakers to opposing polarities. H. Neutral and ground busbars shall be of the same rating as the phase busbar. I. A separate earthing busbar, marked with a yellow green strip along its front and bonded to the steel cabinet

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 16 (R0) September 2020 PANELBOARDS Page 3 of 4

J. Panelboard assemblies shall be so designed that any individual breaker can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as a means of obtaining clearances. K. Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, cartridge and plug time-delay type fuses, circuit breaker, earth fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. L. One 25 mm wide laminated plastic name plate shall be attached by means of stainless steel rivets or permanent adhesive, showing panelboard number in 13 mm white cut-in letters on black background. All labeling and identification shall be in accordance with section 26 05 53. M. A directory holder with clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be mounted on the inside of each door. N. Protection degree shall be a minimum of IP 31 for indoor and IP 54 for outdoor installations. O. Construction shall allow maintenance of incoming line terminations, main device connections and all main bus bolted connections to be performed without rear access.

2.3 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS A. The lighting and power panelboards shall be of the dead front type with bolt-on circuit breakers in the mains, if indicated, and branches. The panelboards shall be designed for 400/230 V as shown on the Drawings, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz application. B. The lighting and power panelboards shall be equipped with bolt-on type circuit breakers. Circuit breaker ratings shall be as shown in the panelboard schedules. C. Continuous current rating of busbars shall be as shown on panelboard schedules. D. Where shown on panel’s schedule, panelboards shall be with split busbars. E. Where a main protective device is not shown, provide disconnect switches. Bus bar and branch devices shall be of the sequence-phase type connections. F. Neutral and grounding bars shall be mounted at the opposite end of the structure from the mains and with numbered terminals for connection of neutral and grounding wires. G. Panelboards shall be provided with earth leakage protection devices as shown in panelboard schedules, and in compliance Local Electricity company codes.

2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Distribution panelboards shall be of the dead front type and shall be designed for 400/230 V, 3- phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz applications. Each distribution panel shall be enclosed in a sheet metal cabinet with front doors, catches, locks, etc. Locks shall be fitted for the same key as locks on other lighting and power branch circuit panelboards. All distribution panelboards shall meet pertinent standards. B. The distribution panelboards shall be equipped with bolt-on molded case circuit breakers. Circuit breaker ratings shall be as shown on the distribution board schedules. C. Current-carrying connections to bus shall be of the bolted type, factory assembled. Bus bars shall be of the sequence-phase type connections and arranged for 3-phase, 4-wire mains or lugs. D. Mount the neutral bar at the opposite end of the structure from the mains and with have numbered terminals for connection of neutral wires. E. Panel boards shall be provided with earth leakage protection devices as shown in panel board schedules on the drawing.

2.5 NAME PLATES A. Comply with Section 26 05 53. B. Each panelboard shall have an affixed engraved nameplate. C. Each distribution panelboard circuit breaker shall be equipped with a nameplate which indicates the name of the equipment (motor, panelboard, etc.) to which the feeder conductors are connected. Where more than one piece of equipment or panelboard is connected to the circuit this fact

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 16 (R0) September 2020 PANELBOARDS Page 4 of 4

shall be indicated on the nameplate. Apply the feeder numbers as shown on the Drawings on the switch nameplates.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards, cabinet boxes and enclosures including electrical connections, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of Local Standards/ regulations, BS and IEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. B. Co-ordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Install only in permanently dry locations, away from all mechanical and public health services. D. Anchor enclosure firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently mechanically secured. E. Check ratings of all circuit protection devices and other components according to approved material. F. Provide electrical connections within enclosures. G. Fill out panelboard's directory card upon completion of installation works.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with Section 26 01 26. B. Prior to energization of circuiting, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's torque specifications. C. Prior to energization of panelboard, check with earth resistance tester phase-to-phase and phase- to earth insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. D. Prior to energization, check panelboard for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups and testing, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with the requirements. Check whether all outgoings are connected as per panelboard schedules. Record changes in the schedules for final as-built, if acceptable to the En- gineer.

END OF SECTION 26 24 16

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 1 of 12

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. This section covers the supply, installation, testing and commissioning and put in operation all mechanical control panels (MCC’s) as indicated on drawings and according to the approved elected mechanical equipment complete with regard to power supply and control requirements. Mechanical and electrical Contractors must ensure full coordination between each other’s for proper implementation of MCC panels. B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls. 2. Section 21 05 13 Common Electrical Motors Requirements 3. Section 21 30 00 Fire Pumps. 4. Section 22 10 00 Plumbing Pumps. 5. Division 23 HVAC 6. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 7. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 8. Section 26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections. 9. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 10. Section 26 05 29 Equipment Connections and Support. 11. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 12. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices and Disconnecting Switches. 13. Section 26 28 23 Enclosed Circuit Breakers 14. Section 26 29 16 Enclosed Contactors and Starters. 15. Fire Detection and Alarm System. 16. Refer to Mechanical Specifications divisions 22 & 23 for control and sequence of operation. 17. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. IEC Standard 61439 (Part-1 & 2) or BS EN.61439-1 - Factory built assemblies low voltage switchgear and control gear. B. IEC Standard 60529 - Degrees of protection of enclosures. C. BS159 - Busbars and busbar connections. D. IEE - Regulations E. IEC 60947-1: LV Switchgear & Control Gear- General rules F. IEC 60947-2 : Low voltage switchgear and Control Gear G. IEC 60947-3 : Switches, Disconnectors, Switch- disconnectors & Fuse combination unit H. IEC 60947-4 (1 to 3 parts) : Contactors and motor starters I. IEC 60947-5 (1 to 9 parts) : Control Circuit Devices and Switching Elements

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 2 of 12

J. BS 7626 : Current transformers K. IEC 60898: Circuit breakers for over current protection for household and similar installation. L. BS 159 : Busbars and busbar connections M. BS 5685 / IEC 60051 : Electric Meters N. Notes mentioned on the Tender drawings O. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalogs and data including schematic drawings, dimensioned layout of equipment and accessories, technical specifications, installation instruction and general recommendations. Include data substantiating that the proposed units comply with the project requirements. B. Submit a dimensioned outline drawing of each MCC showing all leading dimensions and the estimated weight of the equipment. C. Submit manufacturer's fabrication, builders work and installation drawings showing all significant details of each MCC including the following: 1. All components. 2. Fuse, circuit-breaker and switch ratings. 3. Current and voltage transformer ratios, class, terminal markings and output. 4. Instruments, including scale details. 5. Relay types and characteristics. 6. Indicating lamps, including color. 7. Position of switches, and details of function. 8. All internal connections, with terminal markings. 9. Arrangement of terminal blocks. 10. Wire numbers. 11. Size, type and color of secondary wiring. 12. Principal physical dimensions, including clearances required for removing covers, opening doors, operating handles, withdrawing equipment, etc. 13. Position of all panel face equipment. 14. Identification of all equipment, and appropriate label inscriptions. 15. Foundation details, including weights and fixing points. 16. Cable entry details including gland and gland plate provisions. D. Submit list of tools, test equipment, spare parts and ancillary equipment. E. Submit the factory test reports verifying that MCCs have successfully passed all routine tests. Type tests results shall be submitted, when required by the Engineer. F. Method Statement of system installation, connection, setting, testing, operation and commissioning.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, configurations, and ratings of motor control centers and major components.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 3 of 12

Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit replacement parts list for controllers.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the MCCs of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. C. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The MCC panels shall comply with the requirements of BS, IEC B. Single Manufacturer: Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's services.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle MCCs carefully to prevent breakage, denting or scoring the finish. Store equipment at indoor location and protect from weather. When outdoor storage is necessary, elevate well above ground and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. B. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle in accordance with IEC standards. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NEMA ICS 2 service conditions during and after installation of motor control centers.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.11 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional devices of all types and ratings, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than two units of each type and rating. B. Incase three or less numbers of any device of certain rating/ size are installed, a minimum of one for each three numbers additional devices of same rating/ size shall be provided as spare.

1.12 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 4 of 12

1.13 WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate. B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The design construction material and finishes of all control panels and component parts shall be suitable for the location, climatic and operating conditions indicated in the specification and drawings. B. All power supplies to mechanical equipment shall be routed via an MCC unless otherwise as shown on drawings. C. Each MCC Panel, unless otherwise requested in section 25 50 00, shall be totally controlled by a local BMS outstation. The outstation shall be located outside the MCC Panel in a separate enclosure. Control signal interface connections between the outstation and the MCC Panels shall be brought out of the panel and terminated within an interface terminal box. All control signal wiring for sensors, actuators, heater batteries and packaged equipment shall be direct between the outstation and the devices.

2.2 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Motor control centers shall be free standing standard extendible cubicle, multi-tier, low voltage, flush fronted, in line assemblies designed for front access only. Panels shall be rigidly constructed from folded mild steel sheet of minimum thickness 2.0mm according to BS 2989 to the approval of the Engineer. B. The panels shall be constructed in compliance with FORM-2 to BS 5486: Part 1:1990, EN 60439- IEC 439-1. Unless otherwise specifically mentioned. C. MCC panel, incoming and outgoing breakers, busbars, components and accessories shall be rated to 35KA. D. Finished panels shall be without sharp edges and all exposed screws, bolts and similar fastenings shall have smooth surfaces and protectively plated. E. Panels secured to a finished floor shall be provided with a metal plinth. A metal plinth is not required if panels are mounted on a raised builders work base. In all cases, panels shall be provided with fixing holes and, in the case of large or heavy panels, detachable lifting eyes shall be provided. F. Panels shall be supplied painted internally with a semi-gloss to a RAL color as indicated or approved by the Engineer. All surfaces shall be properly prepared before final finishing. G. All doors shall be fitted with concealed hinges together with gaskets to provide dust and weather protecting to min. IP54 unless otherwise specifically mentioned. H. All access doors and covers shall be so arranged that access to panels cannot be made until an isolating device interlocked with each door or cover is opened and all equipment accessible through that door or cover is isolated. A purpose made device shall also be provided to enable a competent examiner to override the interlock when the door or cover has opened. I. Internal power wiring shall be identified by colour code in accordance with BS 6346. Control circuit and other wiring shall be coded for identification right up to the point of each cable termination using attached ferrules or other approved permanent means. Secure fixing of all cable ends shall be ensured by the use of purpose made clamps, pinch-type terminals, crimped cable tags or other approved termination devices.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 5 of 12

J. Grouped terminal blocks of adequate size and capacity shall be provided for all cables leading to equipment outside the panel. Removable covers shall be provided for the entry of incoming cables, conduits, trunking, etc. with means of effective earthing to the panel. Provisions shall be made for the earthing of all non-current carrying components of the panels. All necessary bonding shall be provided together with an earthing terminal of adequate size. K. MCB’s / MCCB’s, terminal blocks and all other items of equipment within panels shall have their functions identified by means of clearly inscribed labels attached to them, or adjacent to them. All items on the outside of panels shall be identified by means of attached white laminated plastics labels engraved in black. L. The internal and external layout of a panel shall be agreed with the Engineer before manufacture. A neat and orderly arrangement is required. Equipment shall not be fixed to any cover, which is removable for maintenance access purposes. Items of equipment fixed to a door shall be kept to a minimum and in any case shall not include heavy components or sensitive instruments.

M. All live terminals and components within any panel shall be shielded in such a manner as to prevent inadvertent contact with them. All live terminals and components mounted on panel doors shall be shrouded such that contact can only be made after removal of the shroud. N. All panels shall be provided with engraved labels identifying the panels, the indicators and the switches. The labels shall be engraved with white writing and black onto a composite plastic ‘tra- folite’ material. The labels shall be screwed and adhered to the panel. The language of the labels shall be in English. O. Control panels shall be manufactured, equipped wired and tested before delivery to site. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, a functional test simulating operation of the complete panel shall be performed and witnessed by the Engineer or his nominated representative before delivery to site. The contractor shall arrange for site commissioning of the panel to the satisfaction of the Engineer. P. The panels shall be fitted with air insulated busbars run in separate enclosures. Busbars shall run the full length of the panels. Busbars and connections shall conform to BS 159. Q. Moulded case circuit breakers and miniature circuit breakers shall be used throughout for current protection and isolation of individual circuits. These shall be adequately rated for their duty and the prospective fault rating at their point of installation. R. Control circuits shall be divided in small logical groups or sections, each being supplied through a miniature circuit breaker so that only one small group or section is affected if a circuit fault occurs. S. The panels shall be made up in standard width sections with an incoming section housing the incoming main supply cable terminations, main incoming and outgoing breakers, voltmeter, overloads, contactors, indicating lamps, selector switches, relays, current transformers, digital/electronic multi metering unit ..etc. T. A suitable control and instrument section shall be provided to accommodate relays, instruments, pressure gauges, temperature indicators, recorders and free issue equipment as specified in the mechanical specifications. U. External fixing screws, door and switch handles, handle lock barrels, push-button and indicating lamp bezels shall be chromium plated steel. V. Access doors shall be efficiently earthed to the fixed enclosure by braided copper straps and have an additional restraint to prevent damage to the hinged and painted surfaces. W. Molded case circuit breakers, isolators and overload relay resets shall be arranged for through the door operation. X. Panels shall not be bolted direct to concrete floors but to steel channels inset into the floor screed. The channels shall be supplied and fixed by the Contractor. Y. Provision shall be made for conduits, cables, instrument piping, etc., to enter at the top or bottom of the respective panels as specified. Suitable approved cable cleats shall be provided to ensure that the weight of incoming cables is not carried by the cable glands.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 6 of 12

Z. Removable eye bolts or lifting lugs to facilitate unloading and erection shall be provided together with blanking set screws. AA. Ventilation ducts shall be provided in control panels for resistance or other cooling.

2.3 INSTRUMENTS AND INDICATION A. All indication lamps, instruments and controls shall be, as far as is practicable, of the same manufacture and style to provide uniformity of appearance and facilitate maintenance. Externally visible equipment shall be flush mounted and fixed securely to the faces of control panels. Internal equipment shall be fixed to purpose-made rails or mounting bars. All fixings shall incorporate shake- proof washers or other vibration resisting fastenings.

B. An ammeter with phase selector switch shall be supplied with each MCC PANEL. The ammeter shall have a scale not less than 70mm in length and shall indicate maximum operating current at not less than 75% of total scale length.

C. Indicator lights shall be capable of functioning with selector switches in any position i.e., 'ON', ‘HAND’ or 'AUTOMATIC'.

2.4 STARTERS AND CONTROL GEAR A. Starters shall comply with BS 587 or BS4941 or similar standard as applicable. The 'rated duty' shall be 'intermittent' and the intermittent duty class of the standard shall be appropriate to their operating conditions. B. One types of starters must be provided to all mechanical equipments/motors as listed under section 26 29 16 - Enclosed Starters and Contactors and MCC panel schedules: C. For starters incorporating reduced voltage starting the change over in voltage shall be automatic. D. Starters shall be provided on each phase with combined thermal overload devices and single phasing protection, with adjustable time lag, and an under-voltage release. Contactor operating coils DC or rectified AC operation. Where a contactor is arranged for remote operation the coil circuit shall be protected by MCB. E. Where duplicate plant is provided the starters for each plant shall be housed in a separate compartment of the panel. Where more than one refrigeration compressor is provided the compressor motor starters shall be housed in separate cubicles. Each stand-by (installed spare) electric motor shall be provided with its own control gear and starting equipment and be connected to a separate final sub-circuit. F. Power supplies for equipment controlled by direct link between the outstation and the device shall be protected by MCB or MCCB as appropriate.

2.5 COMPONENT Each motor control center shall include:- Equipment Starters Isolating switches & circuit breakers Interposing relays Digital multi metering unit Kilowatt hour meters Digital Hour & Day Clocks

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 7 of 12

Digital hours run meters Bus bars Terminals Interconnecting power & control wiring & cabling Auxiliary contacts Transformers

Protections for earth leakage, phase failure, phase reversal, under and over voltages and excess current Push buttons and indicating lamps, selector switches. The above shall be flush mounting & shall not be mounted at a height greater than 1800mm or less than 450mm from finished floor level. Where push buttons, lamps, meters and switches are mounted on access doors, their terminals shall be screened to prevent accidental contact. Excess current protection and isolation of each motor circuit shall be made using a moulded case circuit breaker. Excess current protection of control circuits or sections of control circuits shall be made using miniature circuit breakers. Cubicle isolators or moulded case circuit breakers shall be capable of breaking the installed motor current & shall be mechanically interlocked with the cubicle door. The contacts and live terminals shall be shielded. The isolator or moulded case circuit breaker shall be rated for the full load motor current, taking into account any de-rating factors which may apply. Each control circuit shall be powered by a separate supply protected by a miniature circuit breakers. Where a control panel is interconnected with another control panel or item of electrical equipment, interposing relays shall be provided in each control panel or item of equipment to provide complete isolation between the two sources of electrical supply. These relays shall be mounted in an enclosure, which must be removed to gain access to them. The control panel or item of equipment's main supply isolator shall also be equipped with a sufficient number of auxiliary contacts to isolate all interconnecting wiring. When this is not possible, a multi-pole isolating switch shall be provided adjacent to the relays. A warning notice shall be installed on the relay unit engraved "DANGER. SEVERAL ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES PRESENT DO NOT INTERCONNECT". Test facilities shall be provided at the starter cubicle such that the control voltage is maintained but the mains supply to the motor is isolated. There shall be a mechanical interlock to prevent the mains voltage being applied whilst the starter cubicle is in the "Test' position. Starters and contactors shall be compatible with the motors and motor duties as supplied by the manufacturers of the Mechanical Equipment Individual drive reference labels are to be provided on the front door of each starter/ feeder. All controls shall be clearly labeled. Labels shall be engraved on white/black/white Traffolyte. All cabling, circuit breakers, moulded case circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers and all marking and labeling shall be as described in the General Requirements unless otherwise described elsewhere in this Specification. Unless otherwise described, metering solid state equipment and precautions concerning access to dangerous voltage shall be as described in the General Requirements. Timers shall be as described in the Particular Requirements and shall be variable solid state. All equipment shall be suitable for the required application and supply voltage. Contactors shall comply with BS 5424: Part 1 and be mounted in an enclosure complying with BS 5490 classification IP 32 for use indoors and IP 54 with corrosion-resistant finish for use outdoors. Contactors shall be utilization category AC3 of Table 2, BS 5424, unless otherwise described elsewhere in this Specification.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 8 of 12

Contactors shall be duty rated as specified or where not so described then the appropriate rating shall be determined from the duty or function of the equipment and to the approval of the Consult- ant.

Where contactors are used in conjunction with earth fault relays, the contactor shall be rated to break the full earth fault current or other measures shall be taken to ensure that the fault current is safely interrupted. MCCs shall be provided with earth leakage protection devices as shown in MCC panel schedules, and in compliance with Local Electricity company codes.

2.6 PUSH BUTTONS AND SWITCHES Push buttons and indicating lamps shall be of matching design arranged for single hole fixing and of small body size to allow close grouping. Terminals shall be of the screw clamp type having minimum screw size of 4 mm. Start and stop push buttons shall be of the shrouded type. Emergency stop push buttons shall be of the mushroom push type with stop/lock action. All push buttons for use outdoors shall be protected to IP 65. Indicating lamps shall be of the step down transformer push to test type having 10 volt secondary and 12 volt bulbs to give long bulb life. They shall be arranged so that the bulb may be replaced from the front and shall have shallow bezels, which incorporate plastic lenses of the specified colour. When key switches are specified to match the push buttons and indicating lamps, duplicate keys shall be provided. Engraved legend plates shall be fitted with all push buttons, indicating lamps and switches. The minimum character height shall be 3 mm. Selector switches shall be positive action rotary cam switches, which shall incorporate double break contacts. They shall be of modular construction and suitable for extension to twelve cells. It shall be possible to arrange the switches for four, six or eight positions and operation shall be in either direction. Selector switch contacts shall be double break and of hard silver alloy. They shall have a minimum continuous current rating of 10 amps and be of high breaking capacity. Connections shall be by large terminals with clamp screws of minimum size 5 mm. Operating knobs shall be of the type, which positively indicates the position of the switch. The switch positions shall be clearly marked. Where required for remote automatic operation the 'Local/Off/Remote' control switch shall be arranged such that in the 'local position the respective drive shall be controlled from the cubicle. A suitable selector switch or flush mounting board shall be provided to enable the motor drive duties to be interchanged where specified for Duty/Standby operation. Drive shafts and operating knobs shall not be of round section.

2.7 TERMINALS Terminals for incoming and outgoing power connections shall be of the bolted type using brass nuts with additional locknuts and shall be provided with cable lugs or clamp washers as required. Partitions shall be provided between phase terminals and protection covers shall be fitted over incoming connections. Each terminal shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the terminal designation and shall conform to the 'As Fitted' drawings.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 9 of 12

All incoming and outgoing terminals shall be horizontal rows at least 200 mm from the cubicle base/top dependent on the cable entry. Provision shall be made for the support of cables between the gland plate and control panel terminals.

2.8 WIRING Panels wiring shall be carried out in 600 volt grade PVC insulated cables having multi-strand copper conductors of not less than 2.5 mm2 cross section terminated by crimp type lugs, tags or pins. Panels wiring shall be run in neat looms and shall be installed vertically and horizontally and not diagonally across any framing. Where practicable cable looms shall be installed in PVC trunking. Wiring shall be provided with colour coded . 2.9 TRANSFORMERS The primary input shall be 230/400V 50Hz controlled from a way of the distribution board. The secondary outputs shall be 110 volt & 24 volt protected by two fuses in each circuit & shall be centre point earthed. Terminals for both input & output cabling shall be provided. The transformer shall be located within its own compartment of the control board. The control circuit of the motor starters, remote and local control circuits etc. shall be supplied at 230 volts from a continuously rated, wound transformer with metallic earthed screen between the primary and secondary windings. A separate control circuit cubicle shall be provided within the control board housing the transformer and associated control gear. The transformer shall comply with BS 3535 and be capable of controlling the whole of the board, and rated to 125% of the initial load as a minimum requirement. A removable earth link shall connect the earth side of the transformer to the earth side of the control circuit. The earth side of the control circuit shall be wired with PVC insulated cable with all earth connections brought back to the control circuit earth terminal.

2.10 STARTER EQUIPMENT Each starter shall comply with BS 4941 having Type C co-ordination and be complete with the following: 1 set of busbars and/or dropper bars of similar ratings to the incoming protection.

1 moulded case circuit breaker of suitable rating interlocked with the door for isolation and excess current protection.

1 set of contactors with auxiliary contacts, timing devices, interlocks etc. suitable for a minimum of 15 starts per hour.

1 overload and single phase protection device as specified.

1 spare contact set of one normally open and one normally closed contact to be provided per starter.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 10 of 12

1 test switch to allow operation of contactors, relays etc., without energizing the main circuits.

1 thermal overload device to protect the rotor /stator winding, where applicable.

1 indicator light to show motor has tripped for any reason.

1 indicator light to show motor running.

1 indicator light to show test facility has been selected.

1 set of 'START'/ 'STOP' - push buttons.

1 HAND/OFF + AUTO/OFF selector switch.

1 LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch where specified.

1 230V anti-condensation heater with thermostat, hand control switch, & also auxiliary contacts to isolate the panel heater & corresponding motor heater when running.

1 set of terminals.

1 set of starting equipment as specified.

1 suitable engraved duty label.

1 KWH meter where specified.

1 thermostat relay where specified

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATION A. Panels shall be provided in the approximate positions shown on the drawings. Final position to be agreed by the Engineer. Care shall be taken to ensure that all panel access doors can open fully and that a minimum space of 1100mm is kept clear in front of each panel.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All electrical/mechanical equipment materials shall be installed securely in place. Equipment shall be mounted parallel and perpendicular to the walls, floors, and ceilings.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 11 of 12

B. All anchors and fasteners shall be types designed for the intended purpose and shall be capable of adequately, safely, and permanently securing the material in place. Generally, screws shall be used on wood surfaces, masonry anchors in concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow walls, machine screws, bolts, or welded studs on steel. Nails shall be used only for temporary attachment or support. C. Omissions or conflicts on Drawings or between Drawings and Specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for clarification before proceeding with the Work. D. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions throughout the Site to receive the Work as construction progresses and shall provide adequate backing, supports, inserts, and anchor bolts for the hanging and support of all electromechanichal equipments, conduit, switches,wiring, …etc and shall provide and install sleeves through walls, floors, or foundations where electrical lines are required to penetrate. E. Install motor control centres in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing motor control centre. G. Install fuses in fusible switches. H. Select and install heater elements in motor starters controlled by ‘Off/Auto’ switches and humidi- stat to match specified humidity range. I. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53. J. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 26 01 26. B. Prior to energization of MCCs, following tests shall be carried out:

1. Testing of all accessible bolted connections to manufacturer’s torque specifications. 2. Testing of insulation resistance. 3. Testing of electrical continuity / short circuits of the circuits. 4. Current injection testing of all circuit breakers and protective devices. 5. Ratio tests of all current transformers. C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize the MCCs and demonstrate functioning in accordance with the requirements. Check whether all outgoings are connected as per load schedules. Record changes in the schedule for final as-built, if acceptable to the Engineer. D. Verify that all starters, controls … etc are as per mechanical requirements.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION Complete identification as detailed in Section 26 05 53.

3.5 EXECUTION OF TESTS ON SITE Conduct tests in accordance with the requirements of BS.EN-60439-1, and IEE Regulations. A. Insulation resistance tests. B. Circuit continuity tests. C. Check of proper working of locks. D. Check proper working of controls, start-up and stop of circuit breaking appliances. E. Phase rotation tests.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 24 19 (R0) September 2020 Motor Control Center Page 12 of 12

F. Check of protection relays and protection circuits by injection of current or voltage into the transformer primary or secondary. G. Test of operation of signalling. H. Test of operation of any automation. I. Test of direction of rotation of all motors. J. Test all starters for performance of functions as required by the contract.

END OF SECTION 26 24 19

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 27 26 (R0) September 2020 Wiring devices and disconnecting switches Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1. SUMMARY A. Section Includes Wiring Devices used as accessories for the Electrical Installations including, but not limited to the following:-  Indoor lighting switches.  Outdoor lighting switches.  Socket outlets.  Industrial socket outlets.  Cooker connection units (Not Applicable)  Isolators.  Spur or fused connection units.  Outlets for low current systems.  Guest Room Controller.

B. Related Sections and Documents 1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 3. Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 4. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 29 Equipment Connection and Supports. 6. Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 8. Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 9. Section 27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling. 10. Section 27 05 23 Television Services. 11. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

2. REFERENCES

A. BS EN 60669 Part 1: 2000 Switches for Domestic and Other Purposes B. BS 1363: 1995 13A Fused Plugs Switched and Unswitched Socket Outlets and Boxes C. BS EN 60670-22: 2006 General Requirements for Electrical Accessories D. BS EN 60947-3: Low voltage switchgear and control gear. Switches, disconnectors, switch- disconnectors and fuse- combination units. E. BS 546: Two Pole and Earthing Pin Plugs, Socket Outlets. F. BS 6972 & BS 5733: Ceiling Roses G. BS EN 60529:1992 H. Requirements of local electricity company Regulations.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 27 26 (R0) September 2020 Wiring devices and disconnecting switches Page 2 of 7

I. Requirements For Electrical Installations, (Iee 17th Wiring Regulations) With All Current Additions And Amendments where do not contradict with local Regulations. J. DIN 49440/49441 K. Local Codes, Standards And Regulations.

3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating to the wiring devices proposed, which shall include, but not limited to, the following:

1. Name of the manufacturer. 2. Country of origin. 3. Name and address of agents stating whether any manufacturing or fabrication. 4. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period. 5. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 6. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. 7. Delivery time from the date of orders. 8. Copies of test reports or certificates. 9. Control schematics and wiring diagrams.

B. Provide samples of proposed wiring devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engineer. C. Method Statement for system installation, wiring, testing, operation and commissioning.

4. QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices of types and ratings required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation and experience on projects with Wiring Devices similar to that required for this project.

5. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wiring devices shall comply with the applicable standards of Local Standards Organization and BS. Power outlets shall comply with CEE 7/4, DIN 49440/49441 B. Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of wiring devices to the building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

6. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All wiring devices shall be delivered in factory pack wrapping and boxes and stored in a clean, dry space within the racks.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 27 26 (R0) September 2020 Wiring devices and disconnecting switches Page 3 of 7

7. MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 24 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of defective items, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

8. WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor or the manufacturer for the period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the engineer except where any specific warranty from a supplier or manufacturer extends for a longer time.

9. TRAINING A. Contractor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Lighting switches shall conform to B.S 3676 Part 1: 1989 & EN 60669-1. B. For single and multi-gang units in general locations where installation work is concealed, light switches shall be of the British standard type C. Switch plates, socket-outlet plates and similar items shall be of white plastic type for recessed installations and to the approval of the Engineer D. Switches shall comply with reference standards and where switches are mounted adjacent one to another, they shall be grouped in a single enclosure and share a common switch plate. E. Plugs from the same manufacturer as that of the socket outlets shall be provided with all types of socket-outlets, and handed over to the Engineer. F. All the materials used in the manufacture and installation of disconnect switches, push button stations, isolators and mains power isolation shall be of high quality and of proven suitability for the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in service. Each of these items shall be the product, manufacture and assembly of one manufacturer only. G. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in Section 25 50 00. H. For switches and receptacles, metal boxes shall be used, which shall be connected to earth continuity conductor of the circuit. I. Grid switches shall be equipped with phase barriers where different phases are connected to the grid switch.

2.2 WIRING DEVICES FINISHING A. Refer to Interior Design finishes for all front of house and public areas.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 27 26 (R0) September 2020 Wiring devices and disconnecting switches Page 4 of 7

B. White PVC molded finish - flush mounted for recessed mounting.

C. Steel cover plate, zinc phosphate and polyester coated finish for surface installation in plant rooms.

D. Impact resistant, weatherproof accessories with polycarbonate housing and IP56 protection rating for wet or external areas.

E. All devices of one particular type shall be of the same range from a single manufacturer.

2.3 Indoor LIGHTING SWITCHES

A. Lighting switches shall conform to B.S3676 Part 1: 1989 & EN 60669-1. B. Lighting switches for interior use, shall be heavy duty, AC, single or double pole, minimum 10A with number of ways as shown on the Drawings and mounted on adjustable grid enclosed in metal box. The switches shall be of the quick make, slow break type and shall be capable of switching 100 % rated load of the types shown on the Drawings. C. Where switches are to be flush type they shall be supplied with overlapping cover plates finished flush with the sides of the metal box.

2.4 OUTDOOR LIGHTING SWITCHES A. All outdoor lighting switches shall have the characteristics as described above for indoor lighting switches, but be complete with a gasket forming splash proof and dustproof enclosures. B. Waterproof switches and enclosure shall comply with BS 3676: Part 1:1989 and protected to IP56 according to BS EN 60529:1992, construction of enclosures shall be from extremely robust polycarbonate sailed against dust & water & impact resistant C. A suitable drain hole shall be provided.

2.5 13 AMPERE SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS A. 13 Amperes, 230 Volts, switch socket outlets shall be provided for the connection of portable electrical appliances.. They shall be switched, flat pin pattern to B.S1363: Part 2-1995, accepting 3 pin fused plugs. B. Generally socket outlet face plate shall be finished in white similar to the lighting switches. Socket outlets shall be mounted in flush metal box. Where surface mounted socket outlets are required, they shall be similar to that of the flush pattern, mounted on suitable adapter boxes. C. Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with push-on cap retaining ring without switch. D. All surface mounted socket outlets shall be provided with a 13 A unbreakable plug top complete with fuse. Each twin socket shall be counted as two socket outlets. E. Socket outlets connected to UPS shall be discriminated by graving or color marked.

2.6 INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS

A. Industrial socket outlets shall be single or multi-phase, of the types and ratings as indicated on the Drawings and schedules. B. Socket outlets shall have an enclosure of IP44 or IP67, integrated with switch or without it, as shown on the Drawings and required on site.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 27 26 (R0) September 2020 Wiring devices and disconnecting switches Page 5 of 7

C. Single phase socket outlets shall be with two poles and grounding pin and three phase socket outlets shall be with three poles and grounding pin, with or without neutral pin, as shown on the Draw- ings and required on site. D. The industrial socket outlets shall be designed so that the grounding pole is permanently connected to the housing. The grounding pole shall make contact before the line poles are engaged, when the plug is inserted into the socket. E. The plug sleeve shall also make contact with the housing of socket outlet, before the line and load poles make contact. F. The industrial socket outlets shall include cast back box, angle adapter, gaskets and a screw type gasketted watertight cap with chain fastener. G. Each industrial socket outlet shall be provided with plug from the same manufacturer as that of the socket outlet.

2.7 ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSE UNITS

A. The isolators and switch fuse units for small power applications shall be of the double pole or three poles, single throw type, complying with the requirements of BS and other standards mentioned elsewhere in the Specifications. B. Finishes of all isolators and switch fuse units shall be either of white plastic for flush mounted installations or rust proof metal for surface mounted installations or as directed by the Engineer on site. C. These wiring devices shall be used for the isolation of single phase, two phase and three phase items of fixed equipment fed by an individual circuit. D. Types of equipment fed through these wiring devices are described elsewhere in the Specification and on the Drawings. E. All fuses in the switch fuse units shall be of HRC type, as described in Section 26 28 23.

2.8 SPUR OR FUSED CONNECTION UNITS A. Spur or fused connection units shall be one complete unit combining a double pole switch, and a pilot light for confirmation that the unit is turned on. B. The current and voltage rating of the spur or fused connection units shall be in accordance with the power requirements of the equipment to be fed. C. All surface mounted spur units, with the exception of those to be installed in services and plant rooms, shall be mounted on metal or plastic purpose-made mounting boxes of the same material as that of the front plates.

2.9 OUTLETS FOR LOW CURRENT SYSTEMS

A. The outlets for all low current systems such as telephone, data, IP TV, etc. shall conform to the requirements given in respective sections of low current systems contained elsewhere in these Specifications. B. The cover or face plates of the outlets for all low current systems shall be of similar style and finish to that specified for the associated lighting switches and socket outlets and shall be suitable for mounting recessed or surface as required on site.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 27 26 (R0) September 2020 Wiring devices and disconnecting switches Page 6 of 7

2.10 CEILING ROSE Ceiling roses shall be of approved manufacture and finished as switches confirming to BS 67:1987 and BS 4568 Part 2. Ceiling roses shall be of the plug in type with 4 terminals (L, N, Loop-In & E). Ceiling rose shall be of the funnel shaped cable entry. Heat resistant PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cable shall be provided to BS 6141:1981.

2.11 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Disconnect Switches shall be surface mounted, heavy duty type, sheet steel enclosed of the types, sizes and electrical characteristics suitable for the intended applications of motor, circuit or equipment disconnections as shown on the Drawings, Schedules and elsewhere in the Specifications. B. The general duty type disconnect switches shall be rated for 230/400 Volts, 50 Hertz with 2/3 - blades, 2/3 poles, incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break type switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. C. All outdoor disconnect switches shall be weatherproof, stainless steel enclosures suitable for wet and damp locations, and rust and dust-proof. These shall have appropriate heat resistant gasket to provide protection against dust and water.

2.13 ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSE UNITS A. The isolators and switch fuse units for small power applications shall be either of white plastic or rust proof metal.

2.14 PUSH BUTTON STATIONS A. All push buttons shall be made of non-hygroscopic materials, non-swelling and fitted to avoid any possibility of sticking. Non-retaining type shall generally be used except for emergency stop push buttons which shall stay down when operated and be fitted with mushroom type heads. B. Contacts of all push buttons shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when operated. C. All push button stations shall be provided with labels. D. All push button stations in outdoor or wet locations shall be within weatherproof enclosure with appropriate heat and weather resistant gasket.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. B. Coordinate the exact location and mounting heights of all wiring devices with architectural, interior design and equipment layouts, location of doors, loose and fixed furniture, equipment and accessories, other services, piping, etc. Any discrepancy between electrical drawings and other disciplines/details shall be brought to the attention of Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of Local Standards, IEE Wiring Regulations and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve their intended function. B. Program installation of devices after wiring is completed and tested for satisfactory insulation resistance.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 27 26 (R0) September 2020 Wiring devices and disconnecting switches Page 7 of 7

C. Install devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from any external building materials, debris, etc. D. In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile or other non-combustible material, boxes and fittings install boxes and fittings so that the front edge of the box or fitting will not be set back from the finished surface more than 5 mm. In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other combustible material, outlet boxes and fittings shall be flush with the finished surface or project there from. E. Plaster surfaces around the back boxes of the wiring devices that are broken or incomplete, shall be repaired so that there will be no gaps or open spaces at the edge of the box or fittings. F. In making an exposed surface extension from an existing outlet of concealed wiring, a box or an extension ring shall be mounted over the original box and electrically & mechanically secured to it. G. All wiring devices shall be fixed independently of the system of wiring. All fixing screws or bolts shall be of steel and where the appropriate apparatus has a protective coating of zinc or is mounted outside, an electro-galvanized finish shall be used complying with relevant standards and codes of practice. H. Install switches on the lock side of the door with 20cm distance to the centre of the first plate from the outer edge of the door frame. I. Distance between two adjacent plates shall be 20mm. J. Provide partitioned mounting boxes where switches from more than one final sub-circuit are installed in one box. Install switches at one location using multi-gang plates only. Install switches from different distribution boards in separate boxes. K. Obtain drawings showing interior details and finishes, make necessary adjustment to the work so that the outlets shall be properly centered. L. Install manufacturer supplied blanking plate of the same finish and type for each empty box/draw box. M. All metallic cover plates shall be earthed. N. Install outlet plates with a maximum alignment tolerance of 1.5mm between adjacent outlets. O. Comply with Acoustic specialist requirements regarding wiring devices installations in adjacent rooms and regarding walls penetrations. P. Test all wiring devices in accordance with the requirements of IEE regulations. Under no circumstances are the devices to be connected to main power until the tests are completed and approved by the Engineer. 23.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Check operation of all switches and wiring devices with power supply connected. B. Check polarity of all the outlets and receptacles with polarity tester.

END OF SECTION 26 27 26

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 28 23 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1. 1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes LV Protective Devices installed in LV switchgears, power distribution boards, panel boards, motor control centers, control panels including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Air circuit breakers. 2. Molded case circuit breakers. 3. Miniature circuit breakers. 4. Residual current circuit breakers. B. Related Sections and Documents 1. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls. 2. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 3. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 4. Section 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 24 13 LV Power Switch Boards. 6. Section 26 24 16 Panelboards. 7. Section 26 24 19 Motor Control Centers. 8. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. IEC 60947-1: LV Switchgear & Control Gear – General rules

B. IEC 60947-2: Circuit breakers

C. IEC 60898: Circuit breakers for over current protection (MCB)

D. IEC 601008: Residual Current Operated Circuit breakers without integral over current protection (RCCB)

E. IEC 601009: Residual Current Operated Circuit breakers with integral over current protection (RCBO)

F. IEC 60755: General requirements for residual current operated devices.

G. I EC 60947-3: Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors & Fuse combination unit

H. IEC 60947-4 (1 to 3 parts : Contactors and motor starters

I. IEC 60947- 5 (1 to 9 parts): Control circuit devices and Switching elements

J. IEC 60947- 6 (1 to 2 parts : Multiple function equipment –Transfer Switching, Control & protective switching devices

K. IEC 60947- 7 (1 to 3parts) Ancillary Equipments – terminal Blocks

L. IEC 60051 (1 to 9 parts) Direct Acting Indicating Analog Electrical Measuring Instrument & their accessories

M. IEC 60127 (1 to 6 Parts) :Miniature Fuses Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 28 23 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 2 of 7

N. IEC 60127: Specification for Cartridge Fuses for A.C circuit in Domestic and similar Premises.

O. IEC 60269 (Part 1 to 4), BS 88 : Specification for Cartridge Fuses for voltage up.

P. IEC I57 Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)

Q. BS EN 60947 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

R. Local Electricity Company Regulations

S. Notes mentioned on the Tender drawings

T. Local Codes and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating which shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Name of the manufacturer. 2. Country of origin. 3. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period. 4. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 5. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. 6. Delivery time from the date of orders. 7. Copies of test reports or certificates. 8. Control schematics and wiring diagrams. B. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engineer. C. Submit factory test reports verifying that all the LV protective devices have successfully passed all routine and type tests. D. Submit Method Statement.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and continuous current ratings of enclosed circuit breakers.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specialized in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Products shall be type tested by one of these internationally recognized testing laboratories as per BS or IEC standard. C. All components for the project shall be offered from one manufacturer to ensure proper protection co-ordinations and easy substitution.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All LV protective devices to be tested and conform to the requirements of BS, IEC and Local Standards Organization.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 28 23 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 3 of 7

1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor or the manufacturer for the period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the engineer except where any specific warranty from a supplier or manufacturer extends for a longer time.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Contract: Obtain an undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and his authorized local representative to provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial completion of the work, covering routine service and emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply of necessary standard spare parts.

1.9 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 92 00 – Closeout Procedures.

C. Furnish two percent of MCCBs of each frame size with minimum of two nos, two percent of MCBs of each rating, one of each Soft starter and one ACB of 2500A rating.

D. Provide two percent spare of current operated ELCB of each size.

E. Provide five percent spare of HRC fuses for each rating.

F. Provide one set of each type of metering CTs, Transducers, Voltmeters, Ammeters, Frequency meters, protection relays, etc 1.10 TRAINING

2.2 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. The Air Circuit Breakers (ACB) shall be fully withdrawable type designed to comply with BS.4752 and/or IEC I57, and have a short circuit level for 65 KA at 1 Sec. B. The air circuit breakers shall be withdrawable type with current monitor and solid state sensor for phase and earth sensing protection. The static sensor shall have adjustable settings for each of the following tripping characteristics:- 1. Long - delay pick up point. 2. Long - delay tripping time. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 28 23 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 4 of 7

3. Short - delay pick up point (Instantaneous protection). 4. Earth point pick up. 5. Earth tripping time. C. Extra facilities are required such as shunt trips, undervoltage release, auxiliary switches, self indications monitor, load monitoring, measurement of phase currents, maximum current and fault currents. D. The Air Circuit Breaker shall be designed as a completely self contained cassetted unit which can be mounted in an LV panel compartment without additional screening. Safe access for routine maintenance shall be provided by lockable automatic safety shutters within the cassette. E. A motorized operating mechanism shall be provided of the trip free type to enable the facility of slow closing to allow checking of operation and adjustment. F. The A.C.B's must have the following 3 distinct positions (draw out version) 1. Fully inserted position. 2. Test position. 3. Isolated position. G. A front operated racking mechanism shall withdraw the ACB. The racking mechanism is still engaged in the isolated position, which allows testing of control circuits. Further racking releases the ACB and the breaker can be withdrawn for inspection. A flag indicator will show the breaker position. H. ACB shall come with a transparent hinged and secured cover (IP54).

I. Mechanical Interlocks shall prevent the following: 1. The ACB being isolated unless it is in the off position. 2. The ACB being racked into the service position unless it is in the off position. 3. The ACB being accidentally pulled off the guide rail. 4. The ACB being slow closed in the service position. 5. Access to the racking mechanism unless the ACB is in the off position. J. Each Air Circuit Breaker shall incorporate a microprocessor based sensing protection/information unit. The unit shall be adjustable for long time delay, short time delay, instantaneous trip and earth fault. K. The microprocessor unit shall have a high resolution screen display, which shall be capable of showing the following functions of the unit:- 1. Measurements of V, A, W, VAR, VA, Wh, VARh, VAh Hz, Vpeak, Apeak, power factor and maximeters and minimeters. 2. Long time protection, minimum and maximum voltage and frequency, voltage and current imbalance, phase sequence, reverse power. 3. Load shedding and reconnection depending on power or current 4. Measurements of interrupted currents, differentiated fault indications, maintenance indications, event histories and time-stamping etc. 5. Power quality: fundamentals, distortion, amplitude & phase of harmonics up to the 6th order. 6. Waveform capture after fault, alarm or on request 7. Enhanced alarm programming: thresholds and actions

2.3 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded case circuit breakers (MCCB’s) shall comply with BS EN 60947-1 & 2:1992. They shall be of the quick-make, quick-break, trip-free, thermal magnetic adjustable releases for rating lower than Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 28 23 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 5 of 7

160A, and with solid state trip units for rating 160A an above. Breakers shall be complete with De- ion arc grids, alloys contacts and inter-pole contacts. All units shall incorporate a visual indication of open or closed contacts. B. Extra facilities may be required, such as shunt trips, under-voltage release, auxiliary switches, remote indications or tripping, residual current protection or special calibrations. Such extra facilities shall be specified elsewhere in this Specification or as shown on the Drawings. C. The short circuit interrupting capacity of all MCCB’s in any panelboards; SMDB, MCC, power distribution board/switchboard, control panel, etc. shall not be less than the max. short circuit rating of the main busbars, as shown on the Drawings and Schedules.

2.4 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB’s) A. Miniature circuit breakers (MCB’s) shall be plastic molded units incorporating thermal magnetic protection against overloads and short circuits comply with IEC/BS Standards. The tripping mechanism shall be designed to provide delays operation on overload and instantaneous operation under fault condition. Breakers shall have positive ON/OFF indication, be "trip free" and shall trip to the full off position under overload and/or short circuits. Triple pole units shall be used for three phase circuits. All multiple breakers shall have an integral common trip bar as standard. B. MCBs shall be able to withstand 10KA short circuit rupturing capacity. C. Where the fault level of the system is such that the use of MCB’s is not acceptable, then molded case circuit breakers (MCCB’s) as specified elsewhere shall be utilized.

2.5 EARTH FAULT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Earth Fault Relays 1. Used in conjunction with shunt trip of MCB or MCCB. 2. Relay shall comply with IEC 60255 & IEC 60755 and will be site adjustable for current sensitivity and time delay. 3. Shall be Solid state type, self protected from high magnitude earth faults and protected against dirt, vibration and moisture. 4. Adjustable sensibility from 0.03A to 30A as shown on drawings. The relay shall have time delay from instantaneous to 5 seconds (minimum 1 second). 5. Relay shall be equipped with one changeover output contact. The continuity of the measurement circuit shall be monitored to ensure that the toroid circuit is not open. 6. Shall be compact in size and suitable for mounting on symmetrical rail horizontally or vertically. Shall be protected against nuisance tripping caused switching surges or by lighting surges. B. Circuit Sensors (Toroids) 1. Circular toroid for cables and rectangular toroid for bus ducts. 2. Provide with cable guides to ensure that feeder cable is centred within the toroid. C. Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB). 1. RCCB shall comply with BS EN 61008, IEC 61008 standards. 2. Differential current operated electro-mechanical release which operates to open the circuit at preset threshold current to a leakage current between active conductors and earth, without auxiliary source of supply. 3. Provide in 2 or 4 pole versions with rated current 16A to 100A with sensitivity as shown on drawings as follows ; a. 10mA - for under water lighting.

b. 30mA - for all socket outlets and domestic apparatus

c. 300mA - for lighting circuits & all other apparatus equipments Such as A/C plants, lifts, pumps, etc. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 28 23 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 6 of 7

4. Operating temperature from -5oC to +60oC. 5. Shall provide time discrimination with higher trip rating breakers. 6. The RCCB shall consist of a current transformer, a tripping coil with contact assembly, Main supply contact, ON/OFF switch, trip free mechanism, test button and clear trip indication. 7. Shall have a short circuit withstanding capacity of 10KA. RCCB must be protected with short circuit protection devices installed upstream. 8. Shall incorporate a filtering device preventing the risk of unwanted tripping due transient voltage. They shall provide a high degree of protection against earth fault, fire hazards and electric shocks. D. Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload (RCBO) 1. RCBO shall comply with IEC 1009, BS EN 61009. 2. RCBO shall have 6KA breaking capacity as a minimum with sensitivity as follows: a. 10mA - for under water lighting,

b. 30mA - for all socket outlets and domestic apparatus

c. 300mA - for lighting circuits and all other apparatus equipments Such as A/C plants, lifts, pumps, etc.

3. Test push button shall be incorporated to verify breaker operation.

2.6 HRC Fuses

A. Fuses shall be HRC Class Q1 to BS 88, Part 2 or IEC-60269 Part 1 and 2. B. HRC fuses shall be ASTA certified.

2.7 Connections

A. Connection to starter sections above 100A shall be with bus bars. PVC insulated cables may be used for lesser currents. 2.8 Metering

A. Meters 1. Provide digital totalizing type, voltage, current, frequency, power factor, kVA, kW and accumulating total of MWHR and kW. 2. Provide digital meters on all main incoming breakers. 3. Provide line drivers for remote sensing on the BMS. Coordinate with BMS supplies. 4. Moving iron type meters with jewel bearing, spring loaded and silicone oil damper. Accuracy Class 1.5 to DIN 43780. 5. Case of glass filled polycarbonate with dimensions of 72 x 72mm for branch circuits and wall mounted panels and 96mm x 96mm for free standing panels. Non reflective glass window. 6. Overload limit in accordance with DIN 43780. 7. Life time test: 150,000 full scale deflections with 1 sec ON after steady state and 4 sec. OFF. 8. Rated insulation voltage: 1 000V. 9. Measuring range: a. Voltmeter - 0 - 600 V Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 28 23 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 7 of 7

b. Ammeter - within +25% of the maximum current expected the circuit. 10. Ammeter connected to feeder line of switchboards shall have an additional maximum demand indicator. 11. Provide ammeter and voltmeter with selector switch for each motor and heater loads although not shown on the drawings. 12. Provide with current transformers where required.

2.9 EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS WITH SEPARATE SENSOR

A. Relays complying with IEC 60755 and of solid state type protected from nuisance trippin g caused by surges. Provide with sensitivity adjustment in steps from 0.03A and step time a d- justment from instantaneous to 1 second. Torroidal transformers are to be of suitable diam e- ter to fit on the cables.

B. Provide earth leakage relays for all circuits connected to shunt trip of breakers or with audio visual alarm as shown on drawings. The common alarm horn shall be flush mounted on panel face with a separate lamp for each relay. Provide with wiring terminated on suitable terminal blocks for remote indication of alarms.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure compliance with BS, IEC and Local Standards and Regulations. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work as necessary to interface installation of protective devices with other work. C. Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports or cable. D. Set field-adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated, subsequent to installation of devices. E. Install fuses, if any, in fused circuit breakers. F. Inspect circuit-breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 26 01 26. B. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and current injection for trip tests. Correct malfunctioning units and then demonstrate compliance with the requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 28 23

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 29 16 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND STARTERS Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Enclosed Starters and Contactors including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Manual starters 2. Direct-on-Line starters 3. Variable speed controllers/drives 4. General purpose contactors 5. Lighting contactors

B. Related Sections and Documents 1. Section 21 30 00 Fire Pumps. 2. Section 22 10 00 Plumbing Pumps. 3. Division 23 HVAC. 4. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls. 5. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 6. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 7. Section 26 05 48 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems 8. Section 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems. 9. Section 26 23 00 LV Switchgear 10. Section 26 24 19 Motor Control Centers 11. Section 26 28 23 Enclosed Circuit Breakers. 12. Section 26 29 23 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 13. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. BS British Standards B. IEC International Electro - technical Commission. C. Local Codes and Regulations. D. Specification & Regulations of local electricity company

1.2.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating which shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Name of the manufacturer. 2. Country of origin. 3. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 29 16 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND STARTERS Page 2 of 5

years period. 4. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 5. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. 6. Delivery time from the date of orders. 7. Copies of test reports or certificates. 8. Control schematics and wiring diagrams. B. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engi- neer. C. Submit manufacturer’s dimensioned drawings of enclosed starters and contactors showing accurately scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated motors, electrical power/control panels and feeds. D. Submit Method Statement. E. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production tests. F. Point-to-point Control Wiring Diagram: Differentiating between manufacturer- installed and field- installed wiring. G. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze operating scenarios, including recommendations for input filtering to limit THD (I) and THD(V) to 8 % at point of common coupling.

1.2.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and ratings of enclosed contactors. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts.

1.2.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of enclosed starters and contactors of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.4.1.1 Comply with BS and IEC requirements as applicable to the construction and installation of En- closed Starters and Contactors.

1.2.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle Enclosed Starter and Contactors carefully, when delivered in separate enclosures, to prevent breakage, denting or scoring the finish. Store equipment at indoor location and protect from weather.

1.2.6 WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor or the manufacturer for the period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the engineer except where any specific war- Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 29 16 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND STARTERS Page 3 of 5

ranty from a supplier or manufacturer extends for a longer time.

1.2.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Contract: Obtain an undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and his authorized local representative to provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial completion of the work, covering routine service and emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply of necessary standard spare parts. B. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 24 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, and adjustin g as required for proper operation. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: 2 hours or less. C. Optional Maintenance Service: 3 years after the original 2 years maintenance period. 1.2.8 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 92 00 – Closeout Procedures.

B. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Furnish one percent of Line contactors, display module, various control cards, etc. but no less than two.

1.2.9 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide motor starters, contactors and ancillary components in separate enclosures for individual motors or grouped in motor control centers (MCCs) or panels, as shown on the Drawings and Schedules. B. The motor starters and contactors shall comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation and satisfactory operation of the equipment. C. Provide motor starters and contactors as a part of Motor Control Centers (MCCs) as shown on the Drawings with all the components required for the satisfactory operation of the equipment according to the sequence of operation and functions specified elsewhere in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings or Equipment Schedules. D. Hands-Off Auto selector switches shall be provided for all starters. E. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements given in Section 25 50 00.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 29 16 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND STARTERS Page 4 of 5

2.2 MANUAL STARTERS A. Manual starters shall be provided for single-phase, AC fractional HP motors up to and including 0.5 HP (0.34 kW). B. Provide manual single-phase fractional HP motor starters of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equipped with thermal overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 % variation of nominal overload rating of the motors. C. Provide starters with quick-make quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, selector switches for local-remote and hand-off-auto selection, start-stop push buttons, a manual reset push button; and with toggle operated handle with handle lock-off. 2.3 DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS A. Direct-on-line starters for single or three phase motors up to and including 5.0 KW, motors, shall be provided as shown on the Drawings, Schedules and in accordance with BS and IEC requirements. B. Direct-on-line starters shall comprise, but not limited to, the following listed items. Any other items not listed, but mentioned elsewhere in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings and necessary for the satisfactory operation of the starter shall also be provided. 2 Triple pole mechanically interlocked isolator with padlocking facilities in the “off” position. 3 H.R.C. fuses in the power circuit. 4 Contactor rated at 15 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation, with magnetic blow outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn copper main contacts of the removable type, and continuously rated operating coils. 5 Start-stop push buttons. 6 Under voltage release. 7 Overload relays of the adjustable thermal type. 8 Control circuit fuses of the cartridge type. 9 Selector switches for local-remote and hand-off-auto selection. 10 Motor protection relay (unbalance and single phasing). 11 Ammeter of the moving iron type. 12 Pilot lamps to indicate “running”, “tripped”, “stopped” and other required indications. 13 Removable neutral link of heavy section copper. 2.4 VARIABLE - FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS A. Refer to section 26 29 23 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers for VFD specifications and requirements. B. Variable frequency starters shall be used for single or three phase motors above 5.0 KW, rating. VFD shall be provided as shown on the Drawings, Schedules and in accordance with BS and IEC requirements.

2.5 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS A. General purpose contactors shall be provided in power panel boards, Motor Control Centers (MCC), other control panels or elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or as required for the satisfactory operation of all systems on the project. B. General purpose contactors shall be magnetic type complying with B.S. 587. The rating and number of main poles/contacts of the contactors shall be suitable for the intended application. The coil operating voltage shall match with the control voltage of the system. C. All accessories of the contactors such as push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights, auxiliary contacts, etc. shall comply with B.S. 587 and the actual requirements for the satisfactory operation of the sys- Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 29 16 (R0) September 2020 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS AND STARTERS Page 5 of 5

tem, where these will be utilized.

2.6 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Lighting contactors shall be provided in interior and exterior lighting panel boards or elsewhere as shown on the Drawings, Schedules or required for the satisfactory operation of the lighting system. B. The lighting contactors shall be magnetic type complying with B.S. 587. The rating and number of main poles/contacts of the lighting contactors shall be suitable for the intended application. The contactor shall be electrically and mechanically held type with coil operating voltage matching with the control voltage. C. All accessories of the lighting contactors such as push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights, auxiliary contacts, etc. shall comply with B.S. 587 and the actual requirements for the satisfactory operation of the lighting system where these will be utilized.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Enclosed Motor Starters and Contactors as indicated in compliance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of BS, IEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with all other related works such as pumps, motors, lighting and electrical wiring/cabling, as necessary to interface installation of enclosed starters and contactors with other work. C. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any. D. Adjust the thermal overload relays and other adjustable components in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. E. Comply with Section 26 05 53. F. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.

3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B. Touch-up scratched or marred surface to match original finish.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 01 50 00 and 26 01 26.

B. Prior to energization of enclosed starters and contactors, check insulation resistance to ensure that all wiring and equipment are installed satisfactorily without any leakage to ground. C. Prior to energization of starters, check tripping of all protective devices including thermal overload relays by current injection and perform complete operation and functional test of the equipment by simulation only. D. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energize enclosed starters and contactors and demonstrate complete functioning and operation of equipment in accordance with the requirements and up to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where necessary correct malfunctioning units.

END OF SECTION 26 29 16 Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System including, but not limited to, the following:

1. UPS cubicles/modules.

2. Static by-pass transfer switch.

3. Battery.

4. Accessories.

B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls.

2. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

3. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General.

4. Section 26 05 19 LV Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

5. Section 26 05 48 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems

6. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.

7. Section 26 24 16 Panel boards

8. Section 26 28 23 Enclosed Circuit Breakers

9. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES The UPS and all associated equipment and components shall be manufactured in accordance with the following relevant IEC standard: A. IEC 60146 Semiconductor Convertors

B. IEC 6 1439-2 Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies. IEC 60204-1 Electrical Equipment of Industrial Machines. C. IEC 60529 Protection Enclosure Degree D. IEC 60076 Power Transformers E. IEC 60950 Safety of Electrically Energized Office Machines, Data Processing Machines. F. IEC 60364 Building Electrical Installation G. IEC 60038 Standard Voltages

H. IEC 60068-2-32 Free Fall Testing Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 2 of 11

I. VDE 0510 Part 2 paragraph 6.5 Ripple Current for Battery Systems

J. EN 50091-1 Uninterruptible Power Systems “general and safety requirements” ISO9001

K. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, drawings, and technical data covering the equipment required.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of UPS, batteries, battery racks, etc., which show accurately scaled equipment layouts, wire/cable routing and connections between UPS and batteries, single line diagram indicating metering, control; heat rejection and air flow requirements. C. Submit product data for major component, such as batteries. Include catalogue sheets and technical data sheets with physical data and electrical performance. D. Spare parts list. E. Manufacturer's detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and materials, manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, battery sizing calculations, installation instructions, single-line diagrams, ladder-type schematic diagrams, elevations, layout drawings, and details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a unit. F. Factory and field test reports in booklet form tabulating factory and field tests and measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Factory and field test reports shall be signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturer of the UPS system that the system meets specified requirements. G. Six complete copies of operation and maintenance manuals outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation and shutdown. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, equipment model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of equipment and its basic operational features. Six complete copies of maintenance manuals listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. Corrective maintenance procedures shall identify the most probable failures and the appropriate repairs. Test measurement levels shall be referenced to specific test points on the installed equipment. Operation and maintenance manuals may be either combined or separate. H. Lesson plans and training manuals for the training phases, including type of training to be provided and proposed dates, with a list of reference materials. I. Method Statement.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit description of operating procedures; servicing procedures; list of major components; recommended remedial and preventive maintenance procedures; and spare parts list.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of UPS equipment, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 3 of 11

experience on projects with UPS equipment installation similar to that required for project.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UPS equipment shall comply with the requirements of BS, IEC and Local Standards.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack all equipments for protection during transportation. B. Store in a dry, clean location. C. Do not install equipment until it can be protected from damage during construction.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 01 92 00 – Closeout Procedures. B. Provide a complete set of spare parts for UPS as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the UPS system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Conform to requirements of general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Maintenance Contract: Obtain an undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and his authorized local representative to provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial completion of the work, covering routine service and emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply of necessary standard spare parts. C. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 24 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: 2 hours or less.

1.10 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 92 00 - Closeout Procedures. B. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Five of each type and rating used. 2. Indicating Lights: Four of each type installed. 3. Touchup Paint: Two containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 250 mL. 4. Protection relays: one of each type. 5. Circuit Boards of critical circuit : one of each type. C. Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 4 of 11

1.11 WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor or the manufacturer for the period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the engineer except where any specific warranty from a supplier or manufacturer extends for a longer time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The UPS and battery system shall be capable of withstanding the harsh environmental and ambient conditions as described in Section 26 05 00 without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating characteristics. B. For remote monitoring/controls, comply with the requirements as given in Section 23 20 00. C. Sound pressure levels produced by the UPS, when operating under full rated load, at a distance of 1.5 m in any direction from the perimeter of the unit, shall not exceed 65 dB as measured on the A scale of a standard sound level meter at slow response. Acoustical treatment of the UPS room, when required, shall be carried out in as called for in the tender documents.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The UPS used shall be with reverse transfer designed for capacity expansion by addition of parallel modules in the field with minimal downtime. The UPS module shall be capable of being upgraded for additional capacity to the largest model's power rating by the manufacturer on site without changing any power components or increasing the physical size of the module. B. As a minimum, the following components shall be provided: 1. Battery. 2. Rectifier/charger with capacity sufficient to supply full load to inverter while recharging fully discharged battery to 95% of full capacity in four hours or less; and within the input current limits specified. 3. Inverter to provide power to load during normal operation. 4. Static switch to transfer the critical load to the by-pass AC input source without interruption. The load shall be gradually transferred back to the inverter output, either manually or automatically, without interruption, once the inverter has been synchronized to the by-pass source. 5. External Manual switch to bypass static switch for maintenance to isolate the rectifier/charger, inverter and static switch while continuing to supply power to the load via the by-pass AC input source. Transfer to the manual switch shall be without interruption to the load.

2.3 EQUIPMENT RATINGS/CHARACTERISTICS A. UPS Power Rating: 1. The continuous power rating of the UPS shall be, in no case less than that shown on the Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 5 of 11

Drawings or mentioned in BoQ. It shall meet all the criteria specified herein to fulfill the power demand of the loads fed by UPS as shown on the Drawings. 2. The continuous power rating shall be over entire battery voltage range at specified power factor. It shall maintain output voltage within specified limits at any load from full load to no- load. B. Battery Capacity: 1. Battery shall be capable of operating at full load for 15 minutes without any voltage drop. 2. Discharge time to end voltage: 15 minutes, at 25 C. Battery shall be capable of delivering 125% of full rated UPS load at initial start-up. C. Input Voltage: 1. Rating: 400 V, 3 phase or as shown on the Drawings. 2. Operating Range: Plus 10% or Minus 15%. D. Input Frequency: 1. Rating: 50 Hz. 2. Operating Range: + 3 Hz. E. Input Current: 1. Maximum Limit: Adjustable to maximum of 125% of that required to operate at full load with battery bank on float charge. 2. Current Walk-in: 25 to 100% in fifteen seconds. F. UPS Power Factor: 1. The power factor over full range of loads and input voltages shall be 1 (unity power factor) G. Total Harmonic Current Distortion: 1. The maximum harmonic current distortion of input current wave form shall be 10% at full load. H. Output Voltage: 1. Configuration: Three phase, 4-wire plus earth, 400 V or as shown on the Drawings. 2. Regulation: a. + 0.5% for balanced load, full range of DC input and no load to full load variations. b. + 3% for 50% unbalanced load, full range of DC input and no load to full load variations. c. +10% during maximum overload of the system. 3. Adjustment: + 5%. I. Output Frequency: 1. Rating: 50 Hz. 2. Operating Range: + 0.1%. 3. Slew rate: 1.0 Hz per second maximum J. Output Power Rating: As shown on the Drawings, at 0.9 lagging pf. K. Output Current: 1. Shall not exceed 150% of rated output current. L. Phase Displacement: 1. Balanced load: + 1 o of by-pass input. 2. 50 % load imbalance phase-to-phase: + 3 o of by-pass input. M. Bypass Line Synchronizing Range: Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 6 of 11

+ 0.5 Hz + 1.0 Hz Switch Selectable + 3.0 Hz N. Load Power Factor Range: 1.0 to 0.8 lagging O. Overload capability: At full voltage and excluding battery shall be as follows: 1. 125 % load for 10 minutes. 2. 150 % load for 30 seconds. 3. 300 % load for one cycle after which it shall be current limited to 150 % until fault is cleared or UPS goes to bypass. P. Voltage Transient Response: 1. 20 % load step: + 4%. 2. 30 % load step: + 5%. 3. 50 % load step: + 8%. 4. Loss or return of AC input power: + 1%. 5. Manual Transfer of 100 % load: + 4%. 6. Automatic transfer of load to bypass: + 4%. Q. Transient Recovery Time: To within 1 % of output voltage within 20 ms. R. Voltage Unbalance: 1. Balanced Load: + 1%. 2. 20 % unbalanced load: + 1%. 3. 50 % unbalanced load: + 2%. 4. 100 % unbalanced load: + 5%. S. Output Harmonic Distortion: At rated frequency and voltage, from 10 % load to full load and over entire battery voltage range, when measured into a linear load with a crest factor of less than 3 to 1, the output harmonic distortion shall be: 1. For any single harmonic: maximum 3%. 2. Total rms harmonic distortion: maximum 5%.

T. Efficiency: Not less than 92% at full load and half load including battery and isolation transformer losses. The efficiency of UPS system including battery and isolation transformer losses shall be not less than 92% at full load and half load.

2.4 UPS MODULE A. UPS module shall consist of a rectifier/charger unit and a 3-phase inverter unit with their associated transformers, synchronizing equipment, protective devices and accessories as required for operation. B. Rectifier/charger unit shall be solid state and shall provide direct current to the DC bus. C. Rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with an input protective device. The protective device shall be sized to accept simultaneously the full-rated load and the battery recharge current. The protective device shall be capable of shunt tripping and shall have symmetrical interrupting capacity as required. The protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position. A surge suppression device shall be installed at the UPS input to protect against lightning and switching surges. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 7 of 11

D. Rectifier/charger unit shall be protected by a power walk-in feature such that when AC power is returned to the AC input bus, the total initial power requirement will not exceed 20 % of the rated full load current. This demand shall increase gradually to 100% of the rated full load current plus the battery charging current over the specified time interval. F. Primary current limiting: Battery-charging current shall be voltage regulated and current limited. The battery-charging current limit shall be separately adjustable from 2 % to 25 % of the maximum discharge current. After the battery is recharged, the rectifier/charger unit shall maintain the battery at full float charge until the next operation under input power failure. Battery charger shall be capable of providing equalizing charge to the battery. H. Rectifier/charger unit shall have an output filter to minimize ripple current supplied to the battery; the ripple current into the battery shall not exceed 3% RMS. Rectifier/charger unit shall have manual means for adjusting DC voltage for battery equalization, to provide voltage within plus 10% of nominal float voltage. I. Module shall have a DC protective device to isolate the module from the battery system. The protective device size and interrupting rating shall be as required by system capacity and shall incorporate a shunt trip as required by circuit design. The protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position. J. Inverter unit shall be a solid-state device capable of accepting power from the DC bus and providing AC power within specified limits. K. The inverter shall be able to sustain an overload as specified across its output terminals. The inverter shall not shut off, but shall continue to operate within rated parameters, with inverse-time overload shutdown protection.

L. The inverter shall normally operate in phase-lock and synchronism with the bypass source. Should the bypass source frequency deviate beyond 60 Hz by more than 0.5 Hz, the internal frequency oscillators contained in the power module shall be used to derive the new frequency reference. Upon restoration of the bypass source within the required tolerance, the inverter shall resynchronize with that source at a slew rate not exceeding the specified limits. The design of the oscillator and synchronizing circuits shall be such that failure of any associated component, connector pin, terminal lead wire or DC power source in either the open or shunted mode shall affect only one inverter leg. Such failure shall not cause transient disturbance of the critical load in excess of the stated limits. M. Electronic controls shall be incorporated to provide individual phase voltage compensation to obtain phase balance. N. Each control logic printed circuit board shall be electrically and physically packaged on an individual plug-in module with separate indication and adjustments. O. The control logic shall include status indicators for trouble-shooting the control circuits. These indicators shall be mounted on the circuit card edge or face such that they will be visible without repositioning the card, and shall be labeled with the function name. P. The output protective device shall be capable of shunt tripping and shall have interrupting capacity as specified. Protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position. Q. The inverter output transformer shall be similar to the input transformer and shall be capable of handling up to K-13 nonlinear loads as described in IEEE C 57.110. R. UPS module shall have built-in self-protection against under voltage, overvoltage, over current and surges introduced on the AC input source and/or the bypass source. The UPS system shall sustain input surges without damage. The UPS shall also have built-in self-protection against overvoltage and voltage surges introduced at the output terminals by paralleled sources, load switching, or circuit breaker operation in the critical load distribution system. S. UPS module shall be self-protected against over current, sudden changes in output load and short circuits at the output terminals. UPS module shall be provided with output reverse power detection which shall cause that module to be disconnected from the critical load bus when output reverse power is present. UPS module shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to itself and the connected load for predictable types of failure within itself and the connected load. At the end of battery discharge limit, the module shall shut down without damage to internal components. T. An RS 232 C communications and data acquisition port shall be provided. This port shall allow the Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 8 of 11

system parameters, status, alarm indication and control panel functions specified to be remotely monitored.

2.5 STATIC BY-PASS TRANSFER SWITCH A. A static by-pass transfer switch shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS which shall consist of a static switch and a by-pass protective device or by-pass switch. The control logic shall contain an automatic transfer circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals and alarm conditions and provides an uninterrupted transfer of the load to the by-pass AC power source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when a malfunction occurs in the UPS or when an external overload condition occurs. The power section of the static by-pass transfer switch shall be provided as a plug- in type assembly to facilitate maintenance. The static by-pass transfer switch shall be used to connect the by-pass AC power source or the UPS inverter output to the critical load when required. B. The static by-pass transfer switch shall automatically cause the by-pass AC power source to assume the critical load without interruption when the by-pass control logic senses one of the following conditions and the UPS inverter output is synchronized to the by-pass AC power source: 1. Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating. 2. Battery protection period is expired and bypass is available. 3. Inverter failure. C. If an overload occurs and the UPS inverter output is not synchronized to the by-pass AC power source, the UPS inverter output shall current-limit for 200 milliseconds minimum. The inverter shall then turn off and an interrupted transfer to the by-pass AC power source shall be made. If the by- pass AC power source is beyond the conditions stated below, an interrupted transfer shall be made upon detection of a fault condition: 1. By-pass voltage greater than + 10% from the UPS rated output voltage. 2. By-pass frequency greater than + 0.5 Hz from the UPS rated output frequency. 3. Phase differential of AC bypass voltage to UPS output voltage greater than +3 o. D. It shall be possible to make a manually-initiated static transfer from the system status and control panel by turning the UPS inverter off. E. The static by-pass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer, without interruption after the UPS inverter is turned "on", or after an instantaneous overload-induced reverse transfer has occurred and the load current has returned to less than the unit's 100 % rating. F. The control logic circuitry shall provide the means of making a forced or reverse transfer of the static by-pass transfer switch on an interrupted basis. Minimum interruption shall be 20 milliseconds when the UPS inverter is not synchronized to the bypass AC power source. G. The static by-pass transfer switch shall withstand the following overload conditions: 1. 200% of UPS output rating for 5 minutes. 2. 125% of UPS output rating for 10 minutes.

2.6 UPS CABINET FABRICATION A. The UPS cabinet shall be floor mounted, totally enclosed cubicle type in accordance with the requirements given in Section 26 24 13. B. Electroplate brackets and securing hardware with corrosion resistant material. Secure bolts, studs and nuts with lock washers. C. Identify internal wiring at each end of conductor. Provide cabinet grounding lugs. D. Conversion Equipment Enclosure: The enclosure shall allow access from front for servicing adjustments and connections. Access hinged door equipped with tumbler lock and latch handle. Equip cabinet for fork truck lifting. E. Equip air inlet with permanent type filters and pressurize cabinet, or use gaskets around door and Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 9 of 11

panel openings to prevent entry of dirt. F. Exhaust fans must be provided G. Cabinet finish: Primed and painted inside and outside with suitable semi-gloss enamel.

2.7 BATTERY A. Storage Battery: Sealed lead acid designed for auxiliary power service. Provide battery with impact resistant plastic case. Provide cells with explosion proof vents, clear containers, and ample space for plate growth without stressing container and cover. B. Electrolyte Specific Gravity: No greater than 1.25 when full charged and measured at 25C. C. Ampere-Hour Rating: Sufficient to supply direct current to inverter for outage period specified, with inverter operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 V per cell. D. Battery Racks: Maximum of three-tier, all steel construction, with plastic insulating rails at all points of contact with the battery case. Paint racks with acid resistant paint. E. The battery pack assembly shall be furnished in a battery cabinet matching the UPS cabinet. The battery cabinet shall be designed to allow for checking the torque on the connections in the battery system and to provide adequate access for annual housekeeping chores. External wiring interface shall be through the bottom or top of the assembly. A smoke and high temperature alarm shall annunciate detection of either smoke or high temperature within the battery cabinet. F. Each battery pack assembly shall have a fused disconnect switch provided in an enclosure, finished with acid-resistant paint and located in line with the assembly. Switch shall be complete with line side and load side bus bars for connection to battery cells. Switch shall be rated 3-pole with interrupting rating as required by system capacity, and shall have an external operator that is lockable in the "off" position. G. A battery monitor shall be provided for each battery pack assembly. As a minimum, this device shall monitor the following parameters: 1. Total system voltage. 2. Ambient room temperature. 3. Total battery discharge cycles with a duration of 30 seconds or less. H. The monitor shall also record the total accumulated discharge minutes and accumulated battery system discharge kW hours.

2.8 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

A. Controls: All standard controls and alarms as recommended by the manufacturer shall be provided, which shall include the following as a minimum: 1. AC input circuit breaker. 2. "Inverter operate" switch, to initiate inverter operation. 3. "Inverter standby" switch, to cause inverter to cease operation. 4. "Static switch transfer" switch, to permit manual actuation of static transfer switch. 5. "Static switch lock-out" switch, to inhibit automatic retransfer of load to inverter. 6. Battery charge timer. 7. "Indicator test" switch. 8. Static switch output circuit breaker. 9. Static switch output circuit breaker. 10. Static switch bypass circuit breaker. 11. Controls for maintenance bypass switch. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 10 of 11

B. Indicators: All standard indicators as recommended by the manufacturer shall be provided, which shall include the following as a minimum: 1. "Inverter synchronized to utility." 2. "Load connected to utility." 3. "Static transfer switch inhibited." 4. "High/low DC voltage." 5. "Over temperature." 6. "Inverter output overload." C. Meters: All standard meters as recommended by the manufacturer shall be provided, which shall include the following as a minimum: 1. Rectifier/charger DC voltage and current. 2. Utility, inverter output, and load AC voltage. 3. Load AC current. 4. Inverter output and utility frequency. 5. UPS output watts.

D. Selector switches for each phase of the AC valves shall be provided. All meters shall be rated for 1% accuracy class.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Install UPS system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and the requirements of Local Standards, BS and IEC.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 26 01 26. B. Verify specification performance criteria; measure battery discharge and recharge times; simulate fault in each system component and utility power; Operate the unit for eight hours; and other tests as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems. B. Include services of technician to supervise adjustments, final connections, and system testing. C. The services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified shall be provided. The representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment. The representative shall check the wiring between equipment, start up the system, and field test the functions, interlocks and protective devices to ensure that the total system is functioning according to the intent of the design. The field tests shall be performed under the supervision of a factory-trained representative of the equipment manufacturer and witnessed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be given 2 weeks written advance notice of the date and time when testing will be conducted.

3.4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Testing and commissioning of the complete UPS system shall be carried out by the UPS equipment Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 33 53 (R0) September 2020 STATIC UN-INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 11 of 11

manufacturers authorized specialist commissioning agent in the presence of the Architect. B. Test certificates shall be issued in triplicate for all necessary tests performed to ensure complete and satisfactory operation of the UPS equipment.

END OF SECTION 26 33 53

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 41 00 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Page 1 of 5

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Lightning Protection System including, but not limited to the following: 1. Air Terminals. 2. Copper Tape. 3. Grounding Rods. 4. Grounding Pits. Related Sections 1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Works Results, General. 3. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES A. BS EN 62305- Parts 1-4: 2006.

B. British Standard Code of Practice C.P. 326-1965.

C. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The purpose of the lightning protection system is to minimize the effects of a lightning strike to the building, from above or from the side, and to safely conduct the discharge to earth without side flashing and without danger to personnel. B. Description: A Complete lightning protection system including air terminals, down conductors, roof conductors, interconnecting conductors, grounding pits and bonding to protect the building from lightning strikes based on “ Faraday`s Cage Principle”. Test joints shall be provided as required to make routine tests of the system. C. The entire lightning protection system, apart from natural building elements used as part of the system, shall be the product of one manufacturer. Subject to the requirements of this Specification & architectural considerations, all items shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Natural conductive elements of the building such as metal roofs, columns and framing …etc shall be used as part of the lightning protection system. E. Where building elements are to be used as part of the lightning protection system they shall be tested during construction to ensure that the resistance is low enough for the purpose. A formal record shall be kept of the resistance readings taken. If readings are higher than acceptable, suitable measures shall be taken to the approval of the Engineer, to reduce the resistance to an acceptable value. F. Waterproofing of the building shall not be impaired in any way by fixings or by any part of the lightning protection system. G. The lightning protection system will encompass Air Terminal, copper tapes, down conductors, earth pits ..etc. The system shall comprise the following elements: Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 41 00 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Page 2 of 5

C. Air Terminals D. Copper Tapes E. Joints and Clamps F. Down conductors G. Earth Pits H. Metallic test clamps

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s data, illustrated leaflets, dimensions, fixing details and description of the proposed products. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and termination details. C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified factory and field testing and inspection. D. The Contractor shall submit samples of materials to the Engineer for his approval before placing an order of material. E. Method Statement of system installation, connection, testing, and commissioning.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding connections, and routing of system conductors.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of Lightning Protection Systems, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum three years’ experience. C. Lightning protection system shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of BS EN 62305:2006 and with the relevant sections of the earthing code BS7430. Where this Specification calls for higher standards the Specification shall prevail. D. Maintain two copies of each document on site.

1.7 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Provide 5% of each type of accessories used in lightning protection system but no less than five of each.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All products shall be carefully packed to avoid damage during transportation.

1.9 COORDINATION Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 41 00 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Page 3 of 5

Coordinate Work with roofing and exterior and interior finish installations.

1.10 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the Engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.11 WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate. B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 - MATERIALS A. Acceptable material is Copper B. Grade and quality of materials and the dimensions of components shall be as detailed in BS EN 62305:2006. C. All fittings, fixings, supports etc, shall be purpose made for lightning protection. D. Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum and shall be both electrically and mechanically sound and constructed to prevent the ingress of moisture. E. All contacts between dissimilar metals or between a metal and a material with which it might react shall be avoided, except as permitted in BS EN 62305:2006 and provided all the precautionary measures recommended are employed. If necessary to prevent long-term corrosion, additional precautions shall be taken such as separation or the insertion of an intermediate material with which neither of the dissimilar metals/ materials reacts, or by changing the metal or material. F. Air Terminals: 1. Material: High conductivity Copper. 2. Length : 1 meter with saddle base 3. Diameter: 17.2 mm. G. Copper Tape: 1. Material: High conductivity Copper. 2. Size: 25 x 3 mm 3. Finishing: Bare for roof and below grade installations. 4. Fastening: Copper clamps at every 1 meter. 5. Accessories: Test clamp, Cross clamp, tape to metal clamp, exothermic metal welding to re- enforcing bars …. etc. All as recommended by vender.

H. Grounding Rods:

1. Material: High conductivity Copper. 2. Size: 1200 mm threaded for coupling other rods for a minimum overall Rod length 3600mm. 3. Diameter: 17.2 mm I. Grounding Pits: Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 41 00 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Page 4 of 5

1. Material: Concrete. 2. Size: 300 mm x 300 mm with cover. J. Down Conductors: 3. Conductors connecting between a test clamp on the outside of a building and an earth electrode shall be PVC covered, but conductors on the roof shall be 4. Metal work, including pipe work, duct work, A/C units, pumps, ...etc and armored cables, adjacent to down conductors shall be bonded. 5. All metal work on the roof shall be bonded.

K. Conductors: 1. Earthing conductors, main earthing rods and main bonding conductors shall be of the type, size and conductor materials as detailed or approved by ENGINEER. 2. Tapes shall comply with BS 1432 where used to interconnect copper electrodes. 3. Main earthing bars shall comply with BS 1433 and shall be bare. L. Earth Electrodes: 1. The type and number of each electrodes shall be as indicated. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, earth rods shall be 17.2 mm normal diameter extensible copper rods connected together. 3. Threads shall be roll-formed with a minimum thickness of 0.05 mm copper in the roots of the thread; couplers shall be of high strength silicon-aluminium bronze alloy and threads shall be counterbored at the ends so that the couplers completely enclose the threads on the rods. 4. The ends of the rods shall be internally threaded; couplers shall comprise a copper fer- rule with the phosphor - bronze coupler screw, a corrosion inhibiting paste shall be applied to the threads on rods and couplers. 4. Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape shall be to BS 1432, of the size, length depth below ground level and layout as indicated. M. Fixing: 1. Engineer’s approval of the tape clips, saddles and holdfasts used shall be obtained before work is commenced. The maximum spacings of fixings shall not exceed 600mm. No fixing shall be made into joints in masonry. 2. For copper conductors or gunmetal, aluminium-silicon bronze or naval brass. 3. Clips shall be either of metal as above or of outdoor grade polycarbonate or polyprolylene with snap-on lids which cannot be inadvertently removed. Clips and saddles shall have rounded edges and countersunk screws. Brass components shall not be used.

4. For general areas inside the building screws and nuts shall be of cadmium electroplated steel or stainless steel; outside building, in plant rooms or other locations they shall be of stainless steel.

N. Inspection Pits: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connection between an earth conductor and its associated earth electrode system shall be in an enclosure. 2. Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth shall be made in an inspection pit measuring 300mm x 300mm and the connection shall be either welded or clamped. The pit shall be filled with sand and a removable cover placed on each pit. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 41 00 (R0) September 2020 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Page 5 of 5

3. The enclosure shall have a removable top cover which shall be flush with finished ground level. The enclosure shall be purpose made concrete inspection pit, an earth electrode connection shall be just below the lid of the inspection pit with adequate access for testing purpose. 4. Backfill immediately surrounding electrodes shall be of low specific resistivity and good water retention properties and it shall be well compacted and watered.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which lightning protection systems are to be installed and correct any manufacturing conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of work. He shall not proceed with the work until conditions are satisfactory and in a manner acceptable to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conductor links to the earth electrodes shall be 25 mm. x 3 mm . The copper tape shall extend 600 mm. above ground/finished floor level where copper joint shall be made. B. All metal equipment and works on the roof (AHU, fans, ..etc.) shall be bonded to the roof copper tape networks. C. Joints in down conductors shall not be permitted.

D. Connections between conductors and earth electrode clamps shall be similarly protected. Wrap- ping shall extend each side of the joint. E. Main earth electrodes shall be of the copper rod type, (diameter = 17.2 mm.) driven vertically into the ground within earth pit. The terminal end shall finish 300 mm. below finished ground level covered by a concrete inspection pit. F. Overall, the earth resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. G. The Contractor shall include for tests for resistance to earth of each termination, continuity of conductors and efficiency of bonds and joints. The Contractor shall supply all labour and instruments to conduct these tests.

END OF SECTION 26 41 00 Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 1 of 8

SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY This section specifies the furnishing and installation of lighting fixtures complete with lamps and other accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS BS EN 60920 & BS EN 60921- Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts. British Code (BS) Lamps. Local Jordanian codes and standards IEC 60598-2-1:1987 for general-purpose luminaires IEC 60598-2-2:1997 for recessed luminaries IEC 62031:2008: LED modules for general lighting IEC 60838-2-2: Connector for LED modules

1.03 General Requirments I. Pendant fixtures within the same room of area shall be installed plumb and at a uniform height from the finished floor. Adjustment of height shall be made during installation. II. Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate light leakage within the fixture and between the fixture and adjacent finished surface. III. Fixtures located on the exterior shall be installed with non-ferrous metal screws finished to match the fixtures. IV. Luminaries fitted with high frequency or electronic control gear shall be disconnected before the circuit is tested for insulation resistance. V. Unless otherwise stated all luminaries designed for internal use shall be constructed to IP 20 and be Class 1. For IP-Rating refer to lighting fixture schedule in contract drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

General

The Contractor shall be responsible to supply the specified lighting fixtures as indicated on the drawings. Fixtures shall bear manufacturer's name and the factory inspection label.

Fixtures shall be completely wired and constructed to comply with IEC Publication 598-1 598-2 and BSEN 60598-1: 1993 unless otherwise specified..

All luminaires supplied by the contractor shall be photometrically tested to BS 5225: Part 1.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2 of 8

Relamping the fixture shall be possible without having to remove the fixture from its place.

Certain fixtures may be shown in provisional position. They shall be exactly located as soon as the final layout of equipment is known.

Any plastics used in the luminaire shall be light and U.V. stable and shall be suitable for their application.

All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and electrostatically spray-painted using acrylic polyester or epoxy powder paint.

Fixtures that are used under canopy or directly exposed to weather shall be considered as being outdoor type.

2.01 Lamps – General LIGHT EMITTING DIODE LUMINAIRE

The ‘Light Emitting Diode’ (LED) luminaries, including the electronic driver and LED module shall be suitable for operation at 220 V ± 6%, 50 Hz ± 2%, single phase AC supply.

The LED luminaries shall be fully assembled and tested before shipment from factory. The LED luminaries shall comply with the following international standards and their manufacturing process shall conform to the relevant quality standard of ISO 9000:2008:

Luminaries – Part 1: General requirements and tests

Luminaries – Part 2 Particular Requirements. Section 1: Fixed general purpose luminaries

Luminaries – Part 2 Particular Requirements. Section 2: Recessed Luminaries.

Type test certificate shall be provided to demonstrate the compliance with the above standards issued by an accredited test laboratory for the LED luminaries.

The LED luminaires shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60598-2-1:1987 for general-purpose luminaires or IEC 60598-2-2:1997 for recessed luminaries. The ingress protection for indoor and outdoor LED luminaire shall be at least IP2X and IP68 respectively to IEC 60529:2009.

The irradiance and radiance emission limits of the LED luminaires, that are exposed to view directly, shall be tested to comply with the hazard ‘Risk Group 1’ (low risk) as stated in the requirements of the IEC 62471:2006 – Photo biological safety of lamps and lamp systems.

The LED luminaries shall be rated for continuous service at an ambient temperature of 40℃ without affecting the performance requirements as stated in clause C9.4 of this specification. The EE Contractor shall be responsible to advise the Architect if the performance of the LED luminaries will be affected by the installation conditions. The LED luminaries shall have a full set of photometric data prepared to CIBSE TM5 or IES format for general lighting design purpose.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 3 of 8

2.01.1 ELECTRONIC DRIVER

The electronic driver (driver) for the LED luminaries shall include the components of power factor correction, radio interference suppression and also dimming facility if it is specified. The driver shall conform to the following international standards if applicable:

Lamp control gear – Part 1: General and safety requirements;

Lamp control gear – Part 2-13: Particular requirements for DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules;

DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules – Performance requirements;

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 3-2: Limits – Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current ≦ 16 A per phase);

Equipment for general lighting purposes – EMC immunity requirements; and

Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and similar equipment.

Certificates of compliance issued by accredited test laboratories shall be provided for different ratings of drivers to be used in the Contract.

Technical information of the drivers shall be provided to indicate the performance of the drivers. The data shall include, but not limited to, minimum and maximum input voltage, frequency, maximum operating temperature, rated output voltage, rated output current, rated output power and power factor

The rated life of driver shall not be less than 35,000 hours operating at 40°C ambient temperature.

Electronic ballast shall be compatible with the dimming circuit provided. Unless other specified, the electronic ballast shall have at least continuous dimming range 40% - 100% without flicker- ing.

2.01 .2 LED MODULE

The LED module / Luminaires shall be manufactured and tested to comply with the following standards if applicable:

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4 of 8

LED modules : IEC 62031:2008: LED modules for general lighting – Safety specifications. Cer- tifi- Connector for LED modules : IEC 60838-2-2:2006: Miscellaneous cate lamp holders – Part 2-2: Particular requirements – of Connectors for LED modules com pliance with the above standards shall be issued by an accredited test laboratory or the manufacturer of LED module.

2.01 .3PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

The performance of the LED luminaries shall comply with the following requirements:

(a) Luminaries efficacy (lumen/total circuit wattage): The luminaire efficacy expresses the ability of the total luminaire to transfer the consumed energy into Light output, it’s a ratio between Total Lumen Output to the TCP. This measure shows the total luminaire quality from the energy prospective.

(b) Lumen Depreciation Ratio (L70) This term express the drop in the lumen output over time. This value reflect the overall quality of the light sources and the luminaire design. A value of L70 means that at end of service life the LED luminaire will deliver 70% of its initial light output value (lumens).

(c) Color Rendering Index (CRI): CRI is the ability of the light to reflect the right colors. It shall be minimum 80 for color temperature from 2700 – 6000K for indoor luminaires and minimum 80 for self-ballasted LED lamp.

(d) Power factor: The power factor is the ratio between the useful power and the apparent of the LED luminaries circuit an e) Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) and its tolerance limit: The color temperature of a group of LED luminaries in the same space or room shall not be visually noticeable. The nominal CCT of the LED light source shall preferably be one of the following values. The tolerance limits shall be within the below ranges:

2700 K 2725 ± 145 K 3000 K 3045 ± 175 K 3500 K 3465 ± 245 K 4000 K 3985 ± 275 K 5700 K 5665 ± 355 K 6500K 6530 ± 510 K

Each model of LED luminaire tested to comply with the above performance requirements. The EE Contractor shall submit the test report from the accredited laboratories to certify each model of LED luminaries or self-ballasted LED lamp complying with the standards or other recognized

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 5 of 8

international/national standards or other standards proposed by the EE Contractor and agreed by the Architect.

LED Luminaires

All LED Luminaires shall be designed in a way that the luminaire body acts as heat sink to the LED modules. Therefore, LED modules shall be designed to be as built-in or integrated part of the fittings. Standard lighting fittings with LED retrofitting lamps shall not be accepted.

Luminaire Body shall be made from Aluminum (Extruded or Cast) or Steel to have good thermal behaviors, while diffusers shall be made from Polycarbonates.

Flat LED Luminaires such as 60x60 or other sizes shall be side lit, from single or several sides of the fittings. Luminaires shall utilize Light Guide / Light transmitter panels. Such panel will be integrated in a way that it lays between the back plate and the diffuser of the luminaire.

Lighting Guide panel shall be designed to work using the same mechanism of the fiber optics in light transmission in order to ensure the best efficiency and lowest losses within the panel.

Downlights shall be provided with suitable heat sink with fins to increase the area of heat ex- change, luminaire shall include a plastic box to accommodate the driver.

All Luminaire in recessed installation shall have an external driver (remote) that complies with the specs in previous section.

LED luminaires shall provide energy savings comparing to the conventional lighting vary based on the replaced lighting type. This energy saving should be calculated based on the total circuit energy in watts (light sources, Control Gear & Wiring). For Example, 60% to the fluorescent, 40-50% of the Compact fluorescent, and about 80% to incandescent.

Luminaire Manufacturers shall provide LDT files that can work with third party lighting design softwares such as RELUX and DIALUX, private softwares outputs shall not be accepted.

Manufacturers shall provide a minimum of 2 years warranty from initial handover date.

3.01 Lighting Pole street lighting pole, (8-18m) height above ground, with flange plate 80x80x 1cm & four anchor bolts 80cm Ø24mm with eight nuts and washers. The steel lighting poles, is made of galvanized steel of thickness not less than 4mm folded and welded to form a true octagonal lighting pole, top diameter 60 to 75mmØ, and the bottom diameter 200 to 225mmØ. Door opening with free fixed door with bolt lock (1.5mt above the pole flange plate) with dimensions 10x60cm , the pole shall be reinforced their lighting pole can withstand a wind speed 120km/hr. The following included in pole price:

1. Octagonal lighting pole, 8-10mt high above ground. 2. Fuse box shall be contained in pole inside the door opening and fixed over a steel rail welded to the pole, an earth bolt 8mm diameter with nut welded to the pole. The fuse box shall have four cartridge fuses 6A. the input is four terminal blocks 2x35mm2 each, the output is four terminal blocks 2.5mm2 each. The fuse box shall be made of Reinforced polyester, the dimensions are

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 6 of 8

10x30x15cm approximate. 3. Galvanized steel flange plate 40x40x0.8cm, welded to the bottom side of pole, the flange shall have a symmetric four holes, rectangular shape. 4. Four anchor bolts 24mmØ, and 80cm long. 5. An internal feeding copper cable (3x1.5mm2), feeding each lighting fixture from the fuse box. 6. Concrete foundation block class A300 kg/m3, with dimensions. 7. Concrete manhole casted with foundation block, with lockable cast iron cover 50x50cm. 8. Spigot with brackets (for one or more lighting luminaries) fixed on top of the lighting post, and fixed with 6mmØ blots.

3.01 .1 Lighting Post

Steel lighting post, made of zinc coated (from both inside and outside) conical steel pole 3.5m height above ground with flange plate 30x30x0.6cm, door opening with free fixed door, with bolt lock, fuse box mounted inside the pole with one four fuses and two cable glands. Diameter of pole at base 180-220mm, and top diameter 60mm. The followings shall be included in item price: 1. Lighting pole, 3.5-4mt high above ground. 2. Fuse box shall be contained in pole inside the opening, over a steel rail welded to the pole, an earth bolt 8mm diameter with nut welded to the pole. The fuse box shall have four cartridge fuses 6A. 3. Galvanized steel flange plate (30x30x.05cm), welded to the bottom side of pole the flange shall have a symmetric four holes, rectangular shape. 4. Four anchor bolts 18mmØ and 60cm long. 5. An internal feeding copper cable (3x1.5mm2), feeding each lighting fixture from the fuse box. 6. Concrete foundation block class A300kg/m3, with dimensions (60x60x80cm). 7. Concrete manhole casted with foundation block, with lockable cast iron cover 50x50cm. 8. Spigot with brackets (for one or more lighting luminaries) fixed on top of the lighting pole, and fixed with 6mmØ bolts.

3.01 .2 PVC Rigid Conduits

All PVC conduits used shall be rigid, black, and Class A. Conduit fittings shall be same made of conduits. When PVC conduits go through manhole, it shall be cut exactly at the manhole internal surface with special cutting tools, casting manholes shall take place after laying the PVC conduits. When more than one PVC conduit passes in one trench, then conduit spacers shall be used to keep the allowed spacing all over the conduits routing PVC conduit bends shall be used on curving routs. Radios of curvature shall be 8-10 times the overall cable diameter passing through.

3.01 .3 Earth Excavation Classified excavation of earth for PVC conduits shall be carried on as per detail drawings, and as per site instructions. Rout of trenches shall be clear on shop drawings. Any obstacle arise during work shall be solved on site drawings for cables rout shall be submitted to supervisor before starting, and such shop drawings shall match with the whole under ground utilities, such as water pipes, sewage pipes, hot or cold water pipes, telephone line, electricity company cable, and any other utility. Depth and width of excavation shall be enough for the number, and size of conduits

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 7 of 8

passing through. Manholes of sizes as per drawings shall be casted in site through out the excavation rout, with maximum distance between manholes not exceed 25mt PVC conduits shall be laid over a pure sand layer of at least 10cm thick, then another 10cm layer of sand shall be over the top of PVC conduits. A selected material layer shall come above the sand layer and shall be compacted every 15cm, then concrete tiles covering the whole conduits, then warning tape with warning writings all over the tape saying (caution electric lines, or telephone lines or H.V. electricity lines accordingly) A warning tape of suitable width, with Arabic letters indicating that (watch cables under). The final earth layer shall be compacted to have density 100% then the finishing layer as drawings.

INSTALLATION

I. Furnish, assemble, install and wire up complete, all lighting fixtures. Fixtures shall be complete with lamps, lamp holders and all necessary accessories. All fixtures shall be wired in accordance with temperature limitations. II. Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted by approved means. Pendant-hung fixtures shall be equipped with approved ball type aligners. III. Provide adequate protection for fixtures during construction. At completion of work all fixtures shall be clean and free from foreign material. IV. Support fluorescent luminaries directly from building structure by rod hangers and inserts or metal angle headers supported from framing structure of ceiling suspension system. V. Support luminaries more than 600mm wide by a minimum of four hangers per luminaries, independent of ceiling structure or tee bars. VI. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below, to gain access to outlet or re- wired fixture box. VII. Connect recessed luminary to boxes with flexible conduit and fixture wire. VIII. Support recessed luminaries mounted in suspended ceilings with exposed tee bar grid system from the ceiling tee bar grid structure and secure thereto. IX. Cables shall loop in and out of bases of columns and bollards without joints. Cables shall terminate in a crimped cable socket. X. Provide foundations for all requiring such poles shall be set plumb. XI. Verify that the lighting fixtures are compatible with the specified ceiling systems as indicated on the architectural drawings. Advise the Owner’s representative of any discrepan- cies before placing the lighting fixture order.

Tests

I. Test all circuits in accordance with the codes. II. A sample should be provided.

III. Test proper operation of lighting fixtures and controls. IV. Lighting levels in rooms shall be tested using a cosine and color corrected light meter to the requirements of CIBSE. V. Submit test results as follow :

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 26 50 100 (R0) September 2020 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 8 of 8

1. The System efficacy provided for lamp shall be verified as per test report from accredited laboratory not as per data sheet. 2. The country of origin certificate shall be provided. 3. The EMF for lighting equipment should be equal or less than 20% as per IEC 60958 PART1,2,3 4. The following test are not provided: a) CB test certificate for the unit according to IEC 60598-1 and IEC 60598-2-3. b) UL certificate for the unit. c) CB certificate for the driver according to IEC 61347-2-13. d) ENEC, EMC, LVD, GS certificates from accredited laboratory. e) LM79 test report for the unit from NVLAP approved laboratory. f) TM-21 test report from the chip manufacture. g) TM-21 test report from accredited laboratory for the unit expected life. h) Manufacturer photometric test report. i) IK08 test report according to EN 62262.

END OF SECTION .

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 52 00 (R0) September 2020 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Emergency and exit lighting supplied from central battery system to facilitate orientation within, and escape from buildings upon failure of the normal lighting system.

2. Emergency and Exit Lighting self-contained units.

B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General.

3. Section 26 05 03 Equipments Wiring Connections

4. Section 26 05 19 LV Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

5. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

6. Section 26 05 29 Equipment Connections and Support

7. Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

8. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.

9. Section 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices

10. Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting

11. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. CIBSE The Buildings Lighting Guides issued by the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers CIBSE - (UK). B. BS British Standards C. ICEL 1001 Industry Standard for Emergency Lighting. D. BS 5266 Pt.1 Code of Practice for Emergency Lighting of Premises E. IEC International Electro - technical Commission. F. NFPA National Fire Protection Association. G. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS 1. Submit for complete and detailed manufacturer's catalogues and data relating which shall include, but not limited to, the following: 2. Name of the manufacturer. 3. Country of origin. 4. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts sufficient for a 2 years period. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 52 00 (R0) September 2020 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 2 of 5

5. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 6. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. 7. Delivery time from the date of orders. 8. Copies of test reports or certificates. 9. Control schematics and wiring diagrams. 10. Lighting levels (Lux Levels) calculations for the proposed emergency/ exit light fittings using specialized software. 11. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engineer.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting fixtures and associated control gear of the types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the Project.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All emergency and exit lighting fixtures and associated control gear shall comply with the requirements of listed international and local standards and regulations.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pack equipment for protection during transportation and storage. B. Store in dry, clean location.

1.7 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional lamps, drivers/ trasformers, addressable modules, protective devices of all types and ratings, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than two units of each type and rating. B. Incase three or less numbers of any above mentioned devices/ consumables of certain rating/ size are installed, a minimum of one for each three numbers additional devices of same rating/ size shall be provided as spare.

1.8 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and software and hardware administration of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.9 WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 52 00 (R0) September 2020 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 3 of 5

B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials specified herein to be of high quality and of proven suitability for the functions they will perform and the conditions they will meet in service. B. All emergency and exit lights and associated equipment shall be standard products supplied by a single manufacturer.

2.2 SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Self-contained emergency lighting fixtures shall provide at least the minimum illumination level required as BS 5266-1/2005 for 3 hours duration. B. Emergency lighting units system shall be of non-maintained type, powered by battery/battery charger. C. In the event of main and essential power failures to the areas served by the emergency lighting, emergency lighting shall switch on automatically and independently of the on/off mode of the normal light switch. D. Selected lighting fixtures designated as emergency lighting fittings shall be provided as an integral part with combined battery and charging units (Battery packs). E. On restoration of the normal supply, the fixtures shall return to the normal operating mode as they were working prior to the power interruption. F. The battery shall be a self-contained sealed nickel cadmium pack of minimum 12V 3 Ah capacity to suit the operation of light fixtures and lamps for 3 hours continuously without any duration. G. The charger/inverter module shall be capable of the following characteristics from a completely discharged condition: 1. Full capacity charge in 24 hours or less. 2. 60% capacity charge in 12 hours or less. 3. 30% capacity charge in 6 hours or less. H. A LED to indicate “power supply” on shall be provided with each emergency and exit light fixture.

I. Provide fuses in the unswitched power supply and in the battery supply. J. The changeover voltage from normal power supply to emergency shall be between 60% -85% of nominal normal voltage. K. A 3 position test key located in the electrical risers/rooms shall provide the following facilities: 1. Normal Operation as described earlier; key removable. 2. Test Isolates unswitched normal supply, energizing fluorescent tube from battery supply circuit; key trapped. 3. Isolate Isolates normal switched and un switched power supply. The fluorescent will be energized from the battery/inverter; key trapped. L. The battery/inverter and all circuit accessories to shall enclosed in a painted steel box. M. All units shall have fire resisting diffusers, complying with the relevant standards and Codes of Practice mentioned elsewhere in this specification. N. Every unit shall be connected to a permanently live supply of the local lighting circuit. Install a switch shall be installed in the permanent live supply so that regular testing can be carried out. These switches shall be situated within the unit or in the positions shown on the Drawings. O. Illuminated exit signs shall have comply with the following: Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 52 00 (R0) September 2020 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 4 of 5

1. All illuminated exit signs shall be fireproof and provided in accordance with BS 5588 recommendations. 2. The illuminated exit signs shall be self-contained normal/emergency exit lighting fixture, equipped with fully automatic solid state charger and sealed rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery. 3. The housing of exit light fixtures shall be made of cold rolled sheet steel, baked enamel finish, with instant-on type LED lamp/s and Arabic and English letters. The housing shall be surface or recessed type to suit the site conditions with color of the finish as required by the Engineer. 4. Where required for normal exits and emergency fire escape routes, the illuminated exit signs shall be provided with the sign plates comprising arrow to show the direction of the exit, as approved by the Engineer.

2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS – SUPPLIED FROM AND MONITORED BY CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM A. Shall have all specs as for self contained emergency / exit lighting units but without battery/ charger set. B. Shall have all necessary devices and internal wiring to be fed from and monitored by central battery system.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaries will be installed and correct or any unsatisfactory conditions before installation commences. Do not proceed with the work until conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Examine the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings and become familiar with the structural features of the building and the location of pipes, ducts, etc., which would alter the locations or spacing of outlets to the Engineer for a decision as to the proper location. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper reinforcement of any ductwork necessary to carry the added weight of lighting fixtures where same must be mounted on the bottom of such ductwork.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install emergency and exit lighting fixtures in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of BS, ICE and Local Standards and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. B. Furnish all fixtures complete with lamps. Emergency lighting fixtures shall be installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not be used for lighting purposes during construction. C. Where job conditions require mounting heights different from those specified or shown to avoid equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in mounting heights shall be as directed by the Engineer. D. Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall be secured in accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Clean all lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of the installation. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 26 52 00 (R0) September 2020 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING Page 5 of 5

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 26 01 26. B. Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. C. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and tested. D. Test all emergency and exit lights functionally to prove that they operate satisfactorily for the intended purpose. E. Perform actual illumination levels measurement tests for all spaces, record measurements, compare to the design requirements as per applicable standards and submit to the Engineer in schedule format for his approval.

3.5 EARTHING A. Provide equipment earthing connections for all emergency and exit lights. B. A separate earthing wire shall be used between any fixture and panel board.

END OF SECTION 26 52 00

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 1 of 9

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of telecommunication installations for equipment operations.

2. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by IEC, as well as including made, supplementary, telecommunications system grounding electrodes.

3. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.

B. Related Sections and Documents 1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General.

3. Section 27 05 23 Television Services

4. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems

5. Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communication Systems

6. Section 27 05 33 Conduits and Boxes for Communication Systems.

7. Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communication Systems

8. Section 27 05 53 Identification for Communication Systems

9. Section 27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling

10. Section 27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment.

11. Section 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems

12. Section 27 51 16 Public Address System

13. Section 28 05 26 Grounding And Bonding For Electronic Safety And Security Systems

14. Section 28 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Electronic Safety And Security Systems

15. Section 28 05 33 Conduits And Backboxes For Electronic Safety And Security Systems

16. Section 28 05 36 Cable Trays For Electronic Safety And Security Systems

17. Section 28 05 53 Identification For Electronic Safety And Security Systems

18. Section 28 13 00 Security Systems-Access Control System

19. Section 28 16 00 Security - Burglar Alarm, Emergency Alarm & Call Systems

20. Section 28 23 00 Security Systems-Video Surveillance Systems

21. Section 28 31 00 Fire Detection And Alarm System

22. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 2 of 9

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFRENCES A. TIA/EIA 607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for telecommunications.

B. ISO/IEC- IS 11801 and EN 50173.

C. British Standard Code of Practice CP1013 – Grounding.

D. BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition with all current additions and amendments.

E. IEC 60364 Electrical Installations of Buildings

F. Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA): J-STO-607-A-2002 Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

G. Local Codes and Standards.

H. Local Telecom Service Provider Regulations and requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Division 01.

B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.

C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.

D. Method statement and Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.

G. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.

H. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer:

1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested.

I. Full calculation for the system from the system supplier.

J. Detailed dimensional workshop drawings for all Grounding / Bounding systems with all sections, details and routings. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 3 of 9

K. Detailed dimensional workshop drawings for Grounding / Bounding systems of main and floor control / IT rooms, and approved and signed / stamped from the related telecom utility/ service providers.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide grounding, surge protection and lightning protection of telecommunications system in accordance with latest version of Grounding, Bonding and Electrical Protection chapter of the BS 7671, BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and NFPA 70. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.9 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. B. Prior to any material ordering, installation the Contractor shall coordinate with Local telecom company/ service provider and get their approval on the system drawings by getting all systems drawings signed and stamped by them

1.10 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional consumable materials, minimum two of each type/ size used. B. Incase three or less numbers of any material of certain type/ size are installed, a minimum of one for each three numbers additional devices of same rating/ size shall be provided as spare.

1.11 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 4 of 9

1.12 WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years from the date of practical completion Certificate. B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors.

B. Bonding conductors shall be bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² and smaller shall be solid bare copper wire.

2.2 GROUND RODS A. Copper clad steel, 16 mm diameter by 1200 mm long, conforming to IEC 60364 and IEE 17th Edition standards.

B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS A. Components shall meet or exceed IEC 60364 and IEE 17th Edition and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM GROUND BUSBARS A. Provide solid copper busbar, pre-drilled from two-hole lug connections with a minimum thickness of 6 mm for wall and backboard mounting using standard insulators sized as follows:

1. Room Signal Grounding: 300 mm x 100 mm.

2. Master Signal Ground: 600 mm x 100 mm.

2.5 GROUND CONNECTIONS A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.

B. Above Grade:

1. Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lock washers.

2. Ground Bus bars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts.

3. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.

C. Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multi pair communications cables with metallic shields using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 5 of 9

2.6 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS A. Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet- enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm wide.

2.7 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS A. At any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack- type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.

2.8 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES A. Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm² insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Ground in accordance with the IEC 60364 and IEE 17th Edition and as hereinafter specified.

B. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded.

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.

3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service equipment.

B. Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s):

1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per IEC 60364 and IEE 17th Edition between the service equipment ground bus and all metallic water and gas pipe systems, building steel, and supplemental or made electrodes. Jumper insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections to electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to IEC 60364 and IEE 17th Edition.

2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system.

C. Conduit Systems:

1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, except that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment need not contain an equipment grounding conductor. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 6 of 9

3. Conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided for mechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

D. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and power and lighting branch circuits.

E. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panel boards:

1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pull box, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown).

2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.

3. Provide ground bars in panel boards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to terminate the equipment grounding conductors.

F. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Raised Floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components.

3.4 CORROSION INHIBITORS A. When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.

3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.

3.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM A. Bond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding electrode system.

B. Furnish and install all wire and hardware required to properly ground, bond and connect communications raceway, cable tray, metallic cable shields, and equipment to a ground source.

C. Ground bonding jumpers shall be continuous with no splices. Use the shortest length of bonding jumper possible.

D. Below-Grade Grounding Connections: When making exothermic welds, wire brush or file the point of contact to a bare metal surface. Use exothermic welding cartridges and molds in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. After welds have been made and cooled, brush slag from the weld area and thoroughly cleaned the joint area. Notify the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling any ground connections.

E. Above-Grade Grounding Connections: When making bolted or screwed connections to attach bonding jumpers, remove paint to expose the entire contact surface by grinding where necessary; Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 7 of 9

thoroughly clean all connector, plate and other contact surfaces; and apply an appropriate corrosion inhibitor to all surfaces before joining.

F. Bonding Jumpers:

1. Use insulated ground wire of the size and type shown on the Drawings or use a minimum of 10 mm² insulated copper wire.

2. Assemble bonding jumpers using insulated ground wire terminated with compression connectors.

3. Use compression connectors of proper size for conductors specified. Use connector manufacturer’s compression tool.

H. Bonding Jumper Fasteners:

1. Conduit: Fasten bonding jumpers using screw lugs on grounding bushings or conduit strut clamps, or the clamp pads on push-type conduit fasteners. When screw lug connection to a conduit strut clamp is not possible, fasten the plain end of a bonding jumper wire by slipping the plain end under the conduit strut clamp pad; tighten the clamp screw firmly. Where appropriate, use zinc-plated external tooth lock washers.

2. Wire way and Cable Tray: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated bolts, external tooth lock washers, and nuts. Install protective cover, e.g., zinc-plated acorn nuts on any bolts extending into wire way or cable tray to prevent cable damage.

3. Ground Plates and Bus bars: Fasten bonding jumpers using two-hole compression lugs. Use tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts, external tooth lock washers, and nuts.

4. Raised Floor Stringers: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated, self-drill screws and external tooth lock washers.

3.7 COMMUNICATION ROOM GROUNDING A. Telecommunications Ground Bus bars:

1. Provide communications room telecommunications ground bus bar hardware at 1000 mm.

2. Connect the telecommunications room ground bus bars to other room grounding bus bars.

B. Telephone-Type Cable Rack Systems: aluminum pan installed on telephone-type cable rack serves as the primary ground conductor within the communications room. Make ground connections by installing the following bonding jumpers:

1. Install a 10 mm² bonding between the telecommunications ground bus bar and the nearest access to the aluminum pan installed on the cable rack.

2. Use 10 mm² bonding jumpers across aluminum pan junctions.

C. Self-Supporting and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment Rack Ground Bars:

1. When ground bars are provided at the rear of lineup of bolted together equipment racks, bond the copper ground bars together using solid copper splice plates supplied by the ground bar Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 8 of 9

manufacturer.

2. Bond together nonadjacent ground bars on equipment racks and cabinets with 10 mm² insulated copper wire bonding jumpers attached at each end with compression-type connectors and mounting bolts.

3. Provide a 10 mm² bonding jumper between the rack and/or cabinet ground busbar and the aluminum pan of an overhead cable tray or the raised floor stringer as appropriate.

D. Backboards: Provide a screw lug-type terminal block or drilled and tapped copper strip near the top of backboards used for communications cross-connect systems. Connect backboard ground terminals to the aluminum pan in the telephone-type cable tray using an insulated 10 mm² bonding jumper.

E. Other Communication Room Ground Systems: Ground all metallic conduit, wire ways, and other metallic equipment located away from equipment racks or cabinets to the cable tray pan or the telecommunications ground bus bar, whichever is closer, using insulated 10 mm² ground wire bonding jumpers.

3.8 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE GROUNDING A. Bond all metallic cable sheaths in multi-pair communications cables together at each splicing and/or terminating location to provide 100 percent metallic sheath continuity throughout the communications distribution system.

1. At terminal points, install a cable shield bonding connector provide a screw stud connection for ground wire. Use a bonding jumper to connect the cable shield connector to an appropriate ground source like the rack or cabinet ground bar.

2. Bond all metallic cable shields together within splice closures using cable shield bonding connectors or the splice case grounding and bonding accessories provided by the splice case manufacturer. When an external ground connection is provided as part of splice closure, connect to an approved ground source and all other metallic components and equipment at that location.

3.9 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS:

A. Bond the metallic structures of one cable tray in each tray run following the same path to provide 100 percent electrical continuity throughout this cable tray system as follows:

1. Splice plates provided by the cable tray manufacturer can be used for providing a ground bonding connection between cable tray sections when the resistance across a bolted connection is 10 milliohms or less. The Subcontractor shall verify this loss by testing across one slice plate connection in the presence of the Contractor.

2. Install a 10 mm² bonding jumper across each cable tray splice or junction where splice plates cannot be used. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 05 26 (R0) September 2020 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 9 of 9

3. When cable tray terminations to cable rack, install 10 mm² bonding jumper between cable tray and cable rank pan.

3.10 COMMUNCIATIONS RACEWAY GROUNDING A. Conduit: Use insulated 10 mm² bonding jumpers to ground metallic conduit at each end and to bond at all intermediate metallic enclosures.

B. Wire way: use insulated 10 mm² bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wire way at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

C. Cable Tray Systems: Use insulated 10 mm² bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column- mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 16 meters.

3.11 GROUND RESISTANCE A. Communication grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.

B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of- potential method as defined in IEC 60364 and IEE 17th Edition. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground resistance requirements.

D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection.

3.12 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 1200 mm in depth.

B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure type ground connectors.

C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.

END OF SECTION 27 05 26

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 29 (R0) September 2020 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Fire stopping relating to communication work. 6. Fire stopping accessories. 7. Equipment bases and supports. B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section. 2. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning. 3. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General. 4. Section 27 05 23 Television Services 5. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems 6. Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communication Systems 7. Section 27 05 53 Identification for Communication Systems 8. Section 27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling 9. Section 27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment. 10. Section 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems 11. Section 27 51 16 Public Address and Mass Notification Systems 12. Section 28 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Electronic Safety And Security Sys- tems 13. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations, (IEE 17th Wiring Regulations) with all current additions and amendments.

B. IEC

C. Local Codes and Standards.

D. Telecom Service provider regulations and requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Fire stopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 29 (R0) September 2020 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 2 of 7

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers. B. Method statement for system’s component installation, testing and commissioning. C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Fire stopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and supports. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of the complete range of all supporting devices and ancillary electrical connection materials including connectors, terminals, electrical insulating tape, electrical flux, cable ties, anchors, fasteners, equipment supports, etc., whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of documented successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hangers and supports shall comply with the applicable standards of Local Standards and BS. B. Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of cable trays to the building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single Manu- facturer. D. Comply with requirements of Division 01. E. Convene Pre-Installation Meeting minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Division 01. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identifi- Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 29 (R0) September 2020 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 3 of 7

cation. B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.9 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional consumable material of all types and sizes used, per Supplier’s recommendations.

1.10 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.12 WARRANTY A. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 85 degrees C self locking. 2.2 SPRING STEEL CLIPS Furnish materials in accordance with IEC 60364. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure.

2.3 SLEEVES Furnish materials in accordance with IEC. Sleeves for communication cabling Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel. Sleeves for communication cabling Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel. Sleeves for communication cabling Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals. Stuffing /Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 29 (R0) September 2020 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 4 of 7

2.5 FIRESTOPPING Furnish materials in accordance with local authority standards and Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. Product Description: Shall comply with: Silicone Fire stopping Elastomeric Fire stopping: Single Multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. Foam Fire stopping Compounds: Single Multiple component foam compound. Formulated Fire stopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Fire stopping: Composite of mineral ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomeric for smoke stopping. Mechanical Fire stopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomeric, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. In tumescent Fire stopping: In tumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. Color: Dark gray Black As selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

Primer: Type recommended by fire stopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. Dam Material: Permanent: Mineral fiberboard. Mineral fiber matting. Sheet metal. Plywood or particle board. Alumina silicate fire board. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. General: Furnish products tested by independent testing laboratory. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. Non-Rated Surfaces: Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 29 (R0) September 2020 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 5 of 7

Verify openings are ready to receive fire stopping.

3.2 PREPARATION Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of fire stopping material. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond. Install backing damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors. Do not drill or cut structural members. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Anchors and Fasteners: Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws. Inserts: Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 100 mm. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above flush with top of recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with BS 7671 & IEC. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers. Supports: Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panel boards 25 mm off wall. Support vertical conduit at every other floor. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 29 (R0) September 2020 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 6 of 7

3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring fire stopping. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of fire stopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings. Apply fire stopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size. Remove dam material after fire stopping material has cured. Dam material to remain. Fire Rated Surface: Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof as follows: Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 25 mm on both sides of building element. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 25 mm void between sleeve and building element. Pack void with backing material. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. Where cable tray, bus, cable bus, conduit, wire way, trough, and penetrates fire rated surface, install fire stopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Non-Rated Surfaces: Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor, ceiling, and roof opening as follows: Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 25 mm on both sides of building element. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 25 mm void between sleeve and building element. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Interior partitions: Seal all pipe penetrations. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit.

3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 87 mm thick and extending 150 mm beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. Construct supports of steel members formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 29 (R0) September 2020 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 7 of 7

3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. Extend sleeves through floors 25 mm above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with stuffing fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Pro- vide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. Install chrome plated steel plastic stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Quality and Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. Inspect installed fire stopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

3.8 CLEANING Execution Requirements for cleaning. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK Execution and Closeout Requirements for protecting finished Work. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION 27 05 29

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

Conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wire ways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, but not limited to the following: 1. PVC Conduits. 2. Rigid Steel Conduits. 3. Flexible Conduits. 4. Surface/Floor Cable Trunking. 5. Interior outlet boxes. 6. Weatherproof outlet boxes. 7. Junction/pull boxes and cabinets. 8. Floor boxes. 9. Conduit bodies. 10. Fittings.

B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General.

3. Section 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling

4. Section 27 05 23 Television Services

5. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems

6. Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communication Systems

7. Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communication Systems

8. Section 27 05 53 Identification for Communication Systems

9. Section 27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment.

10. Section 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems

11. Section 27 51 16 Public Address and Mass Notification Systems

12. Section 28 05 33 Conduits And Backboxes For Electronic Safety And Security Systems

13. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 2 of 11

1.2 REFERENCES A. The IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition with all current additions and amendments.

B. BS 4568 Rigid Steel Conduits, Zinc Coated.

C. BS 6099-2.2 / IEC 614-2-2 U.P.V.C. Rigid Conduits

D. Local Codes and Standards.

E. Telecom Service provider regulations and requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS Flexible metal conduit. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit. Nonmetallic conduit. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. Nonmetallic tubing. Raceway fittings. Conduit bodies. Surface raceway. Wire way. Pull and junction boxes. Handholds. Method statement and Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. In- clude instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Comply with requirements of Division 01. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of conduits. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceways of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Raceways shall generally be manufacturer’s standard construction and materials.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 3 of 11

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Requirements for storage and handling. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.8 COORDINATION A. Comply with requirements of Division 01. B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

1.11 WARRANTY A. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PVC CONDUIT A. All PVC conduits and fittings shall be uPVC heavy gauge, rigid, direct buried or encased buried type as applicable, complying with BS 6099-2.2 / IEC 614-2-2 heavy gauge in all respects, and may be used where ambient temperatures do not exceed 75 oC. B. All PVC conduits and accessories shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. C. No conduit shall be less than 20 mm diameter. D. Fittings and accessories for PVC conduits shall include, but not be limited to, the adapters, junction/pull boxes, bushings, couplings, elbows, nipples, plugs, seals, etc. E. Conduit boxes shall be of the circular pattern with appropriate spout entries and 50.8 mm accessory fixing centers. F. All connections and terminations of the PVC conduits and fittings shall be by means of the manufacturer's standard adaptor. G. All boxes shall have brass thread inserts for the fixing of accessories or covers. H. All tees shall be made using conduit tee boxes. Tangential entry boxes shall be used where appropriate. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large uPVC adaptable boxes for junctions.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 4 of 11

I. All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and from the same manufacturer as that of the conduit which they are being used to secure. J. All wall mounted accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final leveling of accessories.

2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUITS (RSC) A. All Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC) and accessories shall be heavy gauge welded steel complying with BS 4568, not less than 20 mm diameter. B. RSC and fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized, complying with BS 4568, providing heavy protection both inside and outside. The steel shall be galvanized after cutting and threading. C. All conduits and fittings shall be threaded, free from rust or other defects and shall have same hot dipped galvanized finish throughout the installation. D. Fittings and accessories for RSC shall include, but not be limited to, adapters, junction/pull boxes, bushings, connectors, couplings, elbows, expansion joints, gaskets, hubs, locknuts, nipples, plugs, seals, breathers, etc. E. Fittings and accessories for RSC shall be of malleable iron or a mixture of grey iron and cast steel. F. All bushes shall be hexagonal headed, heavy duty, long threaded brass bushes complete with ser- rated tempered shake proof washers. All bends shall be cold set. All tees shall be made using circular tee conduit boxes. G. All saddles for surface mounted installation of RSC shall be of the spacer bar type and of the same finish as that of the conduit which they are being used to secure. H. A tapped earth connection facility shall be provided in every box. I. All accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final leveling of accessory. J. PVC coated RSC and fittings shall be used for cables extending to outside of building and where above grade extensions of PVC Conduits required a transition from PVC to RSC.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Flexible conduits shall be liquid-tight, constructed from galvanized steel core and continuous liquid- tight PVC jacket in accordance with BS 731 Part 1, not less than 20 mm diameter. B. Flexible conduit shall only to be used for final connection to items of fixed equipment subject to vibration or movement. C. All flexible conduits shall have a liquid-tight PVC jacket capable of withstanding 90oC cable operating temperatures. D. All fittings and accessories for liquid-tight flexible steel conduits shall be nylon jacketed.

E. Nylon jacketed brass adaptors shall be provided for connection at either end of the flexible conduit and should be of the compression type.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 5 of 11

D. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint of the metal surface/floor trunking. E. Covers for surface type cable trunking, suspended for fixed on surface of wall or under raised floor, shall be of the overlapping type and secured to the trunking by an approved type of fastening arrangement such as clips, etc. F. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, all trunking shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating as approved by the Engineer. G. Surface Cable trunking shall be single or multi-compartment as required. Where multi- compartment is used, vertical dividers shall be provided between the compartments which shall be welded to the trunking prior to galvanising. H. Heavy Duty UPVC trunking with clip on lid (all insulated) shall be used, if shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere, to replace multiple conduit runs. All PVC cable trunking and accessories shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. Only standard accessories fabricated by the manufacturer shall be used and no site fabrication shall be allowed.

2.5 INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES A. All interior outlet boxes shall be constructed in compliance with BS. B. Provide galvanized flat, rolled sheet steel interior outlets and switches wiring boxes of types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each respective location and installation. Construct threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. C. Terminal with screw shall be provided inside the box for grounding connection of all metallic outlet boxes with appropriate earth mark. D. Accessories for interior outlet boxes such as mounted brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, grounding connection, cable clamps, metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, etc. shall be compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring situations. E. Exposed or surface mounted boxes, when used with rigid steel conduits, shall have threaded hubs. These boxes shall be cast from feraloy or malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized.

2.6 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES A. All weatherproof outlet boxes shall comply with BS. B. Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes of types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each location and installation as shown on the Drawings. C. Weatherproof outlet boxes shall be provided with threaded conduit ends, terminal with screw for ground connection, cast metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps, suitable configures for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion resistant fasteners. D. All weatherproof outlet boxes shall be provided with corrosion free epoxy powder coat, to provide corrosion resistance with appropriate gasket.

2.7 JUNCTION/PULL BOXES AND CABINETS A. All junction and pull boxes shall be constructed in compliance with BS. B. Provide galvanized, code gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes with screws on cover, of types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each respective location and installation. C. Junction/pull boxes and cabinets shall be provided with welded seams and appropriate cast covers, equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, washers and terminal with screw for ground connection.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 6 of 11

D. Junction/pull boxes and cabinets/enclosures shall be provided with hinged covers, where required. E. Cabinets shall be provided with a reinforced steel back plate for mounting interior components, rigidity and accurate alignment.

2.8 FLOOR BOXES A. All floor outlet boxes shall be metallic and constructed in compliance with BS. B. Provide corrosion resistant, galvanized, sheet steel floor outlet boxes of the types, shapes, sizes and depths to suit each respective location and installation. C. The depth of floor outlet boxes shall be sufficient enough to accommodate conduit entries from sides and all kind of wiring devices with plugs from the top. D. The floor outlet boxes shall be waterproof when fully closed. Appropriate rubber protection shall be available for cable outlets from the floor base. E. The cover of the floor outlet boxes shall be able to be closed completely after installation of plugs and connecting devices inside the box. The cover shall be suitable for flush floor installation with provision of fixing carpet, vinyl sheet, etc. above the cover to match with the finish of the floor. F. Floor boxes shall have a panel opening and overall module depth shall be suitable for the required compartments. The box must provided with total Device Wiring Chamber. G. The box lid shall be a hinged style and constructed of polycarbonate material, available in standard colors of black, brown and gray. The lid shall provide a minimum of three removable cable guards for egress of power and communication workstation cables. The cable guards shall hold workstation cables in place with the lid either in the open or closed position. H. The trim flange shall be constructed of polycarbonate material. The hinged lid and trim flange shall be available for either carpet or tile floor applications. I. The wiring chamber shall provide an upper and a lower compartment. The top compartment shall be divided into four separate compartments to accommodate a combination of both power and communication wiring as indicated on drawings. These compartments shall be separated by use of integral; die cast aluminum built in dividers. The bottom compartment shall be available for either all power or all communication wiring. J. The box shall be secured to the raised floor by the use of two locking tabs. The locking tabs shall be integral to the box and adjusted by use of their locking screws.

2.9 CONDUIT BODIES A. All conduit bodies such as capped elbows and service entrance elbows shall be constructed in compliance with BS.

B. Conduit bodies and covers shall be constructed from the same material and shall have the same finish or protective coating as that of associated conduits. C. Provide galvanized conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes to suit respective locations and installation, with thread corrosion-resistant screws for fixing. D. The conduit bodies shall be appropriately threaded for the conduits and equipped with corrosion resistant screws for fixing the inspection cover. E. Weatherproof conduit bodies and covers shall be provided with corrosion free epoxy powder coat, to provide resistance again corrosion. Covers shall be casketed.

2.10 FITTINGS A. Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, covers of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 7 of 11

B. Covers of junction/pull boxes, cabinets/enclosures, etc. shall be of the same thickness and material as that of the box and shall be reinforced where required due to large size. Screws for covers shall be stainless steel or high quality brass.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAYS INSPECTION A. All Electrical Raceways including conduits and fittings shall be free from objectionable lines, stria- tions, bubbles, welds, and other manufacturing defects that would impair the service of the raceways. The bore of the conduits shall be circular in cross-section with smooth interior surfaces free from rough and flaky areas. The electrical raceways and fittings shall be free from all substances that injuriously effect any wire or cable covering. B. All the Electrical Raceways including conduit runs are shown diagrammatically on the Drawings to outline the general routing only. Any interference with pipes, HVAC ducts, structural members or other equipment shall be inspected and coordinated well before commencement of the installation of raceways. Deviations shall be made in accordance with the approval of the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Contract.

3.2 PVC CONDUITS INSTALLATION A. PVC conduits shall be used only where cast into slabs, built or chased into walls etc. Where conduits are surface run in ceiling voids, shaft spaces, plant rooms etc. galvanised RSC shall be used. Adaptation between PVC and metal conduits shall be through metal boxes. B. PVC conduits shall not be installed in locations exposed to direct sun light. C. Where conduit boxes are not to be fitted with accessories, they shall be fitted with cover plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used. D. PVC conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilising the following appropriate components as supplied by the conduit manufacturer: 1. Purpose made adaptors and accessories. 2. Permanent adhesive - Solvent cement to produce a rigid watertight joint when used with standard couplers and accessories. 3. Flexible adhesive - A non-hardening adhesive to be used where expansion facilities are required in long conduit runs, in conjunction with expansion coupler. Not to be used at building movement joints. E. PVC conduits up to 25 mm diameter may be bent cold with the use of the appropriate bending spring obtained from the conduit manufacturer. For larger size conduits, it is necessary to use heat or appropriate manufacturer's standard ready made bends. F. Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and contraction of the conduits under normal working temperature variations, as follows: 1. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of conduit exceeding 6 m in length. 2. Conduit shall be free to slide within saddles. 3. Allowance for expansion in cast in-situ installation is normally only required to effect structural movement at building expansion joints. G. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of 1.5 m in isolated positions or 1 m in accessible situations. Where working temperatures are high, this spacing shall be reduced accordingly. H. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large PVC adaptable boxes for junctions, which shall be readily accessible at all times. I. Care shall be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where excessive temperatures are likely to occur, special heat resistant boxes shall be used, i.e. of a pattern specifically designed to improve weight loading characteristics at high temperatures. J. Spacing (fill) factors shall be applied to all conduit in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE Wiring

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 8 of 11

Regulations, 17th Edition (BS7671). K. Do not install PVC conduits closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services. L. "Draw-in" boxes shall be installed in all conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length at a maximum 12 m spacing and shall be readily accessible at all times. M. Inspection elbows, bends or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation. N. Use extension rings where boxes are found to be not flush with the finished surface. Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt, dust or debris from entering the conduit system. O. All bends shall be made so that the PVC conduits shall not be damaged, and the internal diameter of the conduits shall not be effectively reduced. P. Not more than four 90 degree bends nor a total of 360 degree bends shall be made in one conduit run between outlets, fittings or outlet bodies including any bends located immediately at the start or end. Q. Install concealed conduits such that only two crossings at a given point are allowed within the slab to prevent any damage or cracking of slab. R. No conduit shall be allowed to run in the floor screed of toilets, kitchen, bathroom or any other wet area. S. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It shall be workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump upto a temperature of 149 oC or less. It shall not be hardened materially when exposed to air.

3.3 METAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Metal conduits either Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC) shall be installed in exposed locations as required. RCS shall be installed exposed on surface at all such locations where conduits are liable to be damaged mechanically. B. Threads for RSCs shall be of sufficient length to allow conduits to butt together within couplers. A minimum engagement of five (5) full threads shall be made at all fittings and accessories. C. Remove oil and grease from all threads of RSCs. D. Support all metal conduits at intervals of 1.5 m in isolated positions or 1 m in accessible situations. E. Do not install metal conduit closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services. F. All conduit boxes not to be fitted with accessories shall have metal cover plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used. G. 'Draw in' boxes shall be provided in conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length. 'Draw in' boxes shall be at a maximum 12 m spacing and readily accessible at all times. Adaptable junction boxes shall also be accessible at all times for inspection and maintenance. H. Exercise care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt and debris from entering the conduit system. I. Use extension rings where boxes are found not to be flush with the finished surface. J. Protect conduits and conduit accessories from rust and mechanical damage. Exposed conduit threads and damaged or rusty portion of metal conduits shall be painted, using an oxide undercoat and aluminium paint, after being cleaned to bare metal. K. Conduits installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete. L. Under no circumstances, shall any metal conduit be used as a circuit protective conductor (CPC). Every final sub-circuit shall incorporate its own separate Cu/PVC CPC. M. Spacing (fill) factors shall be applied to all conduits in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition (BS7671). N. Field bends shall be made with a hand bender for 1-1/2” (38mm) and smaller diameter metal con-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 9 of 11

duits only. Larger size conduits shall be bent with a machine bender or be factory supplied. Heat- ing of metal conduits to facilitate bending is not permitted. O. All bends shall be made so that metal conduits shall not be damaged, and the internal diameter of the conduit shall not be effectively reduced. The inner edge radius of all field bends shall not be less than the minimum allowable radius as BS. P. Not more than four 90 degree bends nor a total of 360 degree bends shall be made in one conduit run between outlets, fittings or outlet bodies including any bends located immediately at the start or end. Q. Conduits and elbow used for cables extending to outside of building shall be PVC coated rigid steel extending one meter from building foundation. A concrete encased PVC adapter shall be used in case cable extending will run in PVC ducts. Bells shall be provided on PVC horizontal stub outs. R. PVC conduits shall not be extended above grade. Where extensions of PVC conduits above grade are required, a PVC coated rigid steel transition bend having PVC/steel coupling on one end and threaded male or female adaptor on the other end. The PVC coated rigid steel transition bend or conduit shall extend minimum 150 mm above grade. A concrete envelope 100 mm high shall be formed around such risers to minimize corrosion at point of emergence. The top of the envelope shall be sloped for drainage. S. Verify exact stub up location and termination requirement for items and equipment being served, for all necessary power and control wiring. T. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, seal the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It shall be workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 1.7 oC, and shall not slump upto a temperature of 149 oC or less. It shall not be hardened materially when exposed to air. U. Where conduits turn out of, or penetrate, a slab, they shall be not less than 65 mm on centers. V. Location and sizing of conduit sleeves passing through floors and walls that are not shown on the Drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel unless indicated otherwise, extended 150 mm above floor and capped when not in use. Space between conduits and sleeves shall be filled with ductseal to a minimum of 50 mm deep at top and bottom of conduit sleeve. W. All metal conduits entering any gasketed boxes or gasketed equipment enclosure shall be provided and terminated with gasketed hubs with bonding screws. Whereas the metal conduits entering non-gasketed sheet-metal boxes or enclosures shall be provided and terminated with general purpose hubs.

X. Provide supports to alleviate stress on cables where they enter a conduit or other enclosure from the tray.

3.4 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS INSTALLATION A. All flexible conduits and fittings used shall be liquid-tight. B. Flexible conduits shall only be used in short lengths, of less than 1000 mm, in cases where a final connection is required to be made to a fixed item of equipment which is subject to vibration or thermal expansion. C. Flexible conduits shall be 1.25 x L in length, L being the direct distance between connection unit and fixed appliance, up to maximum length of 1 m. D. Purpose made glands shall be used on the ends of all lengths of flexible conduits. E. A separate Cu/PVC circuit protective conductor shall be included in all lengths of flexible conduits. F. Flexible conduits shall be installed so as not to incur undue mechanical strain, damage or excessive temperatures.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 10 of 11

3.5 SURFACE CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION A. Cable trunking shall be fixed securely to the building structure at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m. B. Where vertical runs of trunking exceed 3 m in length, pin racks shall be fitted. C. Spacing (fill) factors shall be applied to all cable trunking in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition (BS7671). D. For metal trunking installations, earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints. E. Metal trunking cut during installation shall have the cut ends painted with an oxide undercoat and an aluminium top coat. F. Where metal trunking is installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, the complete trunking installation shall be painted with a chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete. G. Expansion joints with gaps shall be incorporated in all cable trunking runs in excess of 6 m in length. External couplings shall have elongated slots and fixing holes shall be drilled oversize to give freedom of linear movement. Internal couplings shall be securely fixed at one end by use of thixotrophic adhesive leaving the other end free for linear movement. H. Bare copper or aluminium cables shall not be run in metal trunking.

3.6 BOXES PREPARATION

A. Determine exact locations of outlets on site after co-ordination with layouts for architectural, furniture and other equipment. B. The locations of junction/pull boxes and other fittings and accessories are generally not shown on the Drawings, but Contractor shall provide these in compliance with applicable requirements of IEE Wiring Regulations, ease of maintenance, manufacturer’s written instructions and recognized industry practices.

3.7 BOXES INSTALLATION A. Install all electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fitting with wire/cable and raceway installation work. C. Provide knockout closures in all types of electrical boxes to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. D. Install all types of boxes and conduit bodies at accessible locations to ensure easy installation and maintenance of electrical wiring. E. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface. F. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrate or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. G. Provide electrical and earth connections for all types of installed electrical boxes. H. Fastenings for all types of exposed/surface mounted electrical boxes shall not penetrate more than 30 mm into reinforced concrete beams or more than 20 mm into reinforced concrete joists and shall not contact main reinforcing steel. I. Boxes and supports shall be fastened with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel work. J. In open overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support. Support cast metal boxes having thread less connectors and sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or with bar hangers.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 33 (R0) September 2020 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 11 of 11

K. Where conduit supported outlet boxes are installed and conduit suspended from the structure with hangers, attach hangers to raceways on opposite sides of the box and shall be supported with an approved type fastener not more than 1 m measured each side from the box. L. Boxes installed outdoor on concrete or masonry walls, for vapor tight fixtures, shall be weatherproof type. M. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture or where shown on the Drawings. N. Interior or weatherproof outlet boxes shall be provided for each light fixture, receptacle, equipment connection and other conduit termination points. O. In suspended ceilings where outlet boxes support fixtures in which the ceiling suspension system does not have sufficient strength to prevent visible deflection of the ceiling surfaces, the boxes shall be supported by structural members, secured to building structure. P. Outlet box covers shall not be used to support fixtures. Q. Requirement of pull boxes shall be determined based on maximum allowable conduit runs, as described in Section 26 27 26. R. Where pull boxes (existing and new), are connected to conduits running underground in the site, they shall be provided with suitable provisions for drain.

3.8 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaries positioned as indicated on Drawings reflected ceiling plan. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

3.9 ADJUSTING A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.

3.10 CLEANING A. Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION 27 05 33

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Cable trays. B. Related Sections And Documents 1. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

2. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General.

3. Section 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling

4. Section 27 05 23 Television Services 5. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems. 6. Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communication Systems 7. Section 27 05 53 Identification for Communication Systems 8. Section 27 13 43 Communication Services Cabling 9. Section 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems 10. Section 27 51 16 Public Address and Mass Notification Systems 11. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. BS EN ISO 1416 B. BS 729. C. Local Codes and Standards. D. Telecom Service provider regulations and requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes. B. Method statement for system’s component installation, testing and commissioning. C. Product Data: Submit fittings and accessories. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Comply with requirements of Division 01. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 2 of 4

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum Five years documented experience. B. The firm installing cable trays for communication systems shall have had a minimum of 5 years documented prior successful installation experience with systems similar in scope to the system of this project.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cable Trays shall comply with the applicable standards of Local Standards Organization and BS. B. Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of cable trays to the building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single Manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All Cable Trays shall be delivered in factory pack wrapping and boxes and stored in a clean, dry space within the racks.

1.8 SPARE PARTS A. Supply as maintenance stock, additional consumable material of all types and sizes used, per Supplier’s recommendations.

1.9 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the Engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.10 WARRANTY A. The systems shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 15 years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

B. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CABLE TRAYS A. All cable trays shall be of heavy duty perforated type with return flange. B. All cable trays shall be manufactured from hot-dip zinc coated galvanized steel, with a standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350 g/m2 and Z2 bending grade. C. All accessories and fittings such as bends, tees, elbows, cross units and angles shall be of the same specification as that of the cable tray finish and shall be standard products from the same manufacturer as the cable tray. Site fabrication shall not be permitted. D. Cable trays and accessories shall be of a thickness of not less than: 1. 1.5 mm up to 300 mm width. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 3 of 4

2. 2.0 mm above 300 mm width. E. All fixing brackets, nuts and bolts shall be finished by hot dip galvanizing. F. Tinned copper earth continuity straps shall be provided at every joint of the cable tray. G. Where cable tray crosses building expansion joints, the tray shall be installed suitably to provide expansion / contraction with the building expansion. H. In outdoor locations and areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, all cable trays shall be painted with chlorinated rubber paint or PVC/Epoxy coating, as approved by the Engineer.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS A. Engraved Nameplates: black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!

PART 3 EXECUTION SCHEDULE 1 - INSTALLATION A. Install cable tray level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. B. Each run is to be completed before installation of cables. C. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. Fix trays using approved suspension rods or steel angle brackets at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m and generally as shown on the Drawings. D. Cables: Secure to tray with purpose made straps or saddles and arrange in one layer only, evenly spaced, or as shown on the Drawings, with minimum spacing of one diameter of the larger of the two adjacent cables or of a trefoil formation of single core cable circuit. E. Fasten cable tray supports securely to building structure as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," unless otherwise indicated.

F. Design supports, including fastenings to the structure, to carry the greater of the calculated load multiplied by a safety factor of 4. Submit calculations for approval. G. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to equipment. Support cable tray independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable tray on equipment enclosure. H. Install expansion connectors where cable tray crosses a building expansion joint and in cable tray runs that exceed 27 m. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings. I. Make cable tray connections using standard fittings. J. Locate cable tray above piping, unless accessibility to cable tray is required or unless otherwise indicated. K. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." L. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through fire stopping-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. M. Workspace: Install cable trays with sufficient space to permit access for installing cables. Minimum clearance of 250 mm is to be maintained between top of tray and ceiling, beams and other services and between tray in multi-tier formation. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 36 (R0) September 2020 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 4 of 4

N. Barriers: Where tray carries conductors of different systems, such as power, communications and data processing, or different insulation levels, such as 600V, 5000V, and 20, 000 V use separate cable tray. In case of absolute necessity, install insulating barriers to separate the systems after obtaining the Engineer’s approval. O. Install covers after installation of cable is completed. P. Install warning signs at 5centers along cable tray, located to be visible.

END OF SECTION 27 05 36

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes

1. Electrical identification for communication systems in items for easy operation and maintenance including, but not limited to the following: 1. Nameplates and labels. 2. Wire markers. 3. Color coding of raceways. 4. Circuit identification charts. 5. Cable identification tags. 6. Cable warning tapes. 7. Equipment warning/danger signs. B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

2. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.

3. Section 27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling.

4. Section 27 40 00 Audio- Video Systems.

5. Section 27 05 23 Television Services

6. Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communication Systems

7. Section 27 05 26 Grounding And Bonding For Communication Systems.

8. Section 27 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Communication Systems.

9. Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communication Systems

10. Section 27 51 16 Public Address and Mass Notification Systems

11. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls.

12. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. IEC 364 Electrical Installations B. BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition with all current additions and amendments. C. IEC 391 Marking of Insulated Conductors D. IEC 445 Equipment Terminals (Identification of Equipment Terminals and Terminations of Cer- tain Designated Conductors). E. IEC 446 Identification of Bare Conductors by Colors or Numerals.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 2 of 5

F. Local Codes and requirements of Authorities/ Telecom services provider.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Name and address of agents stating whether any manufacturing or fabrication is carried out in Oman. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function. C. Method statement for system’s component installation, testing and commissioning. D. Samples:

1. Submit two tags, actual size. 2. Submit two labels, actual size. 3. Submit two samples of each type of identification products applicable to project. 4. Submit two nameplates, 100 x 100 mm in size illustrating materials . E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Division 01. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of items the types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All items of communication Identification shall be comply with the requirements of BS and Local Standards Organization.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of Division 01.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 3 of 5

B. Install labels, nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

1.10 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Two Engineers.

1.11 WARRANTY A. The systems installations shall be warranted against workmanship defects for a period of Two years from the date of practical completion Certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates and labels shall be engraved on a three-layer 2 traffolyte plate having minimum thickness of 2 mm, securely screwed to the housing and have black letters on white background in English. B. The name plates and labels shall be required for each communication cabinets and devices/components. C. Lettering shall be block capitals standing: 6 mm high for identifying individual equipment and loads. 10 mm high for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

B. Labels using embossed adhesive tape with 6mm white letters on black background or transparent adhesive tape with 6 mm black letters, as selected by the Engineer, shall be used for identification of individual low current outlets, speakers, junction/pull boxes, communication boxes and fittings, etc.

2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Wire markers shall be split sleeve or tubing type. B. The wire markers shall be required for each conductor, pull boxes, outlets, junction boxes and each load connection. C. All communication circuits and control circuits shall require wire markers.

2.3 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS A Individual circuit identification charts shall be provided for all communication cabinets, control s, etc. giving following information as a minimum. Circuit numbers Outgoing terminal numbers. B. Charts shall be typed on A4 size sheets. They shall be enclosed in a clear plastic envelope and shall be securely fixed to the inside cover of the unit. Additional copies of the charts shall be in-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 4 of 5

cluded in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2.4 CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS All cables which exit from manholes, vaults, hand holes, shall be properly tagged or labeled. Tags shall be permanent, non-corrodible and clearly readable. Tags should include the information listed below for the various circuit categories: Cable identification tags for communication wires and cables circuits shall be of an opaque nylon material arranged to include a marker plate, non-releasing nylon ties, and cable fastening tail. One side shall be roughened to hold black nylon permanent ink. Identification shall be permanent and waterproof. The holding device shall be designed to allow the fastening tail to pass around the cable through the holding device, and prevent removal of the tail without cutting it loose from the marker. Cable identification shall be inscribed in Arabic and English.

2.5 CABLE WARNING TAPES A. For underground cables use warning tapes according to the standard practice of Authority and applicable international standards. B. Cable warning tapes shall be of polythene, not less than 150 mm wide and at least 0.25 mm thick. C. For buried low current/communication cables or duct banks, use warning tapes as per the standard practice of Local Telecom Supplier and applicable international standards.

2.7 LANGUAGE A. The English language shall be used for all labeling and charts.

2.8 LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION A. Each item of the communication Installation shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label/name plate clearly indicating its function giving at least the following information: 1. Manufacturer’s name. 2. Country of origin. 3. Type / model number or code. 4. Compliance mark of the international standard(s).

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting. B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with cor-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 05 53 (R0) September 2020 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 5 of 5

rosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panels in finished locations. C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. D. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation as indicated on Drawings. E. Stencil Installation: 1. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

END OF SECTION 27 05 53

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 10

PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Structured Cabling Systems supporting the following network topologies; Ethernet 10BaseT, 100BaseT, and 1000BaseT standards including outlet plates, structured grade unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable, and fiber optics cables (FO). 2. Electrical systems including rough-in, pathways, conduit, boxes and backboards. B. Related Sections and Documents 1. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls.

2. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

3. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Work Results, General.

4. Section 27 05 23 Television Services

5. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems

6. Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communication Systems

7. Section 27 05 33 Conduits and Boxes for Communication Systems.

8. Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communication Systems

9. Section 27 05 53 Identification for Communication Systems

10. Section 27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment.

11. Section 27 40 00 Audio-Video Systems

12. Section 27 51 16 Public Address and Mass Notification Systems

13. Section 28 05 26 Grounding And Bonding For Electronic Safety And Security Systems

14. Section 28 13 00 Security Systems-Access Control System

15. Section 28 16 00 Security - Burglar Alarm, Emergency Alarm & Call Systems

16. Section 28 23 00 Security Systems-Video Surveillance Systems

17. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/TIA-568-C: Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, published 2009. B. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2009. C. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard, 2009. D. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, 2008. E. ANSI/TIA-862: Building Automation Systems Cabling for Commercial Buildings, 2002.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 10

F. ANSI/TIA-569-B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. G. ANSI/TIA-606-A: Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructures, 2002. H. ANSI/TIA-758-A: Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, 2005. I. International Standards Organization/International Electro Technical Commission. J. ISO/IEC11801, Amendment 1, 2009: Generic Cabling for Customer Premises, Class EA. K. Underwriters Laboratories (ULÒ) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program. L. ANSI J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. M. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 12th Edition. N. NECA / BICSI 568 Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling. O. UL 910, Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke Density Values for Electrical and Optical Fiber Cables in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air, 1997. P. UL1685 Vertical-Tray Fire Protection and Smoke Release Test for Electrical and Optical Fiber Cables. Q. IEEE.1100-2005, Powering and Grounding of Electronic Equipment. R. BS 7671. S. IEC. T. Local Codes and Standards.

1.3 SYETM DESCRIPTION A. The communication cabling network specified under this section shall serve the project Local Area Network (LAN) for computers, Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP), IPCCTV, IPTV, Burglar Alarm / Panic Alarm System … etc Networks within the building. B. The communication cabling network shall provide end-to-end connectivity from a network PC, VOIP telephone, IPCCTV camera respective server. C. The communication cabling network horizontal cabling of all networks shall be identical with CAT6 A UTP cables and RJ45 outlets for each system component. Locations of RJ45 outlets are as indicated in the layout drawings. However, Contractor shall allow for few additional outlets if required, as an outcome of detailed engineering of other low current systems by the proposed specialist’s vendors. D. Horizontal cables from all systems components shall be terminated at RJ-45 patch panels for data. All systems Patch Panels shall be located in a cabinet rack in the IT room in each floor, to allow flexibility in converting outlets from any system to another, as required in the future. E. Systems Backbone cable shall be multi-mode multi strands fiber optic (FO) cables as indicated in drawings and shall originate from the Main Data cabinet in the server room. Fiber optic cables shall be terminated at both ends by suitably sized fiber optic patch panels. FO patch panels shall be housed in the same 19” equipment cabinet as RJ45 patch panels. F. Contractor shall ensure that no horizontal cable run from patch panel to outlet exceeds 90m being the Cat6A limits. In the event of any outlets exceeding the limit Contractor shall allow for multi mode FO cable including suitable FO outlet to RJ45 outlet convertor.. G. Labeling of outlets and connecting hardware: 1. Identify each outlet and associated termination point on the blocks with the following label format. Labeling shall be by a permanent labeling method. The room number identification shall be the final room number provided by the Engineer. 2. Color code for outlets shall be as follows: a. Structured jacks yellow jack inserts Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 10

H. System Performance Criteria

Method Contractor’s No. Criteria Description Statement Comments 1. Time Tested The system integrator is expected to provide a complete solution that has been installed in communal, residential, commercial and retail developments. The devices to be proposed should also have a track record with good customer feedback. 2. Availability The solution shall be designed and installed to operate with a minimum availability of 99.8%. 3. Reliability The solution shall be designed and installed to operate with a liability in excess of 99.9%, meaning that 99.9% of events are processed correctly. 4. Safety The solution shall be designed and installed in such a way to allow the safe installation, operation and maintenance of the system. 5. Electrical Compat- The solution shall be fully compatible ibility with the electrical distribution system at the development. 6. Interoperability The ability to easily integrate with many partnered and non-partnered vendors. Proprietary and standardized non-proprietary systems are acceptable provided that a means of easily integrating the various systems is available. The demonstration of strong dealer network will be evaluated. 7. Flexibility Being able to replace 3rd party devices (non-core components) to different models and brands. 8. Upgradeability The ability to access the system remotely for frequent firmware upgrades by system operators, with a limited time delay. 9. Scalability/ Ex- The ability to add new features to the pandability system and easily integrate them without any added cost. Systems proposed should not have any limitations

to licenses/upgrades/access rights. There should not be any annual recur- ring maintenance cost for software upgrades. 10. Response Time Instant response to actions and events, triggered manually by the

press of a switch, or automatically by pre-defined alerts. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 10

Method Contractor’s No. Criteria Description Statement Comments 11. Synchronization Provide an instant response time for the two-way communication among the devices. 12. Redundancy At least one other redundant line of communication should be designed in case of line break, ensuring that the remaining system components are

backed up and run normally when one component fails. UPS should be provided to back-up the system in case of power failure. 13. Robustness The stability of the communication architecture measured by instant re-

sponse time, accuracy on synchronization, and redundant failure points. 14. User-Friendliness The usability (ease-of-use) of all interfaces, and consistency across the different interface types. 15. Variety of Inter- The ability to add or replace user interfaces faces and provide a consistent, easy-

to-use design across all types, such as PCs, PDAs, and internet browsers. 16. Remote Access The access hierarchy for the different user groups, and the usability and ca-

business day replacement, etc. 21. Innovation Innovative solutions of any form.

22. Latency

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 10

Method Contractor’s No. Criteria Description Statement Comments 23. Resiliency

24. Value for Money

M. Electromagnetic Compatibility 1. All equipment and systems installed under this Contract shall meet following specifications on electromagnetic compatibility: a. Interference immunity according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-3 b. Emitted interference according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-2 N. Interface to other systems: Communication Services cabling shall be interfaced to BMS, fire alarm system, security systems and other low current systems as shown on the drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete sets of shop drawings for the proposed system. The submittal shall be neatly bound in a three ring or comb type binder, with protective covers. The cover must identify the project, system, date and vendor name. The submittal shall consist of, but not be limited to the following items: 1. Title sheet showing the Contractor's name, address, phone number and date submitted. Clear area shall be provided on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps. 2. Material list showing quantity, manufacturer and description of each item being furnished. 3. Engineered riser diagrams showing all distribution equipment, connections and calculated tap values and signal strength levels at each device and outlet. 4. Product data sheets with complete technical data for each item being furnished. B. Method statement for system’s component installation, testing and commissioning. C. Compliance with Project Specifications: The Contractor shall comply fully with all requirements issued in the Contract and provide a full compliance matrix with proof of compliance. Partial Compliance and non-compliance must also be documented. Example:

Section Type of Compliance Supporting evidence 1.1 Comply (Y) See attached 1.2 Partial “Not Fully” Com- Only meets section 1 see attached pliance (NF) 1.3 No Compliance (N) Does not meet requirements 1.4 Not Applicable (NA) Not applicable to the project

D. Submit the actual cable test data as generated by the manufacturer for the stock to be utilized for construction. Contractor shall review each submittal prior to submission, and check for compliance with Contract Documents. Corrections shall be noted. Mark with approval stamp prior to submission. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 10

Submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp will be returned without action. G. Shop drawings and product data shall include, but not be limited to: - Copper Cabling. - Fibre Cabling. - Coaxial Cabling. - Low Voltage Protection Devices. - Fibre Connector Housings. - Faceplates. - Jacks. - Modular Patch Panels. - Wiring blocks and other connection details. - Racks. - Cable Tray. - Cable Runway. - Firestop Details. - Technology earthing systems description and materials. - CATV/Broadband Distribution System Components. H. The submittals shall be reviewed only for general compliance and not for dimensions, quantities, etc. The submittals that are returned shall be used for procurement. The responsibility of correct procurement remains solely with Contractor. The submittal review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions and deviations from the Contract requirements. I. Contractor shall note in red on the submittal any change in design or dimension on the items submitted including changes made by the Manufacturer that may differ from catalogue information. K. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in an electronic format on CD. The file format shall be Adobe portable data file (pdf) or provide software to enable viewing of files of the other formats at no additional cost to Employer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with reference standards listed in this section.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor Qualification 1. For the following items Contractors shall provide written confirmation and documentary proof with their bid response, failure to adhere to this will lead to disqualification from the bid submission. 2. Contractor shall be fully qualified to perform installations as described on the Drawings and within these Specifications. The following qualifications apply to all Work unless otherwise noted. Employer reserves the right to wave any or all of these requirements. 3. Contractor shall have been active in bidding, being awarded, and performing Work consistent with that indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications for a period not less than five (5) years. The Contractor is to provide a list of projects undertaken in the last 1 year, with the customer contact and Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 7 of 10

references provided. 4. Contractor shall possess current training and certifications by the specified manufacturers for the installation and maintenance of the low voltage cabling systems, Furthermore Contractor must possess all respective certifications prior to bidding any project. 5. Certifications which are Employer specific and not global shall not be recognized by Employer. The Contractor is to provide printed copies of each certified Engineer employed by the Contractor. The Contractor is to provide a letter fromt the Manufacturer confirming the Technician Name, Company Name. 6. Contractor to submit Manufacturer’s training and certification requirements and Contractor shall show full compliance to such requirements. 7. Contractor shall maintain an installation staff whose sole function is the installation of low voltage cabling and equipment. 8. Contractor shall not utilize apprentice or trainee personnel for the termination of low voltage cabling. Furthermore, apprentices or trainees may only assist in the pulling of low voltage cabling. The primary laborer for the pulling of low voltage cabling must be a certified installer. 9. The technicians responsible for pulling cable shall be monitored and supervised by the Contractors. Staff certified by the Manufacturer. The technicians responsible for the termination and testing of all cabling shall possess a current Installation and Maintenance certification by the Manufacturer.

1. 7 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warrant that the Work shall be free of defects in workmanship for a period of Two years from the date of Acceptance. Warrantee for materials is as specified in the following items.

B. Contractor shall promptly and at its own cost and expense correct work that is rejected by the Engineer or work that fails to conform to the requirements of these Specifications Contractor shall assign to Engineer all manufacturers’ warranties relating to any of the equipment and materials, specifically the respective manufacturers’ extended warranties.

1.8 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Three Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the Engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and operation of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Data Outlets :- 4P UTP cat6 cables in P.V.C. rigid conduits of 1” diam, complete with boxes and all needed accessories, to be installed for every outlet from the data communication cabenit in resourse room of the school extension to the data outlets in class rooms or where needed according to drawings. Data outlet should be provided with RJ45 face plate. The work shall be supplied, installed and connected as shown in drawings and specifications..

2.2 Data Boxes :- PVC conduits of Data outlets for every floor shall be connected to metallic Draw Box recessed in wall at suitable height from floor , and shall be supplied with a suitable door. Box and door shall be powder painted from inside and outside. Data draw Boxes in different floors shall be connected to main data box in resourse room or Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 8 of 10

computer lab using empty PVC conduits of 50mm diameter (shop drawings shall be submitted before starting the work showing routs and all necessary details for approval).

2.3 Wiring and commission of computer network system shall be done by contractor according to drawings. - All data outelets shall be numbered and labelled from both ends. - Structured Cable:- Cable to be used in computer network are unshielded twisted pair (UTP) category “6” 4 pair, Compliant with TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1, and shall be installed and connected directily from data outlets to patch panel mounted in communication cabinet as shown in drawings - Face plates:- Computer outlets face plates support more than on snab in part for the connector modules of RJ 45 for computers.

2.4.Communication Cabinet :

Wall-Mounted Communication Cabinet. It shall be installed & mounted at 2 mt. from finish floor level .

Component Specification Dimension Width Standard 19” EIA Height ≥ 9U Depth ≥ 60 cm Door Type Glass or Plexi Power distribution strip ≥ 3 pin Socket, Mounted into the cabinet. Security Key lock Cooling ≥ 4” Fans (2 Nos.) Warranty 3 Years, Parts & Labor (On- Site)

2.5 Patch panel : - 24 Port category 6 UTP - Should be mounted into the Communications Cabinet . - An empty PVC conduits of Ф 32 mm with pull wire shall be installed and connected from communication cabient (CC) to out door (40X40) cm manhole as shown in drawings.

2.6 Metal Frame: - Aluminum - Three cut outs to accommodate 8 ports each

2.7 Front Bezel: - bezels of 8 ports each - High impact FR grade ABS - Two side bezels

Note:- Contractor shall have to label both end of each cable Use cable ties (not tape) to keep cables in the same location together. Stay at least 1m away from fluoresant light and other source of electrical interference. Lacing of patch panel should be accordance with best international standards, such that no strains of cables behind or inside the cabinet. From patch panel side, cable length should be adequate for easily and tidy connections. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 9 of 10

Tests: Testing of computer network, should include but not limited to the following:- a- Net- work mapping, attenuation of all cables. b- Resistance and connectivity (pass or fail). c- To determine (test) length of cables. d- Print out of the results.

2.8 Cable

2.8. a HDMI Cable

- Silver plated copper conductor and 4 layers of shielding for optimum signal quality - shielded high precision full metal connector - High Speed HDMI™ for 3D and HDTV up to 4K (2160p) - Integrated Ethernet channel saves additional network or audio cables - 24 carat gold plated contacts for minimum transfer resistances

2.8. b VGA Cable

- Silver plated copper conductor and 4 layers of shielding for optimum signal quality - Analog video / monitor cable with VGA connector (Mini-D-Sub) - shielded high precision full metal connector - supports a maximum resolution of up to 2560 x 1600 (WQXGA) - 24 carat gold plated contacts for minimum transfer resistances

2.8.c Cat 6

- UTP Flexible CAT 6 cable. - ISO/IEC 11801 and EIA/TIA 568B.2 certificated. Cable: - O.D.: 8.5 mm - Weight: 7.10 Kg/100 m - Operation. Temperature: -20°C/+70°C Jacket: - Material: PVC (Double layer) - Conductor: 4 x 2

2.8. d BACKBONE CABLING A. Data/ voice Backbone Fiber Optics backbone cabling will link main IT cabinet with IT cabinets within each floor. B. Optical Fiber cable Enhanced multi-mode fibers are required for the transmission of high rate data signals and to avoid Limitations due to bottlenecks in the longest building and campus backbone links.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be by installers trained in the installation of Structured and extended performance data grade cable and equipment. B. All installing personnel shall be trained in the proper installation of extended performance data cable prior to installation by outside training course or in-house training program. C. All cables, outlets shall be installed in a neat professional manner: Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building In Amman 27 21 00 (R0) September 2020 DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK EQUIPMENT Page 10 of 10

1. Device plates shall be vertically plumb with edges flush to the wall and covering the outlet box. 2. Cable terminations shall comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and industry guide lines. 4. Installer shall observe factory installation guidelines for pulling tension, bending radius, kinking, and proximity to lighting and other electrical equipment for all cables. D. Cables shall be concealed within conduit or raceway below finished ceilings or in the floor trunk, and continuously below exposed structural ceilings as shown in drawings. E. Cables routed above accessible ceilings and in utility areas shall be installed in cable trays, floor trunk and in conduits provided in the building. F. All communications outlet boxes shall be finished with a cover plate, including outlets in modular furniture. Blank plates shall be provided for all boxes that are not cabled at this time as indicated on the plans.

3.2 GROUNDING A. Grounding system is provided by electrical work of the building project and the overall resistance is not less than 1 ohm.

3. 3 TESTING

END OF SECTION 27 13 43

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 40 00 (R0) September 2020 Audio Visual System Page 1 of 7

Audio Video SYSTEM

Part 1 : GENERAL The Audio video and Conference system shall be designed and manufactured to meet all requirements needed for the modern up to-date technology to suit the function of the project. The design drawings and technical specifications presented by the Engineer specifies the general minimum requirements for Audio video and Conference system proposed of this project. The Audio video system shall include but not limited to:

- 240 Watt Mixer Amplifier. - Recessed Mount Ceiling Loudspeaker. - DYNAMIC Microphone. - Gooseneck Microphone. - 3,100 lumens WXGA compact projector - 140" Motorized Screen - Rack Cabinet

1. Submittal A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including catalogues, sufficiently detailed for engineering purposes, and with full description of Components and operating parameters.

B. Tests: Equipment is to be tested for quality and operation at the factory, and test certificates and reports, certified by an official testing authority, are to be submitted to the Engineer before dispatch of equipment to site.

2. Approved Manufacturers EUROPE U.S.A Korea JAPAN

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 40 00 (R0) September 2020 Audio Visual System Page 2 of 7

3. PRODUCTS: 3.1. Audio Video System 3.1.1. 240W Mixer Amplifier: 240 watt mixer amplifier which is possible to control the output each speaker zone using an At- tenuator. Features - SPEAKER SELECT (5ZONE SPEAKER OUTPUT) Six speaker select switches enable you to select any combination of up to five speakers. - SELECTABLE PRIORITY MUTING Switchable audio signal priority for MIC Channels 1, siren, Chime and Telephone input over other input sources. - MONITOR SPEAKER You can monitor output signal by using the monitor speaker, and can control the monitor level on front panel by 3 step lever switch. - ANNOUNCEMENT CHIME Convenient four-tone chime for use with announcements. - REMOTE CONTROL INPUT Individual speaker zones can be selected and chime can be operated by wired remote control. - EM(EMERGENCY) When EM switch is pressed in emergencies, EM broadcasting stored in VOICE IC is output- ted. - REMOTE POWER You can turn on/off amplifier by remote control. - INDIVIDUAL INPUT GAIN CONTROLS Rear-panel gain controls for each input channel for total control of individual levels.

Specification:

Amplifier Section Rated Output Power (THD 1%) 240W(RMS) (Amp In@1kHz, 4Ω Speaker Zone 1~5 Output Load Output) 50W MAX Input Sensitivity/ Impedance 1V/20kΩ

S/N Better than 85dB Frequency Response 80Hz~18kHz (at 1kHz Half Power Output, ±3dB) Mic Input Section Input Sensitivity/ Impedance –60dBV/600Ω (Mic 1~4 In@1kHz, S/N Better than 55dB Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 40 00 (R0) September 2020 Audio Visual System Page 3 of 7

Preamp Out) Frequency Response (±3dB) 120Hz~10kHz

Tone Control ±12dB (Bass:100Hz,Treble:10kHz) Phantom Power +24VDC

Line Input Section Input Sensitivity/Impedance –30dBV/10kΩ (Line 1~2 In@1kHz, S/N Better than 65dB Preamp Out) Frequency Response (±3dB) 80Hz~15kHz Tone Control ±12dB (Bass:100Hz,Treble:10kHz) Mic Input Sensitivity/Impedance –60dBV/600Ω Remote Amp Section (Remote In@1kHz, S/N Better than 55dB Preamp Out) Frequency Response (±3dB) 120Hz~10kHz Tel In Section 0.3V/600Ω(USA/Canada) (Tel In@1kHz, Pre- Input Sensitivity/Impedance amp Out) 0.775V/600Ω(EC & Associated) S/N Better than 65dB Frequency Response (±3dB) 330Hz~3kHz Pre Amp Out(Mic 1~4, Line 1~2, Tel In, Remote 0dBV/600Ω In) T.H.D Less than 0.5% Record Out –10dBV/3kΩ Operating Temperature –10°C~40°C

3.1.2. Recessed Mount Ceiling Loudspeaker. 6W powered speaker equipped with shock-resistant housing, 165mm full-range loudspeaker chassis and a 100V transformer with 3 power adjustments. The powder coated metal similar in RAL 9016 guarantees long-term stability. Quick and easy mounting with spring clamps and short tension distance.

Specification:

Power 6/3/1,5 W Frequency Response 58 - 24.000 Hz Frequency Range 64 - 19.800 Hz SPL 1W/1m, peak 97,5 dB SPL Pmax/1m, peak 105,3 dB Sensitivity 1W/1m 94,9 dB Dispersion (-10dB) 180° (h) / 180° (v)

Temperature range -20 / +80 °C 3.1.3. DYNAMIC Microphone.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 40 00 (R0) September 2020 Audio Visual System Page 4 of 7

Dynamic handheld microphone with floor stand.

Features - Super Cardioid pick-up pattern

- Multi-Angle anti roll Head (MAH)

- Triple layer pop filter

- Shock-mount system cuts down handling noise

- Includes Integrated On/Off Switch

- High sensitivity, low impedance (600Ω)

- Frequency response tailored for multi-purpose speech

- Shocks and vibration-resistant metal body

Specification:

Type Dynamic (Moving Coil) Polar Pattern Super Cardioid Frequency Response 50Hz-17kHz -75dB ± 3dB Sensitivity (0dB=1v/uBar at 1kHz) Output Impedance 600Ω ± 30% (at 1kHz)

3.1.4. Gooseneck Microphone.

Gooseneck microphone meets the design requirements for speech reinforcement in conferences and podium PA applications. Desktop microphone base especially designed for use with condenser type phantom powered gooseneck microphones equipped with a standard 3-pin XLR. Portable design enables quick and easy setup on podiums, tables and desktops. LED light illu- minates only when the microphone is active.

Features

- Condenser Gooseneck Microphone Table Stand

- Crackle-free switching LED Indicator

- Stability Weighted Balance

Specification: Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 40 00 (R0) September 2020 Audio Visual System Page 5 of 7

Transducer Type Electret Condenser Frequency Response 60Hz ~ 17kHz Impedance 250Ω Polar Pattern cardioid Sensitivity -39dB (11.2mV)/Pa at 1KHz THD (Max SPL for 1%) 124dB SPL Dynamic Range 99dB Self Noise 25dB SPL A-weighted On/Off Status LED Indicator Power DC(Phantom) 12-48V

3.1.5. 3,100 lumens WXGA compact projector

Features - Bright, clear images with maximum 3,100 lumens color light output. - 3LCD Bright Era™ technology. - Powerful 16W audio. - WXGA resolution. - Advanced energy-saving features. - Energy efficient with long-lasting lamp life up to 10,000 hours. - Quiet operation. - Control and management from any networked PC. - Remote Control app for iOS/Android. - USB media viewer. - Dual HDMI inputs.

Specification:

- Display System 3 LCD system - Size of effective display area 0.59”(15mm) x 3 Bright Era LCD Panel Aspect ratio 16:10 - Number of pixels 3,072,000 (1280x800 x 3) pixels - Projection lens  Focus Manual  Zoom Powered/Manual Manual  Zoom - Ratio Approx. x 1.3  Throw Ratio 1.37:1 to 1.80:1 - Light source  Type

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 40 00 (R0) September 2020 Audio Visual System Page 6 of 7

Ultra high pressure mercury lamp  Wattage 225 W type - Recommended lamp replacement time  Lamp mode: High 4000 H  Lamp mode: Standard 6000 H  Lamp mode: Low 10000 H - Filter cleaning / replacement cycle (Max.) 10,000H - Screen size 30" to 300" (0.76 m to 7.62 m) (measured diagonally) - Light output  Lamp mode: High 3100 lm  Lamp mode: Standard 2200 lm  Lamp mode: Low 1900 lm - Color light output  Lamp mode: High 3100 lm  Lamp mode: Standard 2200 lm  Lamp mode: Low 1900 lm - Contrast ratio (full white / full black) 20000:1 - Speaker Speaker 16 W (monaural) - Displayable scanning frequency  Horizontal 15 kHz to 92 kHz  Vertical 48 Hz to 92 Hz - Display resolution  Computer signal input Maximum display resolution: 1600 x 1200 dots, fV: 60Hz  Video signal input NTSC, PAL, SECAM, 480/60i, 576/50i, 480/60p, 576/50p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/60p, 1080/50p E.3.1.6. 140" Motorized Screen:

140" (300x187 cm) Motorized screen Matte White fabric.

3Technical specifications

- Silent motor system provides a smooth and quiet operation. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 27 40 00 (R0) September 2020 Audio Visual System Page 7 of 7

- Power: 6 Nm. - Speed: 17 rpm. - Power supply: 230V / 50 Hz. - Consumption: 137 W. - Certification: IMQ - Totally manufactured from aluminum. - Smart design and easy to install. - Housing painted with white epoxy powders (RAL 9010). - On/Off switcher included. - Flame - retardant projection surfaces - classification M1, M2 and B1.

***END OF SECTION***

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 1 of 28

8.1 PART 1 - GENERAL 8.1. 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes

1. The Contractor shall provide an IP closed circuit television (IPCCTV) system and accessories, complete and operable, in accordance with the following specifications, drawings, BOQs and Contract Documents.

2. Client’s objective is to have one intelligent/integrated security management system managing all the diverse portfolios.

3. Electrical and mechanical systems including rough-in, pathways, conduit, boxes and backboards.

4. The Contractor shall supply, install and commission IP CCTV system as ONE package, having the following as a minimum:

a. Digital Video Recording & Network Workstations with management/ operation software. b. Network Video Recorders c. Digital (IP) color camera, PTZ , dome type- indoor. d. Digital (IP) color camera, fixed , dome type- indoor. e. Digital (IP) color camera, PTZ, dome type- outdoor with wall bracket/ pole. f. Digital (IP) color camera, fixed, dome type- outdoor with wall bracket/ pole. g. Digital (IP) color camera, fixed type, mini dome to be mounted in lift cabinet. h. LCD Displays i. CCTV systems Consoles & Racks j. All accessories & sundries

8.1.2 REFERENCES A. Contractor shall propose seamless integration with open industry protocols and related systems’ APIs, such as the integration between surveillance systems, access control, lighting, fire alarms and BMS. Security systems should be certified by internationally recognized associations such as the Open Network Video Inter- face Forum (ONVIF), Physical Security Interoperability Alliance (PSIA) British Standards Institution (BSI), Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA), and ISO Physical & Environmental Security.

B. IEC.

C. NEC National Electrical Code; Article 800 Communication Circuits.

D. BS.

E. Local Codes, Standards and Regulations

8.1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Surveillance IPCCTV system is required to ensure effective surveillance of an area as well as create a tam- perproof record for post event analysis. The System shall provide an online display of video images on LCD monitors located at security room.

B. System should facilitate viewing of live and recorded images and controlling of all cameras by the authorized users present in the LAN.

C. System should provide inter-operability of hardware, OS, software, networking, printing, database connectivity, reporting, and communication protocols. System expansion should be possible through off-the-shelf available hardware.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 2 of 28

D. Proposed IP CCTV system shall be an open standard based integrated system with IP network centric functional and management architecture aimed at providing high-speed manual/automatic operation for best performance.

E. System shall use video signals from various types of indoor/outdoor IP CCD color cameras installed at different locations, process them for viewing on workstations/monitors at Asset’s Security room.

F. Mouse-Keyboard shall be used for Pan, Tilt, Zoom, and other functions of desired cameras.

G. System shall have digital CCD Color video Cameras with individual built-in IP address, Network Video recorders (NVR/CAMERA SERVER), Network attached storage (NAS)/ Raid backup device for recording, Application software, Color Video Monitors, workstation for System Administration/ Management/ Mainte- nance etc.

H. The recording resolution and frame rate for each camera shall be user programmable.

I. Surveillance IPCCTV System shall operate on 240 V, 50 Hz single -phase power supply.

J. All the control equipments e.g. servers, NVR/CAMERA SERVER, NAS/Raid backup device, etc. shall be provided in standard Racks.

K. Security Room will have workstation along with controllers for Camera operation. For monitoring purposes, Video monitors/ LCD monitors shall be setup with suitable mounting arrangements, as per user requirements. Facility for viewing and controlling all the cameras at various other locations, as required, shall be provided.

L. There shall be a Control System with Video Control Software to manage all the video surveillance devices.

M. At any stage of construction, the Engineer may ask the Contractor to provide more cameras at additional costs. The Contractor’s system shall be capable of reasonable expansion.

N. In certain areas of the building there should be both fixed and motorized cameras, the fixed cameras shall cover totally the required area, the motorized cameras will be used in emergency case and focusing.

O. All IPCCTV cameras shall be with motion detection function which shall activate the camera once a motion is detected, this function shall be possible to be switched on/off from the control console so that the camera will be continuously activated., Programming of cameras which shall be activated via motion detection and which shall be continuously activated shall be done at site in coordination with the system installer, the En- gineer and the Security Officer of the building or the Client’s representative.

P. Each elevator shall have mini dome IPCCTV camera (all elevators cameras shall be connected to the IPCCTV system). The Contractor shall coordinate with the VT Contractor.

Q. The IPCCTV system network video recorder (NVR) shall be provided at Asset’s security room.

R. NVR at shall have enough HD capacity for recording of all cameras for minimum 30 days.

S. The system components shall be locked and shall be accessed only to authorized person.

T. The CCTV system shall be interfaced and linked to fire alarm system, BMS and all to other security systems (Access Control System,…etc)) so that once an alarm is initiated in any space the CCTV camera in that space shall be automatically activated and focus on the position of the alarm initiating device.

U. CCTV camera external Power supply: External Power supply / Transformer within metal box are included in price of those cameras which need external power supply.

X. Client Expectation:

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 3 of 28

The Contractor shall provide a method statement for each of the system performance criteria to Illustrate how these requirements will be met for each of the equipments/materials being proposed.

Y. Observation Criteria The selection of camera and lens for any location shall be based on certain observation criterion. The observation criterions are classified into four general categories which are based on the relative size of 1 6 meter tall person appearing on a monitor screen - Monitor & Control: The relative size of the person as seen on the screen shall be minimum 5% of the screen height. - Detect: The relative size of the person as seen on the screen shall be minimum 10% of the screen height. - Observe: The relative size of the person as seen on the screen shall be minimum between 25% and 30% of the screen height. - Recognize: The relative size of the person as seen on the screen shall be minimum 50% of the screen height. - Identify: The relative size of the person as seen on the screen shall be minimum 100% of the screen height. AA. Live Viewing Requirement 1. All live viewing shall be real time and of high resolution. The resolution of the CCTV monitors used shall exceed the highest resolution camera used.

2. The number of monitors in the control room will depend on the number of cameras, and the integration with other security systems. Alarm integration shall be designed to assist and alert the operators on alarm conditions. Integration shall initiate features such as automatic video pop up and display of alarm locations on site maps, etc on the operator Graphic User Interface (GUI).

3. For IP CCTV systems all live viewing shall be minimum 4 CIF / 25 frames per second

BB. Electromagnetic Compatibility 1. All equipment and systems installed under this Contract shall meet following specifications on electromagnetic compatibility:

a. Interference immunity according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-3

b. Emitted interference according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-2

8.1.4 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall submit the followings: A. Company Profile.

B. Experience/ Commitments:

1. Similar work experience of installing IP CCTV systems:

The bidder shall illustrate the references of IP CCTV systems projects to prove his capabilities and experiences in designing, supplying, installing, testing, commissioning, maintaining, and supporting the systems, and supporting the client in any requirements needed post-project handover. This should include case studies describing the following: a. Case Study Reference Number. b. Project Name. c. Client Name. d. Project Location. e. Project Value. f. Project Duration. g. Scope of Work. h. Customer Support. i. Challenges & Lessons Learnt.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 4 of 28

Minimum of one case study shall be presented for each of the below, following the above format: a. Experience in similar development segment (i.e. Hotels, retail, mixed-use, residential, etc.). b. Experience in providing fully integrated solutions of IP CCTV systems. c. Experience in enhancing IP CCTV systems.

2. Current commitments/ obligations: The bidder shall present all current commitments and obligations in the following format: a. Project Name. b. Client Name. c. Project Location. d. Project Duration and Target Start & End Dates. e. Scope of Work.

3. Confirmation to having fully equipped & staffed local administration office & Engineering service center. 4. Confirmation to having local service center. 5. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

C. Strategy for QA/QC:

1. QA/QC approach/procedure documents. The bidder shall provide a detailed description of QA/QC policies, method statements, procedures, people, resources, and forms used to manage IP CCTV systems design &/or installation projects.

2. Testing procedures: The bidder shall provide a detailed description of testing policies, method statements, procedures, program, people, resources, forms and sub-contractors used to manage each of the following testing procedures. a. Factory acceptance tests (FAT). b. Pre-installation tests. c. Site acceptance tests (SAT). d. User tests and user-defined customization. e. 3rd party tests to be provided by both the vendors , Contractor witnessed by the Enigneer.

3. Commissioning of works: The bidder shall provide a detailed description of commissioning of works’ method statements, procedures, program, and forms.

4. Completion & acceptance certificate: The bidder shall provide the certificate forms that would be issued for completion of works and acceptance of works. The forms should include a list of statements to any additional matters and/or concerns that have been raised as part of the works. 5. Examples of installation & record drawings: The bidder shall provide an example of IP CCTV systems installation and record Drawings generated for a similar project.

6. O&M Manuals: The bidder shall provide an example of O&M Manuals generated for a similar project. 7. Software used to define optimal position of IP CCTV systems components: The bidder shall provide a detailed description of the software used to define the optimal position of the IP CCTV systems components by analyzing aspects such as coverage areas, low vs. high density areas, etc.... 8. QA-ISO 9001:2008 registration or equivalent. 9. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal. D. Site Survey 1. Site visit declaration.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 5 of 28

E. Functional Analysis

The analysis should comply with all the requirements set in the Contract and with local authorities. Outcome of analysis should include: 1. Observation criteria and surveillance requirements of each CCTV camera. 2. Objective, functionality, and surveillance requirements of Security Management Application. 3. Objective and functionality of NVR. 4. Identify CCTV monitoring rooms and mission-critical (back-up) sites, objective, functionality, and surveillance requirements of each of these sites. 5. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal. F. System layouts and wiring drawings and diagrams including:

1. Layout drawings of entire system including containment layouts. 2. Sectional drawings of entire system. 3. Schematic diagram for entire system. 4. Layout drawing of the Secured Cabinet. 5. Power Distribution Drawing. 6. Layouts for IP CCTV systems control rooms and equipment rooms– distances from IP CCTV systems devices to and across these rooms. 7. Layout for power supply from main supply room and distribution boards across the IP CCTV systems components. 8. Functionalities and snapshots of IP CCTV systems Management software application. 9. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

G. Technical Details.

1. Detailed description of proposed solution. a. Type of CCTV system proposed; IP. b. Non-Compatible Standard Encoding and Streaming. c. Number and Locations of the cameras. d. Types of cameras and specifications (resolution, format, fps, etc.). e. Outdoor/Indoor requirements. f. Space in server racks available in main security room. g. Camera mounting type considering a decent aesthetic design suitable for the project. h. Lens type. i. Technical data sheets of all equipments, software and materials.

3. Detailed list of Materials following the BOQ format below:

Unit of Item Bidder’s Item Country Meas- Cate- Area Type Vendor Description Model # Qty Ref # Com- No. of Origin ure- gory ments ment

1. All civil, MEP and support works, including and not limited to: a. Containment. b. Cabling. c. Scaffolding and access ladders. d. Labor. e. Power supply. f. Other tools & services. 2. Unless advised otherwise, Contractor is self-supportive and should include for his offer his own materials, tool, services, office, and any requirement necessary to complete this project. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 6 of 28

3. List of samples to be provided. 4. Coordination with other parties. a. Method statement. b. Scope of work matrix for all works listed in this Contract Deliverables Section. c. Communication protocol.

5. Outline risk assessment for all major aspects of the works. 6. General method statement/risk assessment on approach to day to day responsibilities. 7. List of Spare parts to be provided for minimum 10 years. 8. Item by Item commentary on technical requirements.

a. First column is ‘Bidder’s Compliance’:

- Contractor shall specify here one of the below: Y: proposal does comply with specification/requirement. N: proposal does not comply with specification/requirement. N/F: proposal does not fully comply with specification/requirement. N/A: specification/requirement is not applicable to the project. b. Second column is ‘Reference’: - Contractor shall refer each compliant item to the related section of proposal, such as IP CCTV systems. - Component data sheet or reflected electrical/ceiling/wall plans layout drawing. c. Third column is ‘Bidder’s Comments’: - Contractor shall note down any further description, comment, feedback, concern, etc. on each item. - Contractor shall note down any further description, comment, feedback, concern, etc on each item.

10. Vendor certificates. a. Company certification by vendor as authorized dealer. b. Personnel certificate by vendor as factory-trained. c. Product quality assurance certification by vendor. 11. Vendor list and selection criteria for all items, vendors should adhere to the following criteria: a. company established at least 10 years ago. b. have references of at least 20 projects globally of similar scope & complexity. c. have a local support office. d. have a local warehouse for spare parts stocking.

12. Proposed subcontractors identified and scope of work for each.

13. Confirmation of guarantee periods for equipment and guarantee terms & conditions.

14. Confirmation of warranty periods for equipment and guarantee terms & conditions.

15. Maintenance & support offering – sufficient details.

16. Other supporting information that adds value to the .proposal.

H. Bidder’s Compliance Letters. 1. Conformity of bid to requirements – sufficient technical details. 2. Conformity to agree on Confidentiality Agreement.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 7 of 28

3. Letter of Bidder’s Compliance with All Specifications. 4. Conformity of responsibility to secure Compliance with related government/utility authority.

I. List of Proposed Personnel with CVs & Responsibility Matrix. 1. Relevant experience for key team members. 2. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

J. Schedule of Works: Bidder shall compile a schedule of works and include a project milestone as per Master Schedule of Works provided. It is up to the bidder to create a schedule that best incorporates all works.

K. Handover & Close-Out Documentation. 1. As Built Drawings. 2. End User Manuals. 3. Maintenance Manual. 4. Operations Manual. 5. Plans as mentioned above. 6. S/W license, update and upgrade .procedures. 7. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal. L. Shop drawings and catalog data submittals shall be made in accordance with relevant sections. The Contractor shall submit sufficient information to indicate the scope and quality of the IP closed circuit television (CCTV) installation.

1. Block diagram showing system relationships of major components and quantities and interconnecting cable requirements.

2. Plans showing equipment locations, conduit, and conductor requirements. 3. Control console and panel arrangements, equipment outlet devices, and special mounting details. 4. Wiring diagrams showing terminal identification for field-installed wiring. 5. Catalog literature with camera and monitor specifications. 6. Spare parts list. 7. Method Statement for installation, connection, testing and commissioning the system. 8. The contractor shall submit layout plans showing coverage zone of each camera in the project. In- case of any place covered by more than one camera, overlapping shall be achieved between coverage zone of those cameras without having any blind area, this shall be clearly shown on the Con- tractor’s submitted drawings using colour coding For the Engineer approval. M. The Contractor shall furnish operating service manuals for the system. The manuals shall be bound in flexible binders and all data contained therein shall be printed or typewritten. Each manual shall include all instruction necessary for proper operation and receiving of the system, and a complete block diagram of the system, a complete circuit diagnosis of the system, and a wiring designation schedule for the camera, as well as other major components, and a replacement parts list.

N. The Contractor shall submit 6 set of Operation & Maintenance manuals complete with preventive maintenance schedules, procedures and troubleshooting procedures.

O. The Contractor shall meet all project requirements, yet he is required to submit to the Engineer for his approval a proposal for an upto date technology system.

P. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. Submit the number of sets of final as-built schematic drawings as indicated in the contract documents highlighting locations all components included in the system complete with labels.

8.1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Comply with requirements of Division 01. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of cameras and routing of television cable. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for operating system and performing routine trouble shooting procedures.

8.1.6 MANUFACTURER & INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 8 of 28

A. IP CCTV system components shall be manufactured by firms that are regularly engaged in the production of IPCCTV camera, monitors, and auxiliary equipment similar to that required for this project and that have been satisfactory service for at least 10 years.

B. The firm installing the IPCCTV system shall have had a minimum of 5 years documented prior successful installation experience with IPCCTV systems similar in scope to the system of this project.

C. The system shall be engineered, configured, commissioned and serviced by manufacturer's certified systems integrator employing certified personnel for design and installation of the system. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of access control equipment and the products proposed shall be the latest versions commercially available at the time of the bid. The manufacturer shall be ISO-9002 and ISO 9001 certified for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and Servicing. The systems integrator shall be an authorized partner to the manufacturer and the partnership shall be at least two year old. Contractor Qualification: No. Item Client’s Com- Bidder’s Com- Reference Bid- ments pliance (Bill of Materials/ der’s (Y, N, N/F, N/A) Equipments and Com- Data Sheets) ments 1 Contractor’s installation staff shall consist of 100% Manufacturer certified personnel for each technology. 2 Contractor’s installation team must reside locally.. 3 Contractor must submit profiles for all certified staff. Certifications shall be related to Security Systems design and installation. 4 Contractor shall have a project manager, who shall be the sole point of contact for the Engineer. The project manager shall provide regular project updates to the Engi- neer. 5 Contractor must not operate from a free zone 6 The Engineer will deal with a single master system integrator if successful the Contrac- tor will act in this regard and will be responsible for all sub- systems even when using subcontractors 7 Contractor should be capable of delivering a 2hr SLA for key components 8 Contractor should be maintain an appropriate sparing and hardware maintenance strategy for relevant components, and shall keep the Engineer regularly informed of all updates through records 9 Contractor shall keep The Engineer regularly informed of appropriate personnel certification changes 10 Contractor shall maintain a current inventory list of all relevant products supplied to the Engineer and shall provide updated records when required, including adds, moves and changes to the system 11 Contractor must hold Manufacturer rela-

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 9 of 28

No. Item Client’s Com- Bidder’s Com- Reference Bid- ments pliance (Bill of Materials/ der’s (Y, N, N/F, N/A) Equipments and Com- Data Sheets) ments tionship certification to the highest level, and shall provide the Engineer with any changes in certification status. 12 All installers shall be certified by the manufacturer to carry out the installation and configuration of the system proposed. 13 Certification shall be done at manufacturer’s facility and shall be a dedicated training course on the subject. 14 Contractor shall present/submit their certifications from the manufacturer along with the offer. 15 Successful Contractor shall have completed such jobs in the past and if required shall demonstrate the same to the end user. 16 After successful completion, Contractor shall assign one primary point of contact for the end user for any assistance. 17 The Contractor shall carry out regular maintenance of the system during the warranty period. Any upgrades if available shall be provided free of cost to Eningeer. 18 Certified Contractor shall be capable of handling system audit and troubleshooting. 19 Certified Contractor shall demonstrate to the end user at least one successful ongoing maintenance contract with any other firm. 20 At any point the Engineer shall have the authority to approach the references mentioned by the Contractor. 21 All materials procured locally by the Con- tractor shall be as per manufacturer recommended guidelines. 22 All materials shall be installed as per manufacturer guidelines.

G. Manufacturer Qualification: No. Item Client’s Com- Bidder’s Com- Reference Bid- ments pliance (Bill of Materi- der’s (Y, N, N/F, N/A) als/ Equipments Com- and Data Sheets) ments 1 Manufacturer must prove continuous innovation evident by patents and industry standardization of these patents. 2 Manufacturer shall have local service center and repair facility. 3 Manufacturer must provide a local hardware spares depot with 2 hour response capabilities. 4 Manufacturer must have a proven track record in re-investing company profits into further Research & Development efforts. This should be provided as a percentage figure. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 10 of 28

No. Item Client’s Com- Bidder’s Com- Reference Bid- ments pliance (Bill of Materi- der’s (Y, N, N/F, N/A) als/ Equipments Com- and Data Sheets) ments 5 Manufacturer must be capable of providing a follow the sun (24/7, 365 days) technical support center with English/ Arabic IVR. 6 Manufacturer must hold a multi-tiered certification program for installation staff. 7 Manufacturer of the equipments shall have produced similar equipments for not less than 5 years. 8 Warrantee as stated under Warrantee item in this specifications. 9 Manufacturer shall have local training facility and only trained and certified installers recommended by manufacturer shall be used on the project. 10 Manufacturer shall carry out regular certifications and same shall be demonstrated to the end user at its local facility. 11 Manufacturer shall be able to provide end- to-end solution. 12 Manufacturer shall have a working site of similar size to demonstrate the capabilities of the system. 13 Manufacturer shall supply latest version of the software and hardware at the time of finalization of the order. 14 At no stage, the Engineer shall be liable to pay any upgrade fee for any software component. All upgrades for firmware and software for all systems shall be offered free of cost. 15 Manufacturer shall have 24hours support number. 16 It should be possible by the manufacturer to offer training at their own facility if requested by the Engineer.

8.1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall post a note, at the camera and monitor station, to indicate the name, address, and telephone number of the firm to call when service is necessary. Note shall be mounted in a metal frame attached to the camera case. B. Operation of the IPCCTV system shall be demonstrated to the Engineer to prove, under normal conditions, that coverage complies with this specification. C. Reference Demonstration: System Integrators would be asked to demonstrate a working IP CCTV system as per the document specifications to prove their ability to comply with Project requirements. The proof-of- concept demonstration of the proposed IP CCTV system shall be as follows: - Location: IP CCTV system / command center reference site using a solution proposed by the System Integrator. - Configuration: The installed solution is expected to be exposed as much as possible for physical examination. - Real-Time Demonstration:

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 11 of 28

The integration of all components specified in this document should be demonstrated in real- time as a working system. More references could be used to demonstrate different components, depending on the projects’ scope. Demonstration of events, alerts, reporting, scheduling of events, Management application and other possible functions of the IP CCTV system are required.

8.1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to manufacturer’s standard service conditions during and after installation of components. FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

8.1.9 MAINTENANCE , SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall respond to trouble calls with a competent repair person at the project site within 24 hours; Contractor shall also maintain a full inventory of replacement parts so that all routine repairs can be completed within 24 hours.

B. Supply as maintenance stock, consumable devices, components as recommended by Supplier, but shouldn’t be less than two units of each type/ rating of installed consumable material/ component/ device, incase less than three numbers of devices/ material are installed, minimum of one unit of each type/ size/ rating of each device/ material shall be provided as spare stock.

8.1.10 WARANTEE A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of the system, equipment/ softwaress related to system operation, that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of practical completion certificate.

8.1.11 TRAINING A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Three Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the Engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and software and hardware administration of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative, whose credentials are approved by the Engineer, to explain programming and operation of systems and to train Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for maintaining, programming, operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing system.

C. Training shall be carried out to an approved training manual Separate training shall be provided on the hardware and software. Each training shall have both class room session and hands on session. Contractor shall allow for 6 trainees each in both the trainings.

8.2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 8.2.1 INDOOR PTZ CAMERA DOME SYSTEM

A. General

1. The indoor Camera dome system shall be a discreet camera dome system consisting of a dome drive with a variable speed/high speed pan/tilt drive unit with continuous 360° rotation; 1/2, 1/3-inch high resolution color, monochrome, or color/black-white CMOS camera; motorized zoom lens with optical and digital zoom; auto focus; and an enclosure consisting of a back-box, lower dome, and a quick-install mounting.

2. The PTZ Cameras should have advanced/ active gate keeper function. Using the gatekeeper feature, the camera can zoom in to a predefined position on motion, do Pan/Tilt and follow an object.

3. The PTZ Cameras should support downloadable camera applications. Applications can be installed directly on the camera independent of the software to meet specific requirements. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 12 of 28

4. If HD cameras C Camera are proposed, the cameras should be SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) Compliant. SMPTE compliant cameras offer full frame rate at HD resolution (720/1080p), good color fidelity, and wide screen (16:9) format.

5. The countries Country of origin of cameras shall be either USA, Western Europe or Japan.

6. The indoor PTZ dome system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

B. Camera Specifications

1. Sensor Type 1/2, 1/3-inch, CMOS or CCD

2. Optical Zoom 18X

3. Resolution: High Definition, not less than 2Miga pixels.

4. Lens f/1.6 (focal length, 4.7~84.6 mm optical)

5. Aspect Ratios 4:3 or 16:9

6. Light Sensitivity f/1.6; 2,850°K; SNR >24dB a. Color (33 ms) 0.70 lux b. Color (250 ms) 0.07 lux c. Mono (33 ms) 0.25 lux d. Mono (250 ms) 0.02 lux

7. Day/Night Capabilities

8. IR Cut Filter

9. IR Trace Curves 850 nm and 950 nm

10. Wide Dynamic Range 60dB

11. Iris Control Auto iris with manual override

12. Backlight Compensation

C. Video Specifications

1. Video Encoding H.264 high, main, or base profile and MJPEG

2. 2.Video Streams Up to 2 simultaneous streams; the second stream is variable based on the setup of the primary stream

3. Frame Rate shall be not less than 30. Camera shall have the feature to adjust its Frame Rate to 25, 24, 15, 12.5, 12, 10, 8, 7.5, 6, 5, 4,3, 2.5, 2, 1 (dependent upon coding, resolution, and stream configuration)

4. Required Resolutions: 1920 (H) x 1080 (V), or 2 Megapixel (MPx)

5. Supported Protocols TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP) UPnP, DNS, DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv4, SNMP v2c/v3, QoS, HTTP, HTTPS, LDAP (client), SSH, SSL, SMTP, FTP, mDNS (Bon- jour®), and 802.1x (EAP)

6. Users a. Unicast: Up to 20 simultaneous users depending on resolution settings (2 guaranteed streams)

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 13 of 28

b. Multicast: Unlimited H.264

7. Security Access Password protected

8. Software Interface Web browser view and setup, up to 16 cameras

D. Electrical Specifications

1. Ports RJ-45 for 100Base-TX; Auto MDI/MDI-X; auto-negotiate/manual setting

2. Cabling Type Cat6A cable or better for 100Base-TX

3. Input Voltage 18 to 32 VAC; 24 VAC nominal 22 to 27 VDC; 24 VDC nominal

4. Input Power a. 24 VAC 23 VA nominal (without heater); 73 VA nominal (with heater) b. 24 VDC 0.7 A nominal (without heater); c. A nominal (with heater) d. PoE IEEE802.3af (without heater) 1.25

E. Dome Drive

The variable speed/high speed pan/tilt dome drive unit shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

1. Pan Speed Variable between 400 per second continuous pan to 0.1° per second 2. Vertical Tilt Unobstructed tilt of 0 to –90

3. Manual Control Speed Pan speed of 0.1 to 80 per second and pan at 150 4. per second in turbo mode; tilt operation shall range from 0.1 to 40 per second 5. Automatic Preset Speed Pan speed of 400 and a tilt speed of 200 per second 6. Presets 255 positions with 16 preset tours 7. Preset Accuracy ± 0.1 8. Proportional Pan/Tilt Speed 9. Speed decreases in proportion to the increasing depth of zoom 10. Zones 8 zones with up to 20-character labeling for each with the ability to blank the video in the zone 11. Motor Continuous duty and variable speed, operating at 18 to 32 VAC, 24 VAC nominal 12. Window Blanking 8, four-sided user-defined shapes, each side with different lengths; window blanking setting to turn off at user-defined zoom ratio; window blanking set to opaque gray or translucent smear; blank all video above user defined tilt angle; blank all video below user-defined tilt angle 13. Menu System Built-in setup of configurable functions and multiple languages including English and Arabic 14. Auto Flip Rotates dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel 15. Password Protection Configurable settings with optional password protection 16. Dome Drive Compatibility All dome drives are compatible with all back box configurations 17. Power Consumption Nominal 23 VA (without heater running) Nominal 73 VA (with heater running) 18. Backbox & Lowerdome shall have similar specifications as that of outdoor PTZ IP camera.

F. Certifications And Ratings

1. CE, Class B , FCC, Class B, UL/cUL Listed,C-Tick 2. Meets NEMA Type 4X and IP66 standards when installed properly

2.2 HIGH DEFINITION INDOOR FIXED IP CAMERA

A. High Definition Indoor Fixed IP Camera shall have all specs of the High Definition Indoor PTZ IP Camera but shall be without the dome motor drive. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 14 of 28

2.3 HIGH DEFINITION OUTDOOR PTZ IP CAMERA

A. General

1. The outdoor camera dome system shall provide a 100Base-TX network interface for live streaming to a standard Web browser.

2. The outdoor camera dome system shall be a discreet camera dome system consisting of a dome drive with a variable speed/high speed pan/tilt drive unit with continuous 360 rotation; 1/3”, 1/2” high resolution color, CMOS camera; motorized zoom lens with optical and digital zoom; auto focus; and an enclosure consisting of a back box, lower dome, and a quick-install mounting.

3. Note: ¼” is unacceptable as image quality deteriorates substantially with a smaller chip.

4. The outdoor network positioning camera shall support standard IT protocols.

5. The outdoor network positioning camera shall use a standard Web browser interface for remote administration and configuration of camera parameters. The browser interface shall support multi-screen remote monitoring for up to 16 cameras on the same virtual local area network (VLAN) and provide PTZ control including preset and pattern and on-screen display (OSD) for access to camera programming.

6. The outdoor network positioning camera shall feature open architecture connectivity for third-party software recording solutions allowing integration into virtually any IP-based system.

7. The cameras should exceed 75% integration with a minimum of 15 VMS platforms.

8. The PTZ cameras should have advanced/active gatekeeper function. Using the gatekeeper feature, the camera can zoom in to a predefined position on motion, do Pan/Tilt and follow an object.

9. The PTZ cameras should support downloadable camera applications. Applications can be installed directly on the camera independent of the software to meet specific requirements.

10. The cameras should be SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) Compliant. SMPTE compliant cameras offer full frame rate at HD resolution (720/1080p), good color fidelity, and wide screen (16:9) format.

11. The countries of origin of cameras shall be either USA, Western Europe or Japan.

12. The outdoor fixed dome system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

B. Electrical Specifications

1. Ports: RJ-45 for 100Base-TX Autonegotiate/Manual setting Auto MDI/MDI-X

2. Cabling: Cat6A cable or better for 100Base-TX

3. Input Voltage:18 to 32 VAC; 24 VAC nominal 22 to 27 VDC; 24 VDC nominal

4. Input Power

5. 73 VA nominal (with heater)

6. 3 A nominal (with heater)

7. Alarm Outputs for 35X SE: 7No.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 15 of 28

8. Auxiliary Outputs for 35X SE :2Nos.

C. Video Specifications

1. Video Encoding: H.264 base profile, MPEG-4, MJPEG

2. Video Streams 3, simultaneous, to comply with backup regulations.

3. Frame Rate shall be not less than 30. Frame Camera shall have the feature to adjust its Frame Rate to 25, 24, 15, 12.5, 12, 10, 8, 7.5, 6, 5, 4,3, 2, 1 (dependent upon coding, resolution, and stream configuration)

4. Supported Protocols TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS, DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv4, SNMP, QoS, HTTP, HTTPS, LDAP (client), SSH, SSL, SMTP, FTP, mDNS (Bonjour®)

5. Users 20 simultaneous using unicast; unlimited using multicast H.264 or MPEG-4 802.1x (EAP)

6. Software Interface Web browser view and setup, up to 16 cameras

7. Open IP Integration.

8. The cameras should exceed 75% integration with a minimum of 15 VMS platforms.

9. Resolution: High Definition, not less than 2Miga pixels.

D. Dome Drive

The variable speed/high speed pan/tilt dome drive unit shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

1. Pan Speed Variable between 400 per second continuous pan to 0.1° per second

2. Vertical Tilt Unobstructed tilt of +2 to –92

3. Manual Control Speed Pan speed of 0.1 to 80 per second, and pan at 150 per second in turbo mode. Tilt operation shall range from 0.1 to 40 per second

4. Automatic Preset Speed Pan speed of 400 and a tilt speed of 200 per second

5. Presets: 35X SE 256 positions with a 20-character label available for each position; configurable camera settings, including selectable auto focus modes, iris level, LowLight™ limit, and backlight compensation for each preset; command to copy camera settings from one preset to another; and preset configuration through control keyboard or through dome system on-screen menu

6. Preset Accuracy ± 0.1

7. Proportional Pan/Tilt Speed ,Speed decreases in proportion to the increasing depth of zoom

8. Automatic Power Up. 35 SE, User-selectable to the mode of operation; the dome will resume when power is cycled, including an automatic return to position or function before power outage

9. Zones 8 zones with up to 20-character labeling for each, with the ability to blank the video in the zone

10. Motor Drive Cogged belt with 0.9° stepper motor

11. Motor Operating Mode Microstep to 0.015° steps

12. Motor Continuous duty and variable speed, operating at 18 to 32 VAC, 24 VAC nominal Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 16 of 28

13. Limit Stops: 35X SE, Configurable for manual panning, auto/random scanning, and frame scanning

14. Inner Liner Rotating black ABS liner inside a sealed lower dome

15. Alarm Inputs: 35X SE,Ability to control 7 alarm inputs

16. Alarm Outputs: 35X SE Ability to control 1 auxiliary Form C relay output and 1 open collector auxiliary output

17. Alarm Output Configuration Auxiliary outputs can be alternately configured to operate on alarm

18. Alarm Action Individually configured for 3 priority levels, initiating a stored pattern or going to a preas- signed preset position

19. Resume after Alarm After completion of alarm, dome returns to previously configured state or its previous position

20. Window Blanking 35X SE, 8, four-sided user-defined shapes, each side with different lengths; window blanking setting to turn off at user-defined zoom ratio; window blanking set to opaque gray or translucent smear; blank all video above user-defined tilt angle; blank all video below user-defined tilt angle

21. Patterns. 35X SE -8 user-defined configurable patterns including pan/tilt/zoom and preset functions, and pattern configuration through control keyboard or through dome system on-screen men

22. Pattern Length User-defined length based on dome memory

23. Internal Clock Internal system clock, user configurable for 12- or 24-hour day format and mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy calendar format

24. Scheduler Internal scheduling system for configuration presets, patterns, window blanks, alarms, and auxiliary functions based on internal clock settings

25. Autosensing Automatically sense and respond to protocol utilized for controlling the unit

26. Menu System Built-in setup of configurable functions and multiple languages including English and Arabic

27. Auto Flip Rotates dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel

28. Password Protection Configurable settings with optional password protection

29. Clear individual, grouped, or all configured settings

30. Freeze Frame Freeze current scene of video during preset movement

31. Display Setup User-definable locations of all labels and displays and user-selectable time duration of each display

32. Azimuth/Elevation/Zoom On-screen display of pan/tilt locations and zoom ratio

33. Compass Display On-screen display of compass heading and user-definable compass setup

34. Camera Title Overlay 20 user-definable characters on the screen camera title display

35. Video Output Level User-selectable for normal or high output levels to compensate for long video wire runs

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 17 of 28

36. Dome Drive Compatibility All dome drives are compatible with all back box configurations

37. RJ-45 Jack Contains a plug-in jack on the dome drive for control and setup of the unit, the uploading of new operating code and language file updates, and is compatible with personal computers

38. Remote Data Port Compatibility Ability to set up and control unit, and upload new operating code and language file updates through the easily accessible optional remote data port; remote data port is also compatible with personal computers

39. Power Consumption Maximum 70 VA

40. The high definition CMOS camera shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

E. Color Optic System (35x)

1. Image Sensor minimum 1/2’’- 1/3” CMOS sensor.

2. Scanning System Interlace/Progressive selectable

3. Effective Pixels : 1920 (H) x 1080 (V) or 2Miga pixels.

4. Resolution Scaling: Down to 352 x 240

5. Lens f/1.4 (focal length, 3.4~119 mm; 35X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom)

6. Configurable Zoom Speeds 3.2, 4.6, or 6.6 seconds

F. Back Box And Lower Dome

1. The back box and lower dome shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

2. Connection to Dome Drive Quick, positive mechanical and electrical disconnect without the use of any tools

3. Trap Door Easy access trap door that allows complete access to the installation wiring, providing complete separation of the wiring from the dome drive mechanics when closed

4. Terminal Strips Removable terminal strips with screw-type terminals for use with 22-14 gauge wire

5. Auxiliary Connections 1 Form-C relay output up to 40 VAC or 40 VDC at 2 A maximum 1 open- collector output up to 32 VDC at 150 mA maximum

6. Alarm Inputs a. 35X SE, 27X SE (Models) 7 alarm inputs b. 23X SL (Model) 1 alarm input

7. Installation Quick-mount wall, corner, pole, parapet, or ceiling adapter

8. Cable Entry Through a 1.5-inch NPT fitting

9. Environmental Features Factory-installed heaters, blowers, and sun shroud

10. Operating Temperatures Maximum temperature range of –60 to 140F (–51° to 60°C) for two hours and a continuous operating range of –50° to 122F (–45° to 50°C)

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 18 of 28

11. Memory Built-in memory storage of camera and location-specific dome settings such as presets and patterns; if new dome drive is installed in back box, all settings will automatically download into new dome drive

12. Color Neutral, baked-on enamel powder coat

13. Construction Aluminum

14. Lower Dome Material Acrylic, optically clear, with no distortion in any portion of the dome up to +2 above the horizon

15. Dome Color Clear and smoked versions

16. Trim Ring Connection 2 screws

17. Safety Cable Plastic tether

G. Certifications And Ratings

1. CE, Class B, FCC, Class B, UL/cUL Listed,C-Tick 2. 2.NEMA Type 4X, IP66

8.2.4 HIGH DEFINITION OUTDOOR FIXED IP CAMERA A. High Definition Outdoor Fixed IP Camera shall have all specs of the High Definition Outdoor PTZ IP Cam- era but shall be without the dome motor drive.

8.2.5 STANDARD DEFINITION INTEGRATED NETWORK CAMERA (0.5 MEGAPIXEL (MPX))-MINI DOME (FOR USE INSIDE LIFTS’ CARS) A. General 1. The network camera shall offer dual video streams with up to 0.5 MPx resolution (800 x 600) in progressive scan format.

2. The network camera shall be a compact size with a 3-inch class bubble, shall include a compact indoor enclosure, and come with an integrated Auto-focus varifocal 2.8~10 mm lens.

3. The network camera shall be capable of firmware upgrades through a network using a software-based device utility.

4. The network camera shall provide advanced low-light capabilities with sensitivity down to 0.12 lux in color.

5. The network camera shall support two simultaneous, configurable video streams. H.264, MJPEG, and MPEG-4 compression formats shall also be available for primary and secondary streams with selectable Unicast and Multicast protocols. The streams shall be configurable in a variety of frame rates and bit rates.

6. The network camera shall support industry standard Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af to supply power to the camera over the network.

7. The network camera shall use a standard Web browser interface for remote administration and configuration of camera parameters. The browser interface shall support multiscreen remote monitoring for up to 16 cameras on the same virtual local area network (VLAN).

8. The network camera shall have a window blanking feature to conceal user-defined privacy areas that cannot be viewed by an operator. The network camera shall support up to four blanked windows. A blanked area shall appear on the screen as a solid gray window.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 19 of 28

9. The network camera shall provide Camera Sabotage analytics to detect changes in the camera’s field of view, including obstruction of the lens (examples include by cloth, spray paint, or a lens cap cover) and unauthorized movement of the camera. Such behaviors shall trigger an alarm.

10. The network camera shall support standard IT protocols.

11. The network camera shall support open architecture best practices with a published API available to third- party network video recording and management systems

12. The network camera shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications:

13. Shall feature sabotage detection & Adaptive motion detection as standard feature.

14. The cameras should support Active Tampering Alarm. Using active tampering alarm, the camera can send alarms if the lens is defocused/ camera view blocked/changed.

15. The cameras should support downloadable camera applications. Applications can be installed directly on the camera independent of the software to meet specific requirements. 16. The countries of origin of cameras shall be either USA, Western Europe or Japan.

B. Camera Specifications 1. Imaging Device 1/3-inch, effective 2. Imager Type CMOS 3. Imager Readout Progressive scan 4. Maximum Resolution 800 x 600 5. Signal-to-Noise Ratio 50 dB 6. Auto Iris Lens Type DC drive 7. Electronic Shutter Range 1~1/100,000 sec 8. With RJ 45 Jack. 9. Wide Dynamic Range 60 dB

a. Wide Dynamic Range to be above 120dB if required to be used at those places which are mentioned in the General Guideline and feature 120dB Dynamic range requirement and in other reflective and refrac- tive areas with inconsistent light conditions. 10. White Balance Range 2,000° to 10,000° K

11. Sensitivity f/1.3; 2,850°K; SNR >24dB a. Color (1x/33 ms) 0.5 lux b. Color SENS (15x/500 ms) 0.12 lux c. Mono (1x/33 ms) 0.25 lux d. Mono SENS (15x/500 ms) 0.03 lux

12. Dome Attenuation a. Clear Zero light loss b. Smokef/1.0 light loss 13. Construction a. Back-box Alodine aluminum b. Bubble Polycarbonate plastic c. Finish Light neutral powder coat d. Weight < 0.78 lb (0.35 kg)

14. Environmental a. Operational Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) b. Operational Humidity 20% to 80%, noncondensing c. Impact Resistance IK10++ per EN62262 (50J) d. Shock and Vibration Meets EN50155 Category 1, Class B; e. IEC60068: 2-6 and 2-27

i. NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 20 of 28

A. The NVR shall be available as a rack mountable standalone device with onboard hard disk recording and incorporate the following features:

Recording capacity of the NVR system shall be 30 days on D1 4CIF resolution. D1 resolution may be H.264 or MPEG4 format. System supplier shall determine hard disk capacity of NVR according to above conditions. Operating system of the NVR may be Linux or windows based system. B. Administration will be performed through a web page and support the configuration of following parameters:

Name and Location. Maximum recording chunk file size Maximum recording chunk age Minimum free disk space (typically 5% of total disk space). IP Address configuration. Ethernet Interface speed. Time configuration by Real Time Clock configuration or Network Time Protocol (NTP). NTP Server configuration Disk Status including disk temperature monitoring Administration is also possible using the Console serial port. C. The NVR must support system logging to a remote IP address, console port or the unit itself. D. The NVR must provide dedicated web pages for diagnostic output including: Current Media Connections (by IP address) Local System Log Registry Information Boot Log System Processes Device Information Interrupt Information Network Statistics Serial Port Statistics E. The NVR must provide an RS232 console port for debug output and serial configuration. F. The NVR must provide Telnet access for further diagnostics. This is permitted only to administrators with the administrator password with an IP address specified on the Firewall.

ii. CENTRAL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

A. General 1. The Central Management Software shall provide the ability to simultaneously connect to not less than ten, sixteen-channel Digital Video Recorders. Each camera shall have the ability to be individually programmed to display in live or playback mode. This feature allows the user to view live video and search multiple sites up to Forty-eight Cameras at the same time. Other features shall include event logging, PTZ, and relay capabilities. 2. The security video system shall be an IP network-based, fully distributed digital video system. The security video system will utilize local area networks (LAN) as a transmission medium for video, configuration, as well as storage of all data. The security video system shall provide full video control at the building, with additional full selection capability at any point within the network from a workstation or a video console display. The security video system shall provide unlimited expansion capability for the addition or modification of video inputs. The VMS system shall not be license based and shall not have any cost for upgrade of software or firmware. The system shall be expandable to unlimited video inputs The VMS and the cameras should preferably come from the same manufacturer to make sure there is no mix-match solution or non-compatibility or performance sacrifice. 3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all security video cameras, pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) cameras, mounts, housings, power supply systems, coaxial cable, network cables, connectors, equipment racks, monitors and consoles, computer controlled network switchers, work stations, network video recorders, encoders, decoders, video console displays, and all other hardware and software to provide a fully operational system

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 21 of 28

The security video system shall permit normal and event monitoring of all secured areas on DVI or VGA monitors as required or shown in the specifications and drawings Video monitoring consoles shall be installed at the main control room and as shown on the drawings and described in these specifications In all cases, the equipment shall be state of the art, standardized commercial off-the-shelf, and modular In all cases, the method of communication from remote locations within the network to the central components shall be transparent to the user Equipment shall be selected and installed so repairs may be accomplished on site by module replacement, utilizing spare components whenever possible. 4. The intent of this specification is to provide the Engineer with a distributed networked digital security system Supplied by the Contractor, the security video system shall be complete and operational per the performance requirements and objectives of these specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of related work with other trades affecting his/her work or the work of others.

B. Codes And Standards 1. Work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable national and local codes or standards current at the commencement of installation. The following list summarizes the applicable codes and standards: a. National Electrical Safety Code, current edition b. National Fire Protection Association National Fire Codes, current edition c. EIA/TIA–568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard d. EIA/TIA–569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces e. EIA/TIA–606 Administrative Standards for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings f. IEEE, RS 170 variable standard g. NTSC/PAL h. IEEE, 802 3 digital data network standard i. EIT/TIA–568A premises cabling standard j. Member, Universal Serial Bus (USP) Implementers Forum k. Compliant with ISO/IEC 14496 standard (also known as MPEG-4) Compliant with International Tel- ecommunication Union (ITU) Recommendation G 711, “Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of Voice Frequencies” 2. When more than one code or regulation is applicable, the more stringent regulation shall apply C. Video Security System Capabilites 1. The IP video security system network shall be arranged so each area will operate independently and shall communicate to the system manager through no less than a 1000BaseT Gigabit Network. The IP video security system shall utilize virtual matrix switcher capabilities through the use of a system manager. The system manager shall provide a user interface and database management of the IP video security system. System manager software shall allow for the restriction of users to logical configurable groups of cameras, monitors and system operations.

2. The system manager shall be capable of performing as a NTP Server for the entire system. The IP video security system shall be synchronized to an NTP server so that all system components function on the same time clock basis. The NTP server shall reside within the system, and it shall be capable of being driven by external time sources if needed. All time-zone corrections shall automatically be provided in the system.

3. The system manager shall be capable of performing as a DHCP and UPnP server for the entire system and components. The system manager shall provide all connection and management communications between system devices.

4. The system manager shall be capable of incorporating RSA 256 bit public/private key authentication in addition to custom bit public/private keys The IP video security system shall be capable of authenticating any video produced by the encoder that was originally produced by the stream, NVR recording the stream, or operator who exported the stream; all shall include time/date stamped video

5. The system manager shall manage rights and permissions for all devices, persons, and any system video or other data. The IP video security system’s digital recording and monitoring system shall incorporate a fault toler- ant architecture and shall include redundancy in critical areas of concern Encoder power supplies and NVR/storage box power supplies shall be capable of redundancy. As a standard, all NVRs and storage boxes shall provide RAID 5/6 redundancy in the event of any system failure RAID 6 should be used for installations with more than 100 cameras.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 22 of 28

6. The IP video security system shall provide an API/SDK that is capable of being used at a level consistent with a full-featured gateway.

7. The IP video security system shall provide multilevel diagnostics of each component in all critical areas. These diagnostics shall be reported to a diagnostic console for processing .The diagnostic data shall be capable of being scripted into actionable events within the system. The diagnostics shall be capable of being mined by network diagnostic systems such as Open View, Tivoli, and others.

8. The IP video security system shall be able to handle future expansion of an unlimited total capacity from what is shown in the drawings, including but not limited to cameras, monitors, alarm circuits, and relay closures.

D. Basic System Capabilites

1. The following capabilities are considered essential for the IP video security system described in this specification.

2 The IP video security system shall support the ability to switch any camera in the system to any monitor in the system, through either a PC keyboard/mouse or a joystick controller to either an analog or VGA Monitor.

4. The IP video security system shall be an integrated hardware and software platform. It shall provide distributed administration of multiple devices and administer rights and privileges for all attached devices.

5. The system manager shall manage system security, functioning as a key manager for user and device authentication. It shall also route communication between all devices on large, sub-netted security networks. The system manager shall store and administer secure keys and shall have multilevel and user permission management.

6. The system manager shall function as the default system time network video recorder, using the industry standard NTP protocol to ensure integrated devices are synchronized. The system manager shall support UPnP architecture and shall provide DHCP services, supporting the dynamic addition of network devices.

7. The system manager shall store a database of device errors, alarms, and other system events. The comprehensive database shall be accessed and searched through the system log window. The system manager shall allow for connection to an intelligent uninterruptible power supply (UPS), and it shall allow for a message to be sent to the UPS in the case of a power failure. The system manager also supports data replica- tion; a duplicate set of critical system data can be stored on a second system manager, enabling quick and easy transition to IP video security equipment.

8. The IP video security system encoders, workstations, cameras, monitors, alarms, relays, etc , shall be configurable.

9. The system manager shall provide for an unlimited number of system operators with personal identification numbers (PINs) that define priority levels, operator facilities, system roles, and camera and monitor groupings.

10. The IP video security system shall have the capability of the following functionalities: a. The system shall be fully distributed in nature so that each system device can remain operational in a ma- jority of modes without dependence on other devices. b. Each individual entry in a sequence shall have the capacity to trigger PTZ camera presets, patterns or auxiliaries. c. Multiple users shall be able to simultaneously view the same camera view or sequence. The system shall utilize multicast streaming video to allow multiple users to view the same video stream, though not necessarily synchronized with each other, without affecting the bandwidth of the network Video titling shall provide for a 100-character camera site description (on/off), display time/date (on/off), set the display color (black-white), display a site message (on/off), and define the screen block position for the title.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 23 of 28

11. The IP video security system shall be able to capability to create and execute a system script used to control any system function, and it may be combined into any order. The configuration of such scripts shall be easy to use and follow the rules of drag and drop configuration. The IP video security system shall be capable of the following actions (minimal requirements): a. Display video from any camera to a specific monitor or screen division, including changing screen division views. b. Reset any monitor to its original screen division and image c. Move system PTZ cameras to a specified preset location d. Activate predefined patterns on system PTZ cameras e. Start/stop recording an event from any indicated video source f. Utilize script nesting, a means of running another script within any given script g. Activate system relays and send e-mail notification to any recipient through pop3 h. Add wait times to any script command. 12. The scripting language shall utilize a system function upload and will modify or send out a global command to all components in the system. 13. Operator control of a camera or selection of monitors shall override the sequence control of camera or monitor; sequence control of cameras or selection of monitors shall not override operator control of camera of selection of monitors.

14. The IP video security system shall allow for programming of alarms and associated incoming alarms with related parts of the system.

15. Individual, group, or all alarms shall be disabled by special sequences, which can be initiated by the operator or automatically by time/day/date. 16. The IP video security system shall log all alarms and events in the system manager database. 17. The IP video security system shall provide real time system status on the operator graphical user interface (GUI) All alarms, current monitor activity, and selected PTZ camera ID can be displayed in user-defined descriptive text. 18. The IP video security system shall be capable of the following languages: English, Arabic, French, Spanish, German, Portuguese, Italian, Russian, and Chinese (simple). The system also shall be capable of accepting new language packages from one central point. The system shall allow for user profiles, by language, to be loaded into any operational location including workstations and virtual matrix controllers.

E. Network Storage Manager 1. In large and multi-building developments, a Network Storage Manager (NSM) is required. The NSM either replaces or integrates with NVRs/DVRs to centrally manage the entire development 2. The network storage manager shall record video and audio streams from IP cameras and video encoders on the network. 3. The network storage manager shall incorporate the server functions and storage elements into a purpose- built chassis. 4. The network storage manager shall use RAID 6 parity across the storage drives to protect recorded data against a hard disk drive failure 5. The network storage manager shall only use enterprise-level hard disk drives specifically rated for operation in RAID systems. 6. The network storage manager chassis shall be designed for video surveillance recording applications and encompass redundancy at all vital points: • Hot swappable hard drives • Redundant, hot swappable power supply modules • Redundant, hot swappable system fans • Hot swappable O/S drive • Hot swappable CPU fans 7. The network storage manager chassis shall be designed for online service and maintenance and cannot be removed from the rack when hard disk drives, fans, power supplies, or operating system drives must be replaced.

8. The network storage manager shall be built upon a reliable and robust Linux® operating system 9. The network storage manager shall support a guaranteed recording throughput of 250 Mbps per storage device with a minimum of 64 Mbps of read throughput. This throughput shall be guaranteed under normal and error (RAID rebuild) conditions. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 24 of 28

10. The network storage manager shall support any number of cameras so long as the maximum throughput required is less than 250 Mbps. 11. The network storage manager shall support the recording of MPEG-4 and H 264 baseline, and high profile streams from standard resolution and megapixel cameras. 12. The network storage manager shall support continuous, scheduled, alarm/event (including analytics alarms), motion, and manual recording. Pre- and post-alarm periods shall be configurable up to the total capacity of the system 13. The network storage manager shall support bookmarking and locking/unlocking of video content on the drives. 14. The network storage manager shall support privacy tools that allow administrators to establish maximum retention times for normal, alarm, and locked video. 15. The network storage manager shall support an intelligent video grooming protocol that can reduce the frame rate of recorded video as the video ages. Administrators shall have the flexibility to determine whether to groom alarm video or leave it at its real-time level. 16. The network storage manager shall have the ability to report all diagnostic events, including software status diagnostics to a centralized user interface. In addition, Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps shall be available for monitoring through a third-party SNMP management console. 17. The network storage manager shall be fully managed from a remote workstation, including the ability to configure settings and update firmware and software. 18. The network storage manager shall be capable of interfacing with any smart UPS using a USB connector. The network video recorder shall receive status and control signals from the uninterruptible power supply (UPS) when it is in backup mode. This function shall inform the operator about the amount of charge remaining and trigger a controlled shutdown when the charge becomes zero. 19. The network storage manager shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications: 20. It would be possible to configure the Network storage manager with active-active failover, hot-stand-by failover or on-demand failover, redundant or mirrored .It should be capable of using Multi-cast streams from the camera for recording This would save a lot of bandwidth on bandwidth-critical installations. 21. Multiple NSM’s or video servers shall feature clustering and provide distributed storage architecture featur- ing active-active failover and load balancing. Distributed storage servers shall act as one large virtual storage pool, able to be accessed with one virtual IP address. This shall make sure that in a large environment where the camera quantity is huge, failure of one or two NSM’s or video servers shall automatically load balance and re-distribute the cameras between the available NSM’s or video servers. This shall happen automatically without operator intervention. When failover happens or NSM’s fail, live view of cameras shall never stop on monitors. POWER SPECIFICATIONS 1. Power Input: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, auto-ranging 2. Power Supply: Internal, dual-redundant, hot-swappable 3 .prongs, molded connector ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS 1. Operating Temperature: 50° to 95°F (10° to 35°C) at unit air intake 2. Operating Humidity: 20% to 80%, non-condensing 3. Maximum Humidity Gradient : 10% per hour 4. Operating Altitude: –50 to 10,000 ft (–16 to 3,048 m) 5. Operating Vibration: 0 25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at a sweep rate of 0 5 octave/minute

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 1. System a. System Drive: Linux Compact Flash system drive b. RAID Level: RAID 6 for storage drives c. Effective Capacity: Up to 18 4 TB d. Drive Interface: SATA/SATA II 2. Network a. Interface 2, 1 Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (1000Base-T) b. Security 2 modes: secure mode (device authentication) and unsecured mode 3. Auxiliary Interfaces a. x2 USB 2.0 Ports on rear panel b. x1 USB 2.0 port on front panel

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 25 of 28

CERTIFICATIONS 1 CE, Class A FCC, Class A UL/cUL Listed C-Tick S Mark for Argentina CCC/CQC WARRANTY Minimum 3 years, parts and labor

G. Video Management Software Shall be an open platform IP based security management software which supports IP cameras from different manufacturers Shall not be client-server based so that failure of one component or critical component does not halt the entire system For instance, failure of one Network Storage Manager or System Manager shall not stop other storage managers from recording or stop streams of live videos onto the monitors It should be possible to start or stop any device without affecting the performance of the other components Multiple video servers/storage managers shall act as one large virtual server Such a feature shall eliminate the risk of one or number of servers failing together at the same time Multiple servers shall operate in a large virtual pool or cluster This large virtual pool/cluster should be accessible with one virtual IP address It should feature active-active failover and load balancing as standard Failure of one or two members of the pool/cluster shall, automatically load balance and redistribute the cameras between the available servers Once a failover happens, there shall be a buffer storage for a minimum of 1 day to make sure that old data does not start to over write immediately Shall be able to display 16 IP cameras simultaneously for live viewing and playback Shall be centrally managed, fully scalable and secure There shall be any limit on number of cameras or clients that can be connected to the system Shall provide a built-in command script editor that allows customized command script to be written to control virtually all the system functions Shall have the ability to automatically assign IP addresses to IP cameras, NVRs etc Shall display video analytics from IP cameras Shall display analytic alarms from cameras that have on-board analytics Shall support displaying video analytic alarms on the proper site maps Shall support digital zoom on live & recorded videos Shall support dual monitors for displaying the maps and cameras Shall scan the complete network for IP cameras, NVRs, workstations etc and setup system tree indicating all detected items Shall have GUI to allow live and archived images from multiple remote systems to be viewed on the client workstation. The operator shall monitor and supervise various locations simultaneously with complete flexibility in selecting and viewing live and recorded images The GUI shall display systems floor plan selection & navigate among different maps and site plans The Contractor shall customize the navigation and layouts as requested by the user The navigation tools shall support one or two step selection from site map to floor plan Linking of maps of maps to track people shall be supported Shall support drag & drop of cameras from the system tree & maps GUI shall support minimum of 10 maps. Latency for PTZ control of cameras shall not exceed 150 ms Shall support simultaneous viewing of recorded video from multiple client workstations without affecting the ongoing recording Shall support backup on DVD-WR and through the USB 2 0 ports The DVD backup shall be viewable on standard windows media player / real player for non-encrypted use. For encrypted use it will be acceptable to have it played on special software loaded on the same DVD with the required video clip Shall have auto system recovery after power failure; auto re-booting, auto scan & recover of data Shall have auto configuration wizard for cameras, user profiles etc Shall support video loss alarm. Management & configuration tools shall be included to configure & manage IP cameras, NVRs, workstations which are connected to the system Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 26 of 28

Shall support displaying single, quad, nine, twelve or sixteen images of cameras, each at 25 fps @ VGA, 4CIF It should also decode high definition and full-high definition streams Shall support viewing multiplexed images of IP cameras with the capability of selecting individual camera & PTZ control Site Map with IP camera location, for easy camera selection & selective viewing of either live or playback or recorded cameras shall be supported User selectable display pattern of single, quad or multiple IP camera format to simultaneously display live or playback of archived video at the NVR or local video storage on the IP camera shall be possible Setup and termination of connections between IP camera, NVRs, workstations via drag and drop from either a system tree or site map, to display live and/or playback video on a single multi window patterns screen, selective viewing and control of single cameras shall be supported either by clicking on the camera icon on the site map or on the system tree Shall have playback controls; such as play, pause, forward, backup etc Shall support archived video retrieving search by IP number, time, date, selected object, intelligent motion detection etc Shall support still image export to JPEG and BMP format with date & time stamp Shall support PTZ control of multiple brands of IP cameras including Pelco, Sony, Panasonic, Bosch etc Shall support local & remote alarm notification by email, SMS, for alarms, minor & major faults Shall support saving logs of all users & system activities and interactions Shall show the bandwidth consumption for single & multiple IP cameras Shall support text insertion for any desired video clip for easy retrieval Shall support general & customized reports generation Shall support graphical map creation & editing, importing of customized maps, attaching IP camera icons etc Auto & manual tours for PTZ cameras shall be supported Shall have SDK / API for integration of 3rd Party equipment Shall support adding users, assigning passwords & access rights to various client applications User selectable image capture rates either on an all input basis or input by input basis. The capture ate feature may be programmed to automatically adjust the capture rate on the occurrence of an external alarm or an internal event Selectable image resolution either on an all input basis or input by input basis.The image resolution feature may be programmed to automatically adjust the image resolution on the occurrence of an external alarm or an internal event Compression methods determine quality of playback H 264 hardware compression offers fast transfer rates over the internet with high quality video Motion detection or any analytics shall be done at the camera to avoid any additional load on the servers Routing of input video to video monitors based on user inputs or automatically on alarms or events Input, time and date stamping 51 Alarm and event logging on appropriate video inputs Alarm and event search One or more sound recording channels. Archival Selecting a fixed camera. User log on/off. Making shift log Bidder’s Comments. Image management (send image to spot monitor, send image to monitor wall) Monitor wall image management (setting default images) Spot monitor image management (setting default images, setting quad images) Adjusting recording settings (frame rates, storage durations) Set view parameters (contrast, brightness, color etc) Guide tours management (adding, deleting and modifying) View recordings (select, start, stop, forward, rewind, pause etc) Set time and date 66 Set camera reference 67 Set image title 68 Images file management (deleting files, re-naming files, copying files) System configuration (adding and deleting cameras) Operator profiles (accessing date/time/duration of use, adding and deleting users)

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 27 of 28

Access to engineering settings. Commonality of design between different monitored areas within the same development It should be possible to stitch different cameras on the export player so that it is easy for gathering evidence and perform playback on all cameras simultaneously It should be possible to support ASCII interface as well as interface using external I/O ports ASCII interface provides greater flexibility to integrated with fire alarm panels, BMS etc The ability to software select on an IP Megapixel camera between its maximum resolution and the various resolutions below it (i e 4CIF, 2CIF, CIF, D1, etc ) Software features should include but not necessarily limited to the above

H. Video Analtyics Module (optional) 1. This is an optional requirement. An Advanced Video Analytics Server-based Application might be requested for certain blocks which shall be specified by the Engineer. 2. Shall support classification of detected objects depending on pre-programmed shapes and sizes. 3. Shall be able to track detected objects / persons even through multiple PTZ and fixed cameras depending on their size, speed, color and any other pre-defined criteria. 4. Shall be able to recognize abnormal activities e.g. person falling down, sleeping, jumping, running fast etc. 5. Shall support congestion detection for different types of objects, in addition to crowd and object counting. 6. Shall be able to detect direction, speed & size of objects of interest. 7. Shall support having the video analytics on the live videos and the recorded ones as well. 8. Lack of motion detection. Provided on an input by input basis, this feature detects the movement of an object into the field of view and remaining still for a user definable time. Detection causes an internal event that may be output to external equipment and/or used to trigger changes in other internal features. Some analytics possibility is the capability of spotting an unattended bag in a parking lot which does not move for a pre-set period of time or in some cases people acting suspi- ciously - for example, by driving in the wrong direction, or running against the normal flow of people, or are lying motionless on the floor or a bench for a pre-set period of time. 9. Advanced analytics software features should include but not necessarily limited to the above.

J. System Monitoring.

The CCTV system is required to keep a detailed log file and to send alerts in the following events: - Whenever the system cabinet is opened (by means of a system cabinet tampering switch- an HW switch that indicate whenever the cabinet is Opened or Closed) - Loss of system communication - Loss of camera signal - System power down K. Provision for Future Upgrades & Expansion 1. The Operator may request to increase the bandwidth of the communication line and communication equipment – in order to support the increasing number of concurrent viewed and recorded channels 2. Design shall consider potential future expansion of 25% extra cameras

8.2.8 HIGH RESOLUTION COLOR MONITOR A. The LCD color monitors shall provide a high resolution picture; high quality; 100% steel housing; front panel controls; built-in speaker; connections for video and audio input/output, including separate Y-C connectors for S-VHS input.

B. The color monitor shall meet or exceed the following specifications:

Diagonal Picture 32 inches as in BoQ Standards NTSC/PAL TV Lines of Resolution Minimum of 700 horizontal TV lines Input Power Range 90-260 VAC, 50/60 Hz Speaker 1.0 W (-3 dBV), built-in Comb Filter Digital Color Switching Automatic between NTSC/PAL formats Composite Video Voltage 1.0 Vp-p Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 23 00 (R0) September 2020 SECURITY SYSTEMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Page 28 of 28

Synchronization Internally derived Front Panel Controls Tint, color, brightness, contrast, volume, and power on/off Connector Inputs 2 BNC inputs, 2 looping outputs, 1 DIN S-VHS Audio Inputs 2 RCA inputs Output Connectors 1 looping output Operating Temp. Range 0° to 41°C Operating Humidity Range 0% to 90% relative, non-condensing. Certifications CE, Class B; UL; cUL; FCC, Class B

8.2.9 SOFTWARE PROTOCOL AND LICENSES A. Software shall be provided to operate the cameras from the CCTV control rooms. The software may be proprietary but it shall have an open protocol and it shall meet all the operational requirements. The license shall permit the client in the future to employ competent persons to modify the software without having to obtain the approval of the program authors Sufficient software licenses shall be provided for the client to operate the CCTV system.

B. The Contractor shall provide a detailed summary of the facilities that the proposed software offers identifying the operating system, typical screen displays, typical control functions, typical data input facilities and typical output reports.

8.2.10 FIREWALLS A. The firewall shall have the capacity to support layer 3-4 secure rule base enforcement; it also shall support IPS (intrusion prevention) abilities and gateway level anti vandal abilities, and with a support of state full inspection features.

B. The installed firewall will act as the system encryption termination point since it shall support AES-256 IPSEC encryption.

C. The Firewall installed in the system cabinet will be connected to the public network, using a separate special 1Gbps communication line (throughout SFP fiber port).

8.2.11 VIDEO ENCRYPTION A. It is required that all video streams transported on the Wide Area Network (WAN) will be 256 AES Encrypted.

8.3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 8.3.1 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers printed recommendations and the requirements of the Contract Documents. Equipment shall be installed, adequately ventilated, and securely anchored. B. If the raceway indicated does not conform to the requirements of the IPCCTV system, provided, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to modify the raceway system as acceptable to the Engineer. 8.3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Conductor terminations at screw terminals shall be accomplished with hooked, spade lugs. Shielding shall be continuous & shall be grounded at the monitor which shall be frame grounded. Wiring shall be cabled within enclosures and banded neatly to terminals. 8.3.3 INSTALLATION A. Units shall be mounted to maximize coverage of the main entrance area. Wiring throughout the system shall be identified in accordance with approved shop drawings; identification shall be applied at all terminations and access fittings. Connections to monitor shall be waterproof and flexible and shall be accomplished with cable connectors. 8.3.4 EXECUTION OF TEST PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall operate all equipment, in the presence of the Engineer. Operation shall demonstrate the IPCCTV system performance is satisfactory for lighting conditions encountered during normal plant operation. At completion of test all adjustments shall be locked or sealed. END OF SECTION

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 1 of 23

PART 1 GENERAL

1. 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes

Fire detection system shall be intelligent device addressable, analogue detecting, low voltage and voice evacuation alarm system in full compliance with all applicable codes and standards, including, but not limited to the following:

1. Main system including all fire detection with main control panel and transponder panel.

2. Voice evacuation alarm/ notification and communication system including power amplifiers of sufficient quantities and ratings for operating all voice evacuation system speakers with 20% extra spare capacity.

3. Circuit interface panels including all modules.

4. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers of sufficient capacities for operating the system with 20% extra spare capacity.

5. Equipment enclosures.

6. Intelligent addressable manual pull stations, heat detectors, analogue smoke detectors, strobe lights both internal and external alarm monitoring modules, and supervised control modules.

7. Audible and visual evacuation devices.

8. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning system.

9. Wiring and raceway.

10. Installation, testing and certification and Training.

11. Multiplex, system driven remote annunciators.

B. Related Sections and Documents

1. Division 14 Conveying Systems

2. Section 21 30 00 Fire Pumps.

3. Section 21 13 13 Wet - Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers

4. Section 21 13 16 Dry - Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers

5. Divisions 22 Plumping.

6. Division 23 HVAC.

7. Section 25 50 00 Integrated Automation Facility Controls.

8. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

9. Section 26 05 00 Common Electrical Works Results, General.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 2 of 23

10. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.

11. Section 26 05 19 LV Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

12. Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

13. Section 27 05 33 Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

14. Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communication Systems

15. Section 27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment

16. Audio-Video Systems

17. Section 27 51 16 Public Address System.

18. Section 28 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electronic Safety and Security Systems

19. Section 28 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electronic Safety and Security Systems

20. Section 28 05 33 Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security Systems

21. Section 28 05 36 Cable Trays for Electronic Safety and Security Systems

22. Section 28 05 53 Identification for Electronic Safety and Security System

23. Section 28 13 00 Security - Access Control.

24. Section 28 16 00 Security - Burglar Alarm, Emergency Alarm & Call Systems

25. Section 28 23 00 Security Systems-Video Surveillance Systems

26. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

27. Fire Strategy Safety Design Report.

1.2 REFERENCES

A . Factory Mutual (FM).

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.

2. NFPA 72A Local Protective Signaling Systems.

3. NFPA 72B Auxiliary Protective Signaling System.

4. NFPA 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling System.

5. NFPA 72D Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems.

6. NFPA 72E Automatic Fire Detectors.

7. NFPA 72F Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 3 of 23

8. NFPA 72G Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems

9. NFPA 72H Testing Procedure for Protective Signaling Systems.

10. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.

C. Local authorities having jurisdiction (CDD).

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

3. UL 268 A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.

4. UL 217 Smoke Detectors Single Station.

5. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

6. UL 228 Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

7. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances.

8. UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances.

9. UL 38 Manually Activated Signaling Boxes.

10. UL 1076 Proprietary Burglary.

11. UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

12. UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.

E. Local Codes and Standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Include the following information in the equipment submittal:

1. Power calculations.

a. Battery capacity calculations. b. Supervisory power requirements for all equipment. c. Alarm power requirements for all equipment. d. Justification showing power requirements of the system power supplies. e. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs in worst case condition.

2. Complete manufacturer's catalog data including supervisory power usage, alarm power usage, physical dimensions, finish and mounting requirements.

3. Submit panel configuration and interconnection of modules and all other data as required to make an informed judgment regarding product suitability. As a minimum, data shall be submitted on the following:

a. Main system including all fire detection with main and secondary control panels.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 4 of 23

b. Circuit interface panels including all modules. c. Power supplies, batteries and battery chargers. d. Equipment enclosures. e. Intelligent addressable manual pull stations, heat detectors, analog smoke detectors, alarm monitoring modules, and supervised control modules. f. Audible and visual evacuation signals and devices. g. Software and firmware as required to provide a complete functioning system. h. Wiring. i. Multiplex, system driven remote annunciators. j. Interface module and wiring configuration from local system to Fire Command System.

4. Data describing more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate the type the Contractor intends to provide for a given application. The Engineer shall assume that all options not crossed out in submitted material will be furnished for the project. Submit copies of UL listing or FM approval data showing compatibility of the proposed devices or appliances and the panels being provided.

5. Submit the following drawing for the proposed system.

a. Floor plans showing all initiating, end of line, supervisory, indicating appliances, and output control devices; including circuit interface panels, enunciators, printers, Control panel location.

b. Raceways, marked for size, conductor count with type and size, showing the percentage of allowable IEE fill used.

c. Indicate ambient sound levels used by the system layout designer for sound level calculations and mathematical justification for signal placement to meet the code required 15 dBA above ambient for audible warning signals.

d. Wiring diagrams showing points of connection and terminals used for all electrical connections to the system devices and panels.

e. Complete single-line riser diagram showing all equipment and the size type and number of all conductors.

6. Submit Method Statement for system’s component wiring, installation, testing, commissioning and operating.

7. Detailed list of Equipments & Software following the BOQ format below:

Item Item Cat- Country Unit of Meas- Ref Bidder’s Area Type Vendor Description Model # Qty No. egory of Origin urement # Comments

8. Detailed list of Materials following the BOQ format below:

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 5 of 23

Item Item Cat- Country Unit of Meas- Ref Bidder’s Area Type Vendor Description Model # Qty No. egory of Origin urement # Comments

1. All civil, MEP and support works, including and not limited to: a. Containment. b. Cabling. c. Scaffolding and access ladders. d. Labor. e. Power supply. f. Other tools & services.

9. The Contractor shall comply with all specifications described in the Technical Specification sections herein. System specifications proposed should reflect each of the system components in question, functionality desired by the system component and the how the component integrates with the centralized system. The contractor shall add 3 columns beside each item to state the following:

a. First column is ‘Bidder’s Compliance’:

b. Second column is ‘Reference’: - Contractor shall refer each compliant item to the related section of proposal, such as PA system.

- Component data sheet or reflected electrical/ceiling/wall plans layout drawing.

c. Third column is ‘Bidder’s Comments’: - Contractor shall note down any further description, comment, feedback, concern, etc. on each item.

- Contractor shall note down any further description, comment, feedback, concern, etc on each item.

10. Vendor certificates.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 6 of 23

a. Company certification by vendor as authorized dealer. b. Personnel certificate by vendor as factory-trained. c. Product quality assurance certification by vendor.

11. Vendor list and selection criteria for all items, vendors should adhere to the following criteria: a. company established at least 10 years ago. b. have references of at least 20 projects globally of similar scope & complexity. c. based in Kazakhstan since at least 5 years. d. have references of at least 5 projects in Kazakhstan of similar scope & complexity. e. have a local support office. f. have a local warehouse for spare parts stocking.

12. Proposed subcontractors identified and scope of work for each.

13. Confirmation of guarantee periods for equipment and guarantee terms & conditions.

14. Confirmation of warranty periods for equipment and guarantee terms & conditions.

15. Maintenance & support offering – sufficient details.

16. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

B. Bidder’s Compliance Letters. 1. Conformity of bid to requirements – sufficient technical details. 2. Conformity to agree on Confidentiality Agreement. 3. Letter of Bidder’s Compliance with All Specifications. 4. Conformity of responsibility to secure Compliance with related government/utility authority.

C. List of Proposed Personnel with CVs & Responsibility Matrix. 1. Relevant experience for key team members. 2. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

D. Schedule of Works: Bidder shall compile a schedule of works and include a project milestone as per Master Schedule of Works provided. It is up to the bidder to create a schedule that best incorporates all works.

E. Handover & Close-Out Documentation. 1. As Built Drawings. 2. End User Manuals. 3. Maintenance Manual. 4. Operations Manual. 5. Plans as mentioned above. 6. S/W license, update and upgrade .procedures. 7. Other supporting information that adds value to the proposal.

F. Submit complete system detailed dimensional workshop layouts and single line diagrams (system risers) drawings approved, signed and stamped from the local fire authority prior to any material ordering or system installation.

G. Submit from the system Supplier full detailed calculation of system power supplies, voltage drops, on devices wiring circuits, amplifiers sizing, ..etc.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Requirements of Division 01. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of busway routing and location of plug-in units. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit joint re-tightening schedule.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 7 of 23

1.5 QUALIFICATION

A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analogue fire detection devices for a period exceeding ten years. The manufacturer shall have an installed base of analogue systems as a reference. The Contractor shall contract with a single source for supplying job materials, services, and programming, including final inspection/test services for the fire alarm system.

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in installing fire alarm and detection systems of the same type and design as specified. Include the names and locations of at least two such installations, specify type and design for each system and furnish documentation that the system has performed satisfactorily for the preceding 18 months.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide the services of a representative or technician from the manufacturer of the system, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system provided. The technician shall supervise installation, software documentation, adjustment, preliminary testing, final testing and certification of the system. The technician shall provide the required training to the Owner's personnel in the system operation, maintenance and programming.

B. The Contractor through the system’s supplier/ installer shall verify and confirm that the designed system fulfill all local codes requirements, otherwise he shall inform the Engineer about any incompliance or further required action prior to installation of the system. The Contractor shall bear all the responsibility of getting CDD approval for the installed system.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protect from moisture by using appropriate coverings. Store in dry interior locations.

1.9 SEQUENCING A. Sequence Work to avoid interferences with building finishes and installation of other products.

1.10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Complete operation and maintenance manual with two sets of proposed installation drawings shall be submitted.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Contract: Obtain an undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and his authorized local representative to provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial completion of the work, covering routine service and emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply of necessary standard spare parts.

B. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 24 months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency call back service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency call back service. a. Response Time: 2 hours or less. C. Optional Maintenance Service: 3 years after the original 2 years maintenance period.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 8 of 23

1.11 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 92 00.

C. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provision of Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements

D. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but not less than one unit.

E. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but not less than one unit.

F. Smoke Detectors, Beam detectors, Heat Detectors, Control element, Master element and Manual Stations: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type.

G. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type.

H. Loudspeakers, Fire speaker, Horns: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.

I. Fire telephone jacks, Fireman microphones and speakers, etc units: Quantity equal to 5 of each type installed.

J. Loop cards: 2% with a minimum of one piece.

K. Printer Ribbons: Six spares.

L. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper-proofed components.

1.12 WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor or the manufacturer for the period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the engineer except where any specific warranty from a supplier or manufacturer extends for a longer time.

1.13 TRAINING

A. Vendor shall provide operation, maintenance and administration training for the proposed system to Three Engineers. Training shall be sufficient enough to enable the engineers to carry out day-to-day operation, maintenance and software and hardware administration of the system without or with minimal assistance from the vendor’s technical staff.

1.14 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Supervised pre-signal annunciated closed circuit 24 volt ac/dc system.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 9 of 23

B. Provide main fire alarm panel , Transponder fire alarm panel, repeater panels, controllers, power supply unit for each panel of sufficient capacity for operating the system with 20% extra spare capacity, manual call stations, heat detectors, smoke detectors, sounders, strobes, initiating and indicating device circuits, fully supervised as shown on the drawings.

C. Provide voice evacuation system for alarm notification as part of the main & Transponder fire alarm control panels. The voice evacuation system shall include amplifiers of sufficient quantities and ratings for operating all voice evacuation system speakers with 20% extra spare capacity, zoning, controllers, speakers... etc.

D. Provide all needed power supplies for the full capacity operation of the system with addition 20% extra spare capacity, any extra needed power supplies due to any wiring rerouting, are included in price of the fire alarm system.

E. System to operate with manual stations and detectors, circuits as follows:

1. Actuate control panel to cause alarm signal continuously throughout building.

2. Indicate alarm origin on the F.A. panels/and the repeater panels.

3. Shutdown air conditioning where specified.

4. Start pressurization and smoke extract management system where specified

5. Shutdown any combustible gas supplies to kitchen.

6. Indicate origin of signal.

7. Send signal to elevators to act as programmed during fire cases.

8. Send signal to access control panel to release all strikes at accesses within fire zone.

H. Electromagnetic Compatibility

1. All equipment and systems installed under this Contract shall meet following specifications on electromagnetic compatibility:

a. Interference immunity according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-3.

b. Emitted interference according to BS EN 61000: Part 6-2.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this Specification or shown on the Drawings and installation specifications shall be the best suited for the intended or if provided by different manufacturer, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers, and shall be UL listed

B. Service availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have a fully equipped service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 8 hours of service calls, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to service completed systems.

2.2 CONTROL PANEL

A. Provide analogue addressable Main fire alarm control panel and transponder panel with capacities

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 10 of 23

as shown on drawings with two additional spare loops for each panel, the loop should take 250 Devices. The panels shall be expandable to two additional loops. Each loop shall be capable of driving the number of analogue addressable devices as shown on the drawings.

C. Provide a remote QVGA LCD Repeater Panels, with the same "look and feel" as the main FACP operator interface. Each Remote Repeater Panel shall use the same Primary Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset Keys as the Main FACP. The repeater panel is wired directly from the main FACP.

D. Provide auto dialer as shown on the drawings, the auto dialer shall have the capability to store a minimum of one digitally encoded message and four telephone numbers. The unit shall be programmed to dial all stored numbers until one answers the call, the unit shall be triggered by means of fire condition.

E. Main Fire Alarm Control Panel

The control panel shall be UL/FM approved. The control panel shall be capable of receiving and analyzing signals from fire detectors, providing audible and visual information to the user and initiating automatic alarm response sequences.

It shall monitor and repeat events in transponder panel/s.

The panel shall have all required interface modules/units to connect to the BMS for status only.

It shall be modular in construction allowing for future extension of the system and shall be able to be easily configured to meet the exact detection zone and output-mapping requirements of the areas considered and be microprocessor based operating under a multi-tasking software program. Operating programs and configuration data must be contained in easily up-datable non-volatile memory (EPROM).

It shall incorporate a real time clock to enable events to be accurately referenced against time and date.

The panel must have redundant master controller (CPU), In case the first master controller (CPU) fails, the system will automatically switch to the second master controller (CPU) (Hot Swap). The system will stay fully function as it was programmed.

The panel shall incorporate a key switch to prevent unauthorized use of the manual controls.

The panel shall be capable of operating with analogue addressable detectors and addressable ancillary equipment.

Provision shall be made for each addressable loop to be sub-divided into geographical zones. The section of wiring corresponding to each zone circuit shall be protected from faults in other sections by line isolator modules.

In order to facilitate re-configuration and system extension, the allocation of addresses to devices shall be independent of their physical arrangement on the loops.

The panel shall have provision to house the AC Main power supply and batteries.

The panel shall monitor the status of all devices on the addressable loops for fire, short- circuit fault, open-circuit fault, incorrect addressing, unauthorized device removal or ex- change, pre alarm condition and contaminated sensor condition.

All internal connection and interfaces including charger, battery and remote signaling functions shall also be monitored.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 11 of 23

The panel shall communicate with the BMS thru auxiliary relay for general status monitoring.

The panels shall have an integral alphanumeric display and system controls: include a 700 character, expanded content multi-line qvga lcd display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and shall include a keypad for use in expanded content, multi- line operator interfaces shall be capable of providing the following functions: 1. Dual language operation with Instant-Switch language selection during runtime. Activity display choices for: First 8 Events. First 5 Events and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and date stamps). First Event and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and date stamps). Scrollable List Display displays a scrollable list of active points for the event category (alarm, priority 2, supervisory, or trouble) selected. The position in this list will be the last acknowledged point (not flashing) at the top followed by the next 7 unacknowledged points (flashing). General Event Status (alarm, priority 2, supervisory, or trouble in system) Site Plan Equal or hierarchal priority assignment. In systems with two or more operator interfaces, each operator interface shall be programmable to allow multiple operator interfaces to have equal operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to individual operator interfaces (locations). Up to 50 custom point detail messages for providing additional point specific information in detailed point status screens. Bitmap file import for operator interface display of site plan and background watermark images. Site plan status icons shall indicate area status for highest priority active events.

2. The panel shall be capable of monitoring and controlling remote devices, such as relays for the control mechanical equipment directly from the addressable loops.

3. The panel shall interrogate each addressable device at least once every 4 seconds and shall incorporate fire decision specifically adapted to the response characteristic of the analogue addressable detectors employed.

4. The circuitry shall be designed so that, for each type of analogue addressable detectors the overall response time including the detector, the signal transmission system and the fire decision algorithm, meets the requirement of the relevant part of NFPA 72.

5. A facility must be provided to automatically adjust the sensitivity of analogue detectors to a higher level for periods of time when the building is unoccupied shall be provided.

6. The panel shall have the ability to annunciate a pre-alarm condition designed to give the earliest possible warning of a potential fire condition without raising the full alarm condition.

7. The panel shall have the ability to automatically adjust the alarm and pre-alarm threshold levels to compensate for changes in detector sensitivity due to contamination over a period of time.

The panel shall have the ability to provide automatic warning that a detector has reached a level of contamination, which requires that it be replaced or serviced.

8. The panel shall be capable of generating customer definable time delay sequences to upgrade, without the need for external timers, alarm sounder responses as follows:

Silent to Alert Alert to Evacuate Silent to user defined tone

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 12 of 23

9. The panel shall monitor all critical system components and interconnections, internal and external, such that failure, which would prevent the correct operation of the alarm functions, causes the FAULT indicator to light and a message to be given on the alphanumeric display.

The following faults shall be reported:

Loop Short Circuit Loop Open Circuit Unconfigured Device Addressable Device Failure Device Not Responding Incorrectly Configured Device Detector Condition Monitoring Device Detector Circuit Wiring Fault Repeater / Repeater LCD, Remote Printer Failure Power Supply Unit Fault Charger Fault Battery Fault Battery Critical Mains Failure Relay Output Stuck Signaling Fault Sounder Wiring Open Circuit Sounder Wiring Short Circuit

10. The panel shall provide text messages to indicate the location of where a fault has occurred in the system.

11. The panel shall incorporate the following system management facilities:

Isolate/re-connect a particular addressable point Isolate/re-connect a particular detector zone View the number of alarms since power up View the number of software initialization since power up View common alarm status View common fault status View common disabled status View zone alarm status View zone fault status View zone isolated status View point address status Print event log Print points isolated Print points in detector Condition Monitoring Fault Print point status

The panels shall have an event log capable of storing 1200 events min that have occurred. It shall be possible to view the content of the log via the alphanumeric display.

Events shall be displayed in chronological order in any of the following three options:

Newest event first Oldest event first Highest priority event first

12. The panel shall be capable or providing audible and visual warning when a weekly system test.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 13 of 23

12. The panel shall be with 2 GB Compact Flash memory, and with Ethernet built in ready connectivity.

- The Contractor and the supplier of the fire alarm system shall not change the password without official notification of the Employer -The Contractor and the supplier shall provide the Employer written commitment which include all above mentioned

2.3 POWER SUPPLIES

A. The Power Supply /Batteries/Charger, shall provide the means of automatically supplying 24 V DC operating and emergency power to the system. The power supply shall be capable of powering Notification appliance circuits shown on drawings with 20% spare capacity. The power supply shall be a minimum of 80% efficient, fully regulated, power limited 24 V DC to operate listed signaling devices. The power supply shall provide diagnostic LED’s to notify the operator upon AC power and/or the control panel battery detection, system ground fault detection when connected to the control unit and shall be capable of charging from 5 AH to 50 AH batteries. Upon AC power failure the power supply shall automatically transfer the system to battery backup and battery shall be heavy duty higher performance with sufficient capacity to maintain the system for 24 hours followed by an alarm condition for 30 minutes.

B. Features

1. High Efficiency Design.

2. Completely Power Limited.

3. 100% Fully Regulated Power Supply.

4. Primary Power (AC) Monitor.

5. Automatic Battery Charger Circuit.

6. Dual 3 Amp Output with Electronic Current Limiting min.

7. Ground Fault Detection Circuit.

8. Battery Monitor Circuit; Hi/Lo Voltage and Open.

9. 5-50 AH Battery Charging Capacity.

10. Sealed lead-acid

11. Where required provide Intelligent Remote Battery Charger for charging up to 110Ah batteries

2.4 INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide intelligent analogue smoke and thermal sensors as shown. All intelligent sensors, shall communicate with the control panel over fire resistance 2 wires cable. The address shall be dialed in at the sensor by the installer using the rotary switches located in the sensor head or module. All intelligent analogue sensors shall be interchangeable, ceiling mountable and shall use common twist-lock bases.

1. Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 14 of 23

The Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor shall connect with fire resistance 2 wires to the control panel. The sensor shall be easy to install into the base. The sensor shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The sensor shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). The sensor shall use the photoelectric principle to measure smoke density and shall on command from the control panel send data to the panel representing the analog value of the smoke density. The sensor shall provide advanced indication of the analog value of the level of smoke density to the panel that maintenance is required, reducing the maintenance required to inspect routinely all sensors in order to ensure normal operation. The sensors shall have 8 selectable sensitivity levels ranging from 0.5% to 3.7%, programmed and monitored from the FACP. 2. Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor with Sounder Base: Shall have all specs as intelligent photoelectric sensor above, but with built in electronic alarm sounder. Piezoelectric sounder provides high output (88dBA) with low current requirements (20 mA). 3. Intelligent Thermal/Heat Sensor

The Intelligent Analog Thermal/Heat Sensor shall connect with fire resistance 2 wire to the control panel. The sensor shall be easy to install into the base. The sensor shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The sensor shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity, because of the environment (dirt, temperature, humidity, etc.). The sensor shall use dual solid state to monitor rate of heat rise in accordance to NFPA 72 Temperature Classification for Ordinary Temperature Rating Range (58 – 79°C) and provide a fast response to rapid increases in temperature. The sensor on command from the control panel, shall send data to the panel representing the analogue value of the ambient temperature.

4. Intelligent Dual-Sensor Smoke/ Heat Detector

The Intelligent Dual-Sensor Smoke/ Heat Detector shall connect with fire resistance 2 wires to the control panel. The detector shall contain photoelectric sensor with integral thermal sensor. The detector shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The Detector shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). The sensor shall provide advanced indication of the analog value of the level of smoke density to the panel that maintenance is required, reducing the maintenance required to inspect routinely all sensors in order to ensure normal operation. Smoke sensor sensitivity Range: 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of smoke obstruction, selected at control panel. Smoke sensor air velocity range: 0-1220m/min. Thermal sensor operation (selected at control panel): fixed alarm temperature setting of 57.2 C deg, and/ or rate of rise temp. alarm at 8.3C deg or 11.1 C deg, also selectable as utility monitoring operation from 0 to 50C deg.

5. Intelligent Monitor Module

The Intelligent Monitor Module shall be used to connect a supervised conventional initiating device or zone of supervised conventional initiating devices (water flow switches, tamper switches, manual pull stations 4 wire smoke detectors conventional 4 wire duct/plenum detectors, etc. to one of the 2 wire intelligent analog loop cards. The module shall mount in an electrical box and shall be capable of Class "A" supervised wiring to the initiating device. In order to maintain proper supervision there shall be no T-taps allowed on Class "A" lines. The Monitor Module shall provide internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. The Monitor Module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled.

6. Intelligent Sound & Control Modules

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 15 of 23

The Intelligent Sound & Control Modules shall be used to connect and supervise conventional indicating device or zone of indicating devices that require an external power supply, such as horns, strobes, A/Vs, to one of the 2 wire intelligent analog loop (Class “A”). The control Module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C), to control Door Holders, Air Handling units etc. The module shall mount in an electrical box and shall be capable of Class "A" supervised wiring to the indicating or control device. The Control Module shall provide an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device.

7. Isolating Module

The Isolating Module shall be an automatic switch, which will open when the intelligent loop voltage drops below 4 Volts. The Isolator Module shall be placed between groups of sensors/intelligent modules on the loop in order to protect the intelligent loop if a short should occur. If a short occurs between any two isolators, then both isolators switch to open circuit conditions and isolate the group of sensors/modules between them. The remaining devices on the intelligent loop shall continue to operate and communicate normally. The number of devices between isolators shall be as recommended by manufacturer or less. The Isolator shall be designed to mount in an electrical box.

8. Door Hold Units

Door hold units shall be 24 V.D.C. fail safe type and shall be integral with the floor spring of the door.

Final electrical connections shall be made using heat resisting flexible cable from a flex outlet plate located as close as practical to the door loaded unit. A door release push button connected in series with the door release coil shall be provided adjacent to each door or pair of doors fitted with door hold units. The button shall be mounted at 1350 mm A.F.F.L. and engraved "Door Close".

A separate 24 V.D.C. power supply shall be provided to serve the door hold units and the release signals shall be provided via relays operated from the fire alarm system.

9. Door release Unit

Where doors are normally kept locked for security purposes provision shall be made for these to be released when a fire alarm signal is raised. The release circuits shall be related to the loop and adjacent loops in which an alarm originates.

The release mechanism shall comprise a brass keep fitted into the doorframe and related to the door lock. Upon signal from the fire alarm system, a solenoid shall release the lock allowing the door to open.

10. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E, ionization type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact, key-operated NORMAL- RESET-TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual indication of detector actuation, in duct-mounted housing. Addressable analogue type.

11. VOICE EVACUATION

a. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems", and NFPA 72.

b. Voice Alarm: Provide an emergency communication system, integral with the MFACP, and transponder panel including voice alarm system components, microphones, amplifiers, and tone generators. Features include:

i. Amplifiers comply with UL 1711, "Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems."

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 16 of 23

Amplifiers shall provide an onboard local mode temporal coded horn tone as a default backup tone. Test switches on the amplifier shall be provided to test and observe amplifier backup switchover. Each amplifier shall communicate to the host panel amplifier and Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) circuit voltage and current levels for display on the user interface. Each amplifier shall be capable of performing constant supervision for non-alarm audio functions.

ii. The amplifiers shall be of sufficient quantities and ratings for operating all voice evacuation system speakers with 10% extra spare capacity.

iii. Eight channel multiplexed audio for systems that require more than two channels of simultaneous audio. Up to 8 channels of audio shall be multiplexed on Class A fire resistant cable.

iv. Emergency voice communication audio controller module shall provide up to 30 minutes of memory stored messages. Provide supervised connections for master microphone and up to 10 remote microphones.

v. Status annunciator indicating the status of the various voice alarm speaker zones and the status of fire fighter telephone two-way communication zones.

c. Distributed Module Operation: MFACP and transponder panel shall be capable of allowing remote location of the following modules; interface of such modules shall be through a Class A fire resistant UTP cable supervised serial communications channel (SLC):

i. Amplifiers, voice and telephone control circuits

ii. Notification Appliance Circuits

d. Fire fighters' telephone communication system: Arrange system to use dedicated, two- way, supervised voice communication links between the MFACP and remote fire fighters' telephone stations throughout the building:

i. The firefighter's phone system shall be capable of handling single or simultaneous conversations with all phones connected into the system. As many as seven (7) phones shall be able to be connected into the active conversation.

ii. The phone system circuits shall be designed to prevent static, hum or other interference for clear, intelligible two-way conversation between all phones of the system.

iii. The phone system circuits shall be supervised, such that the MFACP shall be able to differentiate between whether a handset has been plugged into the emergency phone jack or whether the circuit has a shorted wire.

iv. A beeping busy signal shall indicate to the person attempting to use a remote phone that the signal is being received at the control unit and that the lines are intact.

v. The act of plugging a handset into an emergency phone jack or removal of any phone from its normal hook position shall cause an audible and visual indication at the control unit. Picking up the master phone and acknowledgment of the phone circuit shall silence the tone and allow for direct two-way communications.

vi. The act of unplugging handsets in use and replacement of remote phones will return the phone circuits to their normal supervisory functions.

vii. Provide emergency phone jacks as shown on the plans. Each jack shall be mounted on a stainless steel single gang plate with the words "Fire Emergency Phone" screened on each.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 17 of 23

viii. Provide a minimum of five (5) pluggable emergency phones within a storage cabinet. The cabinet and the phones shall be included in price of main fire alarm control panel.

2.5 ALARM UNITS A. Audible Alarm Notification: By voice evacuation and tone signals on loudspeakers in areas as indicated on drawings.

Automatic Voice Evacuation Sequence:

1. The audio alarm signal shall consist of an alarm tone for a maximum of five seconds followed by an automatic voice message. At the end of the voice message, the alarm tone shall resume. This sequence shall sound continuously until the "Alarm Silence" switch is activated.

2. All audio operations shall be activated by the system software so that any required future changes can be facilitated by authorized personnel without any component rewiring or hardware additions.

B. Speaker: Speaker notification appliances shall be listed to UL 1480.

1. The speaker shall operate on a standard 25VRMS or 70 VRMS Notification Appliances Circuits (NAC) using fire resistant unshielded twisted pairs (UTP) cables.

2. Voice alarm speakers shall be with multi tapping and has minimum UL rated sound pressure level of at 3 meters and shall produce a sound level at least 15dB above the reduced average ambient sound level or 5dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least 60 seconds measured at 1.5m above the floor.

3. The speaker shall have a frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz for Fire Alarm and 125 to 12kHz for General Signaling.

C. Visible/only multi candela: strobe shall be listed to UL 1971. The V/O shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The V/O enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings. V/O appliances shall be provided with different minimum flash intensities of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd and 110cd. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific visible/only appliance. D. Audible/visible multi candela: audible/visible (A/V) notification appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The strobe shall be provided with different minimum flash intensities of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd and 110cd. The audible/visible enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings. The appliance shall be capable of two-wire synchronization with one of the following options: Synchronized Strobe with Horn on steady. Synchronized Strobe with Temporal Code Pattern on Horn. Synchronized Strobe with March Time cadence on Horn. Synchronized Strobe firing to NAC sync signal with Horn silenced. Accessories: the contractor shall furnish the necessary accessories.

E. Deaf Alarm System: Deaf alarm control panel with strobe and bed vibrator with the option to add a second vibrator or strobe. Suitable for connection into a 24Volt commercial fire alarm system through addressable interface control module. With built in battery backup. The control unit is powered from an external 240V, 50Hz power supply. Complies with BS 5446-1:1990 Continuous monitoring of cables Test buttons for strobe, vibration pad, sensor and system

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 18 of 23

Temperature range: 0 to 40 C Deg. Humidity range: 0% to 90% relative humidity.

2.6 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

A. MANUAL PULL STATION: Provide addressable manual pull station as shown, the double action manual station shall be push and pull type switch. The manual station, should be made of red lexan, with molded, raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common with the control units. The manual station shall mount to a standard single gang switch box or an optional red surface mount box.

2.7 WIRING OF SYSTEM

Fire alarm wiring shall be completely segregated from any other system.

All cables associated with the fire alarm installation shall be fire resistant copper cables as described in this specification with a red PVC oversheath. All wiring shall be carried out using zero halogen, low smoke and flame sheathed according to IEC 60332. Joints in cables shall be made only at accessories unless otherwise agreed with the Engi- neer when the joint box shall be detailed on record drawings.

Fire detectors and devices and Alarm notification devises shall all be connected on a two wire fully maintained closed circuit (Class A). Fire alarm cables shall be installed in galvanized steel conduits concealed in the building fabric except in plant rooms and service where a surface installation shall be provided.

2. Standard fire resistant cables as described in clause 26.2d of BS 5839-1:2002 – Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings. Code of practice for system design, installation, commissioning and maintenance, 3. Class PH30 when tested in accordance with BS EN 50200: 2000 – Method of test for resistance to fire of unprotected small cables for use in emergency circuits. Fire resistant cables construction shall include: 1. Conductors: Plain annealed copper to BS 6360 solid (class 1). 2. Insulation: High performance silicon rubber EL2 to BS 7655: section 1.1 3. Earth Conductor: Tinned annealed copper to BS 6360 4. Electrostatic Screen: Aluminum/polyester tape 125% coverage 5. Sheath: Thermoplastic zero halogen, flame retardant, abrasion resistant type LTS3 to BS 7655: SECTION 6:1

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

A. Show a general layout of the complete system including equipment arrangement specific to the equipment manufacturer’s requirements. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify dimensions and assure compatibility of all other systems interfacing with the fire alarm system.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 19 of 23

1. Identify on the drawings, conduit and conductor sizes and types with number of conductors in each conduit. Provide each conduit and device with a unique identification. For addressable alarm initiation devices, the system identifier shall be the system address for that device. Signals shall be sequentially numbered as the address of the controlling module.

2. Indicate on the point to point wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring within the panel between modules, and connecting wiring to the field device terminals.

3. Provide mounting details of FACPs and other boxes to building structure, showing fastener type, sizes, material and embedded depth where applicable.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 72 (A to G).

B. Fasten equipment to structural members of building or metal supports attached to structure, or to concrete surfaces.

1. Use clamping devices for attaching to structural steel, or when clamping is impractical, obtain written authority to weld or to drill.

2. Fasten equipment to concrete or masonry with expansion anchors.

3. Fasten equipment to drywall by screws into studs, and to metal wall panels by weld studs, bolts or self taping metal screws.

4. Do not install conduit raceways and boxes in positions that interfere with the work of other trades.

5. Attach nameplates on panels or other components as specified.

6. Cable types, method of installation and circuit identification shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

3.3 DEVICES

A. Relays and other devices to be mounted in auxiliary panels are to be securely fastened to avoid false indications and failures due to shock or vibration.

B. Wiring within panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and maintenance.

C. Detectors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72. Detectors shall be at least 300 mm from any part of any lighting fixture. Detectors shall be located at least 900 mm from diffusers of air handling systems. Each detector shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware as required by its mounting location. Detectors which mount in free space shall be mounted directly to the end of the stubbed down rigid conduit drop. Conduit drops shall be firmly secured to minimize detector sway. Where length of conduit drop from ceiling or wall surface exceeds 900 mm, sway bracing shall be provided.

D. Notification appliances shall be mounted a minimum of 2.4 m above the finished floor unless limited by ceiling height or otherwise indicated.

E. Annunciator equipment provided shall be mounted where indicated.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 20 of 23

F. Devices exposed to external weather shall be of special type they shall be protected against humidity and off shore weather condition.

3.4 SPLICES AND CABLE TERMINATIONS

A. All splices shall be made using solderless connectors or compression type terminal strips. All connectors shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for terminations of stranded conductors to binder screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors.

3.5 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

A. Complete and submit to the Engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, paragraph 2.2.2, and in full compliance with CDD requirements.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing, general:

1. All intelligent analog devices shall be tested for correct address and sensitivity using test equipment specifically designed for that purpose. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the system address, initials of the installing technician and date.

2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses.

a. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses. b. The acceptance inspector shall be notified before the start of the required tests. All items found at variance with the drawings or this specification during testing or inspection by the acceptance inspector, shall be corrected.

c. Test reports shall be delivered to the acceptance inspector as completed.

3. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests shall be made available by the installing contractor. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:

a. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment. b. Multimeter for reading voltage current and resistance. c. Intelligent device programmer/tester. d. Laptop computer with programming software for any required program revisions. e. Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and supplies. f. Spare printer paper. g. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring air flow through air duct smoke detector sampling assemblies. h. Decibel meter.

4. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing Contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the acceptance inspector.

5. System wiring: Fire alarm circuits shall be tested for continuity, grounds, and short circuits.

B. Acceptance testing

1. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system components and

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 21 of 23

installation will be prepared by the engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA 72E NFPA 72H and this specification. The Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming.

2. A program matrix shall be prepared by the installing Contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving "any", "or", "not", "count", "time", and "timer" statements; the complete output equation shall be referenced in the matrix.

3. A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and logging printers shall be prepared by the installing contractor prior to the ATP.

4. The acceptance inspector shall use the system record drawings in co-ordination with the documents specified under paragraph 3.01 during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed.

In conducting the ATP, the acceptance inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and correct subsequent system operation in the event of: i. Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog signaling circuit. ii. Open, shorted and grounded network signaling circuit. iii. Open, shorted and grounded conventional zone circuits. iv. Open, shorted and grounded speaker, telephone circuits. v. Intelligent device removal. vi. Primary power or battery disconnected. vii. Incorrect device at address. viii. Printer trouble, off line or out of paper. b. System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated as follows: i. All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed. ii. Audibility and visibility at required levels. c. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows: i. Correct message display for each alarm input at the control panel, each remote alpha-numeric display and each LCD terminal. ii. Correct annunciator light for each alarm input at each annunciator and color graphic terminal as shown on the Drawings. iii. Correct printer logging for all system activity. d. System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows: i. Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input. ii. Trouble signals received for disconnect. e. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows: i. System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as specified. ii. System primary power shall be restored for 48 hours and system charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged battery bank. iii. System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD display. f. Fireman's HVAC override system functions shall be demonstrated as follows: i. Operation of key lockout switch preventing unauthorized operation of controls. ii. On/off control of each controlled element and test for interaction of other automatic and manual control functions while in the over-ride mode. iii. Correct status display of monitored elements. iv. Correct logging of activity to printer and historical memory as programmed.

5. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during the ATP procedure, at the discretion of the acceptance inspector, the test shall be terminated.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 22 of 23

a. The installing Contractor shall retest the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test documentation to the acceptance inspector.

b. The acceptance inspector may elect to require the complete ATP to be performed again if, in his opinion, modifications to the system hardware or software warrant complete retesting.

c. Changes made to a systems configuration program required by the acceptance inspector or to comply with the systems operating parameters shall be validated to insure that in making the software programming change no other part of the systems operation was effected. The validation shall utilize system software which meets the requirements of NFPA 72 section 7-1.6 "System Reacceptance Testing" as specified in the NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 1993 edition. Change validation methods other than that described will not be considered acceptable and shall allow the acceptance inspector to require the complete ATP to be performed again.

3.7 DOCUMENTATION

A. System documentation shall be furnished to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible masters and drawings electronic format.

2. System operation, installation and maintenance manuals.

3. Written documentation for all logic modules as programmed for system operation with a matrix showing interaction of all input signals with output commands.

4. Documentation of system voltage, current and resistance readings taken during the installation, testing and ATP phases of the system installation.

5. System program showing system functions, controls and labeling of equipment and devices.

3.8 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all test equipment as required to program devices and test the system, specifically an intelligent device tester and programmer.

3.9 SERVICES

A. Warrant the entire system against mechanical and electrical defects for a period described in the Contract general conditions. This period shall begin upon completed certification and test of the system or upon first beneficial use of the system, whichever is earlier.

B. The fire alarm system Subcontractor or manufacturer shall offer for the Owners consideration at the time of system submittal a priced inspection, maintenance, testing and repair contract in full compliance with the requirements of NFPA 72 H.

1. The services offered under this Contract shall be performed during the first year after system acceptance and the Owner shall have the option of renewing for single or multiple years up to five years at the price quoted upon completion of the warranty period.

2. The Contractor performing the contract services shall be qualified and listed to maintain ongoing certification of the completed system to the UL for specific installed system listing.

C. The installation Contractor shall furnish training as follows for a minimum of four employees of the system user:

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 28 31 00 (R0) September 2020 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Page 23 of 23

1. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgement of alarms.

2. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the system control panel.

3. Training in the testing of the system including logging of detector sensitivity, field test of devices and response to common troubles.

4. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 24 hours, conducted on three successive days, but shall be sufficient to cover all items specified.

END OF SECTION 28 31 00

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 33 79 00 (R0) September 2020 SITE GROUNDING Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Section Includes 1. Rod electrodes. 2. Active electrodes. 3. Exothermic connections. 4. Mechanical connectors. 5. Wire. 6. Grounding well components. B. Related Sections 1. Division 03 Cast-in-Place Concrete: Product and execution requirements for concrete used in concrete wells. 2. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 01 26 Electrical Testing and Commissioning.

1.2 REFERENCES A. British Standard Code of Practice CP1013 - Grounding. B. BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations, 17th Edition. C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. D. Local Codes and Regulations. E. Local Electrical Service Provider Regulations and Requirements. F. Local electric company requirements.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Multiple vertical rod electrodes buried in circular/square pattern around perimeter of building foundation as indicated on Drawings. B. Horizontal electrodes buried in ring pattern around perimeter of building foundation as indicated on Drawings at intersections of horizontal electrode grid. C. Single vertical / horizontal plate/ rod electrode for local grounding at utility transformer as per Local Electricity company requirements.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Overall Resistance to Ground less than 1 ohm.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and installation details of grounding components. C. Product Data: Submit data for grounding electrodes and connectors. D. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 33 79 00 (R0) September 2020 SITE GROUNDING Page 2 of 3

E. Provide samples of proposed devices together with the above submittal for approval of the Engi- neer.

7. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of electrodes and connections.

8. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Grounding equipment, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Preference shall be given to local manufacturers and suppliers/agents. B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall conform to the requirements of BS, IEC and Local Standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL Refer to Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems for material specifications and requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. C. Verify trenching is completed before installing horizontal electrodes.

3.2 INSTALLATION Refer to Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with Section 26 01 26.

B. Grounding resistance tests shall be carried out after installation of the individual Grounding systems in accordance with the Specifications. The Grounding resistance tests shall be carried out in accordance with Part 5 of the IEE Wiring Regulations 17th Edition and readings obtained officially recorded by all witnessing parties. 2. C. Prior to connection of Grounding rods to the Grounding system, the Grounding resistance of individual Grounding rod shall be measured by using an approved type of Grounding resistance tester. 3. D. After completion of all the connections of Grounding system, the Grounding resistance shall be measured from the Grounding test point in presence of the Engineer. E. All the Grounding resistance test reports shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Division 01 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate location of each accessible grounding connection and each chemical treatment well.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman 33 79 00 (R0) September 2020 SITE GROUNDING Page 3 of 3

END OF SECTION 33 79 00

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 1 of 9

Photo-voltaic System

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. These specifications cover Photovoltaic (PV) System(s) requirements including, but not limited to the supply, installation, commissioning and testing,on a turnkey project basis including all equipment, hardware, materials, documentation, labor, required for the installation for required power grid-connected PV systems:

The system nominal capacity is estimated based on estimation energy consumption it is the sole responsibility of the awarded contractor to establish the final and exact system capacity based on revisited load estimation and/or the available PV space per building.

Each PV system shall follow the standards and regulations adopted by the MEMR, EMRC and the local utility;

B. This includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Infrastructure, wiring, connections, and testing. 2. Solar panels and mounting system 3. Disconnects.

4. DC combiners(if any). 5. Inverters. 6. Any Monitoring facility bundled with the inverter. 7. Metering equipment and interfacing with Utility. 8. Labeling, identifications and signs. 9. Provide all labor and materials, and make all necessary connections, so that a complete and fully operational system shall be turned over to the owner. Any errors, omissions, or ambiguities concerning the PV system drawings and specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to starting any work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Electrical General Provisions.

2. Wiring.

3. Conduits.

4. switchboards-600 volt and below

1.03 REFERENCES A. All installation, inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the most current applicable International codes and standard including, but not limited to the following: Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 2 of 9

1. Local Jordanian code for photovoltaic system

2. DIN EN /IEC 61215: PV module design and type approval qualification standard. 3. DIN EN 61730: PV module safety qualification for safety class II 4. DIN EN 61701: Salt mist corrosion testing of photovoltaic modules (very well suited for use near the coast) 5. DIN EN 60068-2-60: Ammonia resistance (very well suited for use in agri- culture operations) 6. IEC 60068-2-68: Dust resistance (very well suited for use in dusty areas near deserts) 7. DIN 4102-1: Reaction to fire to the proof of the building material: low flammability (category B1) 8. IEC 60332-1: Fire performance 9. IEC 60332-1: Fire performance 10. IEC 61034; EN 50268-2: smoke Emission 11. DIN 51900: low fire load

12. IEEE 929-2000 – Recommended Practice for Utility Interface of Pho- tovoltaic Systems.

13. IEEE 1262-195 – Recommended Practice for Qualification of Photovoltaic (PV) Modules and Panels.

14. IEEE 1537 – Standards for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with Elec- tric Power Systems. 15. NFPA72 – National Fire Code. NFPA 853 – Solar Photovoltaic near Buildings

12. NRTL – Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

13. UL 1703 – Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels.

14. UL 1741 – Standard for Static Inverters and Charge Controllers for Use in Pho- tovoltaic Systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings on standard size shall include but not be limited to: Cover page with legend, common notes, symbol schedule, vicinity and Key map(s), code compliance, contractor and engineer’s names and contact information, and drawing index.

Site plan showing PV arrays locations, and identifiable features. 1. Riser diagram and General Notes:

a. Connection to utility AC disconnects and main distribution board Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 3 of 9

b. Indicate conduits, power wires, and combiners, disconnects, inverters, meters, etc.

2. Complete point to point PV System interconnection diagram(s):

a. Identify all DC and AC components.

b. Indicate conduit and wire characteristics, sizes and quantities.

c. Indicate conduit fills and voltage drops.

d. Provide bill of materials.

3. S ite plans showing all mechanical equipments such as (HVAC, Water tanks, solar panels,.etc), PV arrays, Inverters, combiner boxes, disconnect, edge zones, access ways, etc.

a. Indicate all system(s) interface connections.

b. Provide AC and DC wiring plans.

4. Assembly Details. Provide as minimum the following details:

a. Array attachment details.

b. Support details and spacing

c. dimensions.

d. Module to module wiring diagrams.

e. DC wire tray attachment and DC combiner mounting details.

f. Conduit supports and structural penetrations.

g. Grounding details.

h. Warning typical signs details.

i. AC disconnects sign.

ii. Interactive system point of interception sign.

iii. DC switches warning sign.

iv. Solar array warning sign.

7. Original Manuals of individual equipment.

8. As- Built drawings. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 4 of 9

9.Annual power production calculations of the system based on actual site data. De- tailed financial analysis including cost per KWp installed savings (annual, lifetime), simple payback period, ROI, IRR and optionally, NPV and cash flow.

1.0 . All software licenses and electronic keys if applicable.

11. On-site training schedule for system operation. 12. A complete list of recommended spare parts with pricing for the Owner’s consideration. 13. Composite CD ROM with AutoCAD drawings in a “.dwg” format.

1.05 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall be licensed Electrical Contractor.and shall have adequate experience installing systems of similar size and complexity.

1. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum 2 years experience installing products and systems of similar scope and complexity. Provide company background, experience, capabilities and organization.

2. Installer shall have completed at least 5 projects of equivalent scope and complexity. a List of completed installations in Jordan showing KWp, date of completion, description, and if possible photos for each reference. Also Ac- cumulate KWp (installed and planned) to date.

3. Installer shall submit certification from the equipment manufacturer indicating that installer is an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer and/or is trained on the installations of the specified PV system products.

4. Installer shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing repair service to the equipment.

5. Installer shall furnish a letter certifying equipment has been installed according to factory standards and that system is operating properly.

6. System installation shall not begin until Shop Drawings are submitted and approved by the Supervision Engineer.

PART 2 – SYSTEM DETAILS

2.01 SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes the requirements for the main components, the equipment and the design of the Plant. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 5 of 9

3.1 PV Modules . Solar PV panels suitable for the project purposes and local conditions; . Solar PV panel should be of mono-crystalline technology; . The module rated power should be at least 400 Wp at STC; . The rated output power of any supplied module shall have positive tolerance; . Solar PV panel conversion efficiency should be equal to or greater than 19.5 % under STC; . The supplied module DC voltage should be not less than 1000 VDC; . The module type must conform with CE and IEC 61215, IEC 61730, IEC 61701 or equivalent standards; The bidder shall provide the manufacturer certificates, proving that the PV modules are compliant with these requirements; . PV panels should be procured from tier-1 manufacturers only; . The PV panels must have a minimum manufacturing warranty of 10 years and a performance warranty of a minimum of 25 years. The minimum power warranties shall be as following: - First 10 years at 90% of the nominal rated power output; - Subsequent 15 years at 80% of the nominal rated power output (linear power output characteristic will be accepted) . The contractor shall provide flash reports for the supplied modules before fixing the modules. 3.2 Solar Inverter ▪ On grid string inverters, multi MPPT technology; ▪ The inverters must comply with British standard ENA, G59/3; ▪ The minimum ‘European Efficiency’ of the inverter shall be 97.9%; ▪ Complete installation following recommendations by the manufacturer; ▪ Ground connection of the inverter to the equipotential bonding conductor and to the protective conductor of the AC side; ▪ PV specific surge arrester type 2 shall be provided on the DC side; ▪ AC Type 1+2 surge arrestor shall be provided on the AC side; ▪ Setting, labelling and commissioning of inverters; ▪ Inverters shall be suitable for the Plant climatic conditions and with proven track record for similar projects; ▪ Monitoring System: The inverters shall be integrated in one plant monitoring system; ▪ Suitable for outdoor installation, IP54. ▪ Sun shades has to be installed for further protection against sunlight ▪ Product Warranty: not less than 5 years

DC and AC cabling circuit cable routing

▪ All cables and connectors used for the installation of the solar array must be of solar grade robust and durable in harsh environmental conditions including High temperatures, UV radiation, rain, humidity and dirt as per IEC standards. Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 6 of 9

▪ Design, procure and supply all DC cables, connections, fixings and cable trays between the PV panels and the Inverters and all the AC connection and cables between the inverters and their respective MDBs. ▪ DC Cables: Outer sheath of cables shall be electron beam cross-linked XLPE type, or equivalent. Cable Jacket should also be electron beam cross-linked XLPE, flame retardant, UV resistant. 4mm2 or 6mm2 cables can be used. ▪ Cables terminations shall be made with suitable cable lugs & sockets etc., crimped properly and passed through brass compression type cable glands at the entry & exit point of enclosures, or equivalent. ▪ All cable/wires shall be provided with UV resistant printed ferrules for both DC and AC sides. The marking on tags shall be done with good quality letter and number ferrules of proper sizes so that the cables can be identified easily. ▪ Cable trays and racks shall also be provided of hot dip galvanized steel. ▪ AC Cable trays shall have a spare area of 50% of the whole section, a minimum distance equivalent to one diameter of the AC cables is to be left between cables on the cable trays. ▪ Cables with different voltage level shall be separated by use of different ladders or trays. Particular attention should be given to separating Power lines from control cables. ▪ Cable trays in accessible areas shall be protected by use of a cover. ▪ Supply and Install a complete earthing system including earthing rods and all earth wiring and accessories for equipotential connection. Monitoring System

▪ A monitoring system shall be provided by the contractor which allows real time data; ▪ The system shall allow interface through web portal for 5 years as minimum. Display Board

▪ The display board shall present: Instantaneous power generated, energy produced and CO2 emissions; ▪ The display shall have outdoor enclosure; ▪ The graphic display has to be approved by UNOPS. PV Mounting Structure

▪ Module mounting structure should be made of hot dip galvanized steel ▪ All galvanized items should have a minimum galvanization thickness of 275 g/m2 (G90). ▪ Earthing clamp shall be used for all systems ▪ No roof punching will be allowed; ▪ Cutting and drilling lines and installation scratches to be treated by mean of zinc painting.

2.02 SYSTEM RATING

A. System shall be sized to provide the KWp as per section 1.01

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 7 of 9

B. The systems shall be rated for outdoor installation. The system equipment shall be capable of operating under the locations maximum and minimum documented temperatures during summer and winter times. The entire system must be rated and warranted to withstand and operate under these conditions.

PART 3 –

EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Equipment mounted in exterior locations shall be properly rated.

B. All equipment and wire installation shall conform to manufacturers’ recommendations.

C. All connections of bus bars, grounding rods, and cables shall be in accordance with the requirements of applicable codes and standards.

D. Contractor shall coordinate his work with other aspects of mechanical, structural, and electrical systems to obtain a complete and operating system in accordance with the contract documents.

E. The contractor is responsible for the following activities with the controlling utility at his own cost:-

 Apply for PV system interconnection with the utility grid.  Follow up any initial technical studies (if any).  Follow up any operation acceptance test.  Coordinate the final interconnection contract.

F. The contractor shall submit three technical offers for Photovoltaic system from three global famous brands.

G. The contractor and supplier shall submit technical tests certification from accredited international destinations show compliance with the specifications under which the manufacturer in terms of capacity and efficiency

H. The contractor shall provide all technical calculations required for Photovoltaic system which are taking approval from engineer.

I. The components of Photovoltaic system must be installed more than two years in similar projects on Jordan.

J. The works of photovoltaic system shall be executed by qualified companies and specialist on this field and registered at the Ministry of Industry and Trade,the company has execute similar projects and have been installed more than two years on the similar projects.

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 8 of 9

K. The company is executing the project will be approved by the employer or his representative and upon the recommendation of Engineer.

L. The system will be approved by the employer or his representative and upon the recommendation of Engineer.

3.02 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment and all required wiring. Provide required conductor terminations to devices for a complete system to function as specified and indicated on Drawings.

B. Conductors shall be installed within conduits, boxes, and terminal cabinets in a totally enclosed installation. Furnish and install conductors required to connect incoming and outgoing circuits. Wiring within equipment and terminal cabinets shall be installed to conform to codes and standards. Wiring shall be cabled, and securely fastened in place so that no weight is imposed on equipment or terminals.

C. Conductors shall be color-coded and tagged with code markers at terminal cabinets, and equipment. A wire index shall be typed and installed on terminal cabinet doors. Index shall be covered with clear plastic adhesive covers. Wiring shall be identified as to building and location of devices.

D. Complete installation shall comply with local building and electrical codes, manufacturer’s instructions, and applicable industry standards.

E. Location of the infrastructure and equipment shall conform to architectural features of the building and other Works already in place, and must be ascertained in the field before the start of Work.

F. Drawings generally indicate Work to be provided, but do not indicate all bends, transi- tions or special fittings required to clear Works already in place. Investigate conditions where conduits are to be installed, and furnish and install required fittings.

G. Prepare mounting system to receive PV modules in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in compliance with accepted shop drawings.

E. Adequate ventilation shall be provided to ensure that all system components are operated within their environmental ratings.

H. Provide warning signs as required by applicable codes.

3.03 SYSTEM COMMISSIOINING AND TESTING

A. PV modules shall be factory tested for design performance.

B. Inverter shall be factory tested for designated performance

Rehabilitation Of (ACOR) Building in Amman September 2020 Photo Voltaic Page 9 of 9

C. Installer is responsible for identifying required tests to be conducted by himself or the Utility, and he shall undertake the coordinating, scheduling, and conducting of these tests. Tests shall include the following as a minimum:

1. System features and components under normal operation.

3. System shutdown from utility.

4. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

G. All defects resulting from tests shall be corrected prior to substantial completion.

3.04 SERVICE MANUALS

A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, 3 copies of the service manuals. Each manual shall include the following:

1. Original manuals, for every major system component. Data sheets are not acceptable.

2. A printed copy of the system configuration, including all system labeling codes, and passwords.

3. Final test report.

4. Detailed explanation of the operation of the system.

5. Instructions for routine maintenance.

6. Detailed wiring diagrams and updated shop drawings that include all revisions made in the field and any other construction change documents (if any) including interface details with other systems.

7. Provide a CD ROM electronic copy of the updated system As-Built Drawings to the Owner, prepare this copy in the latest version of AutoCAD; along with the electronic copy provide a full size bond copy. Include one CD-ROM of the up-dated As-Built Drawings into each of the Service Manuals. CD and folded drawings shall be secured and inserted into the Service Manuals via a three-hole punched protective CD case and protective envelopes for the drawings.

8. All materials and required deliverables shall be submitted to the Owner.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect the Work of PV system until Substantial Completion.

3.06 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off Project Site.